Sony PXW-X400 Operating instructions
Below you will find brief information for PXW-X400, PXW-X400KC, PXW-X400KF. This document provides operating instructions for solid-state memory camcorders, covering setup, settings, shooting, clip operations, menu display, saving user configurations, connecting devices, and maintenance. It also details network capabilities, file transfers and various functions such as audio input and output, timecode settings and video recording modes to get you familiar with the camcorder's features and operations.
PDF
Download
Document
Advertisement
Advertisement
4-587-873-19 (1) GB Solid-State Memory Camcorder Operating Instructions PXW-X400 / PXW-X400KC / PXW-X400KF Software Version 6.1 © 2015 Sony Corporation 0002 Table of Contents 1. Overview Name and Function of Parts............................................... 3 Screen Display...................................................................13 Supplied Lens and Viewfinder..........................................20 2. Preparation Preparing a Power Supply................................................23 Attaching a Viewfinder.....................................................24 Using the Camcorder for the First Time...........................26 Mounting and Adjusting the Lens....................................27 Preparing the Audio Input System...................................29 Attaching and Adjusting Peripheral Devices....................30 Handling SxS Memory Cards............................................31 Handling SD Cards for Saving Configuration Data...........33 Using a Media Adaptor.....................................................34 3. Settings and Adjustments Format Settings.................................................................35 Obtaining Location Information (GPS).............................59 5. Network Configuration Network Functions Supported by the Camcorder...........60 Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN..........................61 Connecting to the Internet...............................................65 Transferring Files...............................................................69 ALL Files..........................................................................129 Scene Files.......................................................................130 Reference Files................................................................131 Lens Files.........................................................................132 Gamma Files...................................................................133 9. Connecting External Devices Transmitting Streaming Video and Audio.......................73 Connecting a Remote Control Unit.................................134 Streaming High Quality Video..........................................74 Connecting an External Monitor.....................................138 Using Wi-Fi Remote Control.............................................75 Managing/Editing Clips with a Computer.....................139 Configuring from the Web Menu.....................................77 Configuring a Shooting and Recording System.............141 Supported Network Functions and Operating Limitations................................................................82 Recording External Input Signals...................................143 6. Clip Operations Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen.......................83 Thumbnail Menu..............................................................89 7. Menu Display and Settings 10. Maintenance and Inspection Maintenance...................................................................144 Error/Warning System....................................................145 11. Appendix Messages Displayed During Operation..........................148 Expansion of Imaging Dynamic Range............................38 Setup Menu Organization.................................................90 Adjusting the Black Balance and White Balance.............39 Items Saved in User Data................................................154 Basic Setup Menu Operations...........................................92 Setting the Electronic Shutter...........................................41 Special Recording Support by Recording Format..........164 Editing the User Menu......................................................94 Setting Auto Iris................................................................42 Picture Cache Rec Mode Settings...................................165 User Menu (Factory Default Configuration).....................96 Adjusting the Focus..........................................................44 Media Recording and Playback Time.............................166 Operation Menu................................................................97 Adjusting the Audio Level................................................45 Usage Precautions...........................................................167 Paint Menu......................................................................106 Setting Time Data.............................................................47 Specifications..................................................................169 Maintenance Menu.........................................................111 4. Shooting Basic Operations................................................................49 Advanced Operations........................................................51 File Menu.........................................................................122 Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches.................124 8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data Proxy Data.........................................................................55 User Configuration Data..................................................127 Planning Metadata...........................................................57 User Files.........................................................................128 0003 1. Overview Name and Function of Parts “Preparing a Power Supply” (page 23) Power Supply [Note] For your safety, and to ensure proper operation of the camcorder, Sony recommends the use of the BP-GL95B Battery Pack. 6 6. Camera adaptor connector Enables connection of a CA-TX70/FB70 HD Camera Adaptor. To connect an adaptor, remove the cover. 1 2 3 4 5 1. LIGHT (video light) switch Determines how a video light connected to the LIGHT connector (page 4) is turned on and off. AUTO: When the POWER switch of the video light is in the on position, the video light is turned on automatically while the camcorder is recording. MANUAL: You can turn the video light on or off manually, using its own switch. 2. POWER switch Turns the main power supply on () and off (). [Note] 5. Battery attachment shoe Attach a BP-GL95B Battery Pack. Alternatively, you can attach an AC-DN10A AC Adaptor to operate the camcorder from an AC power supply. When the camcorder is set for recording in Picture Cache Rec mode, it is not possible to turn on the light before operation to start recording is carried out (or while data is being stored in memory). 3. DC IN (DC power input) connector (XLR type, 4-pin, male) 4. DC OUT 12V (DC power output) connector (4-pin, female) Supplies power for the CBK-DL1 USB Adaptor and HDVF-L750 Viewfinder (maximum 1.8 A). 0004 1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts ˎˎ When connecting or disconnecting an interface cable to this connector, power off the camcorder first. Accessory Attachments 1 2 Controls Near the Lens 8. Lens mount securing rubber After locking the lens in position using the lens locking lever, fit this rubber over the lower of the two projections. This fixes the lens mount, preventing it from coming loose. 3 45 9. Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob (page 24) 10. Attachment for optional microphone holder 9 6 7 8 10 11 (page 29) and attachment for supplied guard (page 61) 3 11. LIGHT (video light) connector (2-pin, female) (page 30) 12. Shoulder pad (page 30) 13. Lens cable clamp Clamps the lens cable. 14. MIC IN (microphone input) (+48 V) connector (XLR type, 5-pin, female) Connect a stereo microphone to this connector. The power (+48 V) is supplied via this connector. 15. LENS connector (12-pin) (page 27) [Note] When connecting or disconnecting the lens cable to this connector, power off the camcorder first. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1. Wireless receiver insertion slot (page 29) “Attaching a Wireless Receiver” (page 29) 2. Shoulder strap fitting (page 30) 3. Accessory shoe (page 30) 4. Viewfinder front-to-back positioning lever (page 25) 5. Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring (page 24) 6. Viewfinder attachment shoe (page 24) 7. VF (viewfinder) connectors (26-pin, rectangular and 20-pin, round) The analog interface connector (20-pin) is for connection of an HDVF series viewfinder, and the digital interface connector (26-pin) is for connection of a CBK-VF02 HD viewfinder. Connect a viewfinder connection cable to the connector compatible with the viewfinder being used. [Notes] ˎˎ Do not connect viewfinders to both connectors at the same time. 16. Tripod mount When using the camcorder on a tripod, attach the tripod adaptor (optional). 17. Lens mount (special bayonet mount) (page 27) 18. Lens locking lever (page 27) 19. Lens mount cap Remove by pushing the lens locking lever up. When no lens is mounted, keep this cap fitted for protection from dust. 1 4 5 2 6 1. REC START (recording start) button Press to start recording. Press it again to stop recording. The operation is the same as that of the VTR button on the lens. 2. SHUTTER switch Set to ON to use the electronic shutter. Push to SELECT to switch the shutter speed or shutter mode setting. When this switch is operated, the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about three seconds. “Setting the Electronic Shutter” (page 41) 0005 1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts [Note] If Flash Band Reduce is On, setting the SHUTTER switch to ON turns off the Flash Band Reduce function and the FBR indicator disappears from the viewfinder screen. Subsequently, setting the SHUTTER switch to OFF turns on the Flash Band Reduce function and the FBR indicator reappears on the viewfinder screen. 3. FILTER knob Switches between four ND filters built into this camcorder. When this selector is used, the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about three seconds. FILTER knob setting ND filter 1 CLEAR 2 1/4 ND (attenuates light to approximately 1/4) 3 1/16 ND (attenuates light to approximately 1/16) 4 1/64 ND (attenuates light to approximately 1/64) You can change a Maintenance menu setting so that different white balance settings can be stored for different FILTER knob positions. This allows you to automatically obtain optimum white balance for the current shooting conditions in linkage with the filter selection. “Adjusting the White Balance” (page 39) 4. MENU knob (page 92) 5. AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/black balance adjustment) switch Activates the automatic white/black balance adjustment functions. WHITE: Adjust the white balance automatically. If the WHITE BAL switch (page 6) is set to A or B, the white balance setting is stored in the corresponding memory. If the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST, the automatic white balance adjustment function does not operate. BLACK: Adjust the black set and black balance automatically. You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even when the ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) function is operating. If you push the switch to the WHITE side once more during the automatic white balance adjustment, the adjustment is canceled and the white balance setting returns to the original setting. If you push the switch to the BLACK side once more during the automatic black balance adjustment, the adjustment is canceled and the black balance setting returns to the original setting. LCD Monitor Side (1) 1 2 3 4 5 6. MIC (microphone) LEVEL knob (page 45) 6 10 12 789 11 12 13 14 0006 1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts 1. ASSIGN. (assignable) 1/2/3 switches You can assign a function using Operation >Assignable Switch in the setup menu (page 124). The ASSIGN. 1/3 switches are provided with an indicator to show whether a function is assigned to the switch (ON) or not (OFF). 5. MONITOR (audio monitor selection) switches By means of combinations of the two switches, you can select audio that you want to hear through the built-in speaker or earphones. 2. ONLINE button When network client mode or the streaming function is assigned to this button, press and hold until the indicator is lit orange. Then, press the button again, turning the indicator blue, to enable network client mode or the streaming function. To exit the enabled function, press and hold the button until the indicator turns off. The button can also be used as an assignable switch when assigned with functions other than those above (page 125). Upper switch Audio output CH-1/CH-3 Channel 1 audio MIX Channels 1 and 2 mixed audio (stereo)a) CH-2/CH-4 Channel 2 audio 3. ALARM (alarm tone volume adjustment) knob Controls the volume of the warning tone that is output via the built-in speaker or optional earphones. When the knob is turned to the minimum position, no sound can be heard. However, if Maintenance >Audio >Min Alarm Volume in the setup menu is set to [Set], the alarm tone is audible even when this volume control is at the minimum position. ALARM Minimum Maximum 4. MONITOR (monitor volume adjustment) knob Controls the volume of the sound other than the warning tone that is output via the built-in speaker or earphones. When the knob is turned to the minimum position, no sound can be heard. When the lower switch is set to CH-1/2 When the lower switch is set to CH-3/4 Upper switch Audio output CH-1/CH-3 Channel 3 audio MIX Channels 3 and 4 mixed audio (stereo)a) CH-2/CH-4 Channel 4 audio a)By connecting stereo headphones to the EARPHONE jack, you can hear the audio in stereo. (Maintenance >Audio >Headphone Out in the setup menu must be set to Stereo.) 6. ASSIGN. (assignable) 0 switch You can assign a function using Operation >Assignable Switch in the setup menu (page 124). Off is assigned to these switches when the camcorder is shipped from the factory. This is a momentary type switch. Each press of the switch turns the function assigned to this switch on or off. 7. GAIN switch Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match the lighting conditions during shooting. The gain values corresponding to the L, M, and H settings can be selected using Operation >Gain Switch in the setup menu (page 101) (factory settings are L=0 dB, M=6 dB, and H=12 dB). When this switch is adjusted, the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about three seconds. 8. OUTPUT/DCC (output signal/dynamic contrast control) switch Switches the video signal output from the camera module, between the following two. BARS: Output the color bar signal. CAM: Output the video signal being shot. When this is selected, you can switch DCC1) on and off. 1)DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control): Against a very bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the subject, objects in the background will be lost in the glare. The DCC function will suppress the high intensity and restore much of the lost detail. It is particularly effective for shooting in the following cases. ˎˎ Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day ˎˎ Shooting a subject indoors, against a background through a window ˎˎ Any high contrast scene 9. WHITE BAL (white balance memory) switch Controls adjustment of the white balance. PRST: Adjust the color temperature to the preset value (the factory default setting: 3200K). Use this setting when you have no time to adjust the white balance. A or B: Recall the white balance adjustment settings already stored in A or B. Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch (page 5) to the WHITE position to automatically adjust the white balance and save the adjustment settings in memory A or memory B. B (ATW1)):When this switch is set to B and Operation >White Setting >White Switch <B> is set to [ATW] in the setup menu, ATW is activated. You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even when ATW is in use. When this switch is adjusted, the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about three seconds. 1)ATW (Auto Tracing White balance): The white balance of the picture being shot is adjusted automatically for varying lighting conditions. [Note] It may not be possible to adjust to the appropriate colors using ATW, depending on the lighting and subject conditions. Examples: ˎˎ When a single color dominates the subject, such as sky, sea, ground, or flowers. ˎˎ When the subject is under a light source of extremely high or extremely low color temperature. If execution of automatic tracing by the ATW function takes an unacceptably long time or only results in an inadequate effect, then execute the AWB function. 10. Switch cover Open this cover to use the MENU ON/OFF switch or the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch. 11. MENU ON/OFF switch To use the switch, open the cover. This switch is used to display the menu on the viewfinder screen or the test signal screen. Each time the switch is pushed down, the menu screen is turned on and off. The function of this switch is the same as that of the MENU button in the thumbnail screen operations section. [Note] It is not possible to turn off the menu screen by closing the cover. 12. MENU CANCEL/PRST (preset) /ESCAPE switch To use the switch, open the cover. This switch has different functions depending on whether or not a menu is displayed. Use the switch in the following way when the menu is displayed. CANCEL/PRST: Pushing this switch up to this position after a setting is changed in the setup menu displays the message to confirm whether the previous settings are canceled. Pushing this switch up to this position again cancels the previous settings. Pushing this switch up to this position before a setting is changed in the setup menu or after a setting change is canceled in the setup menu displays the message to confirm whether the setting is reset to the initial value. Pushing 0007 1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts this switch up to this position again resets the settings to the initial value. ESCAPE: Use this switch when the menu page, which has a hierarchical structure, is opened. Each time the switch is pushed to this position, the page returns to one stage higher in the hierarchy. 1. Built-in speaker The speaker can be used to monitor E-E 1) sound during recording, and playback sound during playback. The speaker also sounds alarms to reinforce visual warnings (page 145). If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE jack, the speaker output is suppressed automatically. LCD Monitor Side (2) [2] [1] 7 Use the switch in the following way when the menu is not displayed. CANCEL/PRST: Each time this switch is pushed upward, a window to confirm the menu settings and status of the camcorder appears on the viewfinder screen (page 13). The window consists of several pages, which are switched each time the switch is pushed upward. ESCAPE: To clear the page, push this switch down to the OFF position. 8 1) E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric.” In E-E mode, video and audio signals input to the camcorder are output after passing through internal electric circuits only. This can be used to check input signals. 9 2. LCD monitor Displays remaining battery capacity, remaining media capacity, audio levels, time data, and so on. It also allows you to check camera and playback pictures (page 13). You can adjust the position and angle of the LCD monitor. 10 11 12 1 2 3 13. UTILITY SD card slot Insert an SD card for saving camcorder settings. 14. ACCESS indicator Lights up orange when the SD card is being accessed. 4 5 3. WARNING indicator Lights up or flashes when an abnormality occurs (page 145). 6 13 14 15 16 17 4. ACCESS indicator Lights up in blue when data is written to or read from the recording media. 5. Audio control section (page 9) 6. Thumbnail screen operation section (page 9) 7. F REV (fast reverse) button and indicator This plays back at high speed in the reverse direction. The playback speed changes in the order ×4 ×15 ×24 with each press of the button. The indicator lights during high-speed playback in the reverse direction. 0008 1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts 8. PLAY/PAUSE button and indicator Press this button to view playback video images using the viewfinder screen or the LCD monitor. The indicator lights during playback. Press this button again during playback to pause, outputting a still image. At this time the indicator flashes at a rate of once per second. Pressing the F REV or F FWD button during playback or pause starts high speed playback in the forward or reverse direction. 9. F FWD (fast forward) button and indicator Display indication Description Video without superimposed information (MONI) Only the video appears. Status display (STATUS) (page 13) Counter indications, warnings, audio levels, and similar information appear. No video image appears. The EXPAND button function will be supported in a future upgrade. This plays back at high speed in the forward direction. The playback speed changes in the order ×4 ×15 ×24 with each press of the button. The indicator lights during high-speed playback in the forward direction. Pressing this button instantly freezes the time data displayed in the LCD monitor. (The timecode generator continues running.) Pressing this button again releases the hold. 10. PREV (previous) button For details about the time data display, see page 13. This jumps to the first frame of the current clip. If you press this together with the F REV button, the jump is to the first frame of the first recorded clip on the recording media. If you press this button twice in rapid succession, the jump is to the first frame of the preceding clip (or the first frame of the current clip when no preceding clips exist). 11. STOP button Press this button to stop playback. 12. NEXT button This jumps to the first frame of the next clip. If you press this together with the F FWD button, the jump is to the last frame of the last recorded clip on the recording media. 13. DISP SEL (display selection)/EXPAND (expand function) button With each press of this button, the display in the LCD monitor changes as follows. Display indication Description Video with superimposed information (CHAR) The LCD monitor displays the same text information as the viewfinder. 14. HOLD (display hold) button 15. RESET/RETURN button Resets the value shown in the time data display in the LCD monitor. According to the settings of the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch (page 9) and the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch (page 9), this button resets the display as follows. Switch settings RESET/RETURN button operation DISPLAY switch: COUNTER Reset counter to 00:00:00:00. DISPLAY switch: TC PRESET/REGEN/ CLOCK switch: PRESET F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch: SET Reset timecode to 00:00:00:00. Switch settings RESET/RETURN button operation DISPLAY switch: U-BIT PRESET/REGEN/ CLOCK switch: PRESET F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch: SET Reset user bits dataa) to 00:00:00:00. a)Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on the media, those bits which can be used to record useful information for the user such as scene number, shooting place, etc. “Setting Time Data” (page 47) This button returns to the previous screen when pressed during thumbnail screen display or essence mark thumbnail screen display. 16. DISPLAY switch This cycles the data displayed in the time data display in the LCD monitor through the sequence COUNTER, TC, and U-BIT (page 13). COUNTER: Display recording/playback duration counter. TC: Display timecode. U-BIT: Display user bits data. 17. BRIGHT (brightness) button Switches the brightness of the LCD monitor backlight. Each press of the button selects the next setting in the order shown in the following table. If you press the button with the LCD monitor off, the LCD backlight comes on in the H state. Setting LCD monitor backlight H High (select this to view the LCD monitor outdoors in the daytime) M Brightness between H and L L Low (select this to view the LCD monitor indoors or outdoors at night) OFF Off (the display is also off) 0009 1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts Thumbnail screen operations section and audio control section 1 2 3 4 8 9 5 6 1011 12 1. Thumbnail indicator This lights when the thumbnail screen is displayed. 2. THUMBNAIL button Press this button to display the thumbnail screen (page 83) and to carry out a thumbnail operation. Press once more to return to the original display. 3. SET button and arrow buttons Use these buttons to make timecode and user bit settings, and for thumbnail screen operations. When the menu is displayed, press this button to select an item or to confirm the setting change. 4. MENU button Each press of this button turns the setup menu display on and off. The function of this button is the same as that of the MENU ON/OFF switch. 5. F-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/recording run) switch Selects the operating mode of the internal timecode generator. The operating mode is set as explained below, depending on the position of the switch. 7 F-RUN: Timecode keeps advancing, regardless of whether the camcorder is recording. Use this setting when synchronizing the timecode with external timecode. SET: Sets the timecode or user bits. R-RUN: Timecode advances only during recording. Use this setting to have a consecutive timecode on the recording media. 8. ESSENCE MARK button By pressing this button when a thumbnail display is on the screen, you can view the following thumbnail displays of the essence-marked frames of the selected clip, depending on the item selected in a list displayed on the screen. All: Thumbnail display of all frames marked with essence marks. Rec Start: Thumbnail display of frames marked with Rec Start marks and of the first frames of clips (when the first frames are not marked with Rec Start marks). Shot Mark1: Thumbnail display of the frames marked with Shot Mark 1. Shot Mark2: Thumbnail display of the frames marked with Shot Mark 2. You can also select Shot Mark 0 and Shot Mark 3 to Shot Mark 9. If a clip is recorded using planning metadata that defines names for shot mark 0 to shot mark 9, the selection options in the list are displayed by the defined names. 9. SHIFT button Use this in combination with other buttons. 1/2/3/4 recording level) knobs Adjust the audio levels to be recorded on channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 when the AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 and AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switches are set to MANUAL. 10. PRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/CLOCK switch Selects the type of timecode to record. PRESET: Record new timecode on the media. REGEN: Record timecode continuous with the existing timecode recorded on the media. Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/RRUN switch, the camcorder operates in R-RUN mode. CLOCK: Record timecode synchronized to the internal clock. Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the camcorder operates in F-RUN mode. 7. AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 (audio channel 3/4 11. AUDIO SELECT CH1/CH2 (audio channel 1/2 “Setting the Timecode” (page 47) “Setting the User Bits” (page 47) 6. LEVEL CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (audio channel adjustment method selection) switches Select the audio level adjustment method for audio channels 3 and 4. AUTO: Automatic adjustment MANUAL: Manual adjustment adjustment method selection) switches Select the audio level adjustment method for audio channels 1 and 2. AUTO: Automatic adjustment MANUAL: Manual adjustment 12. AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (audio channel 1/2/3/4 input selection) switches Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio channels 1, 2, 3 and 4. FRONT: Audio input signals from the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector REAR: Audio input signals from an audio device connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors WIRELESS: Audio input signals from the UHF portable tuner if it is attached 000 10 1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts “Obtaining Location Information (GPS)” (page 59) Handle and Memory Card Slot Side [Note] Do not grasp this part of the camcorder when the GPS function is in use. SxS memory card slots (page 31) 654 3 2 3. PC connector 1 Used to put this camcorder into USB connection mode and use it as an external storage device for a computer. When a computer is connected to this connector, every memory card inserted in the camcorder is recognized as a drive on the computer. 7 8 10 11 4. External device connector Connect to a PSZ-HA/HB/HC series Portable Storage HDD (option), PSZ-SA25 Portable Storage SSD (option), a general-purpose external USB HDD, or USB flash drive to copy clips from the recording media inserted in an SxS card slot of the camcorder to USB media. [Note] 9 This connector should be used only for connecting the type of devices above. It cannot be used for connecting a USB hub or other devices. 5. USB wireless LAN module connector Connect to an IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied), CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option), CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor Kit (option), or modem (option) to enable communications with wireless LAN devices and networks. 12 1. ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches You can assign a function using Operation >Assignable Switch in the setup menu (page 125). Off is assigned to these switches when the camcorder is shipped from the factory. 2. GPS module Contains a built-in GPS module. “Connecting to the Internet” (page 65) 10. HDMI connector Connect an HDMI device, such as a monitor or recording unit, to output HD or SD HDMI video and audio signals. 11. GENLOCK IN (genlock signal input) connector (BNC type) This connector inputs a reference signal when the camcorder is to be genlocked or when timecode is to be synchronized with external equipment. The supported reference signals vary depending on the current system frequency as shown in the following table. Supported reference signals 59.94i 1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i 59.94P 1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i 50i 1080/50i, 576/50i 50P 1080/50i, 576/50i “Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN” (page 61) 29.97P 1080/59.94i, 480/59.94i “Connecting to the Internet” (page 65) 25P 1080/50i, 576/50i 23.98P 1080/23.98PsF Insert an SD card for recording proxy data. 14 [CAUTION] ˎˎ For safety, do not connect the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage to this port. Follow the instructions for this port. ˎˎ When you connect the LAN cable of the unit to peripheral device, use a shielded-type cable to prevent malfunction due to radiation noise. System frequency 6. PROXY SD card slot (page 55) 13 9. Network connector Connects to a network via a wired LAN connection using a LAN cable (sold separately). 7. (NFC) mark A built-in NFC antenna is provided. 12. TC IN (timecode input) connector (BNC type) To apply an external lock to the timecode of the camcorder, input the reference timecode. 8. SLOT SELECT (SxS memory card select) “Setting the Timecode” (page 47) button When SxS memory cards are loaded in both card slots A and B, press this button to select the card you want to use (page 31). 13. VIDEO OUT connector (BNC type) Outputs video signals for monitoring. 000 11 1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts 14. TC OUT (timecode output) connector (BNC type) To lock the timecode of an external VTR to the timecode of this camcorder, connect this connector to the external VTR’s timecode input connector. 1. TALLY (back tally) indicator (red) Lights up during recording. It will not light if the TALLY switch is set to OFF. It also flashes when the WARNING indicator operates. The tally indicator on the front of the viewfinder and the REC indication on the viewfinder screen light or flash in the same manner. Tally Indicator and Connector Section 1 2 “Error/Warning System” (page 145) 2. TALLY switch Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator function. 3. EARPHONE jack (stereo, mini jack) You can monitor the E-E sound during recording and playback sound during playback. When an alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound through the earphone. Plugging an earphone into the jack automatically cuts off the built-in speaker. You can select monaural or stereo using Maintenance >Audio >Headphone Out in the setup menu. [Notes] ˎˎ Use monaural (2-pole) or stereo (3-pole) type earphones. Use of other earphones may damage the camcorder. ˎˎ Use earphones with 16 Ω impedance. 3 4 5 4. AUDIO IN selector switch Select the audio source you connect to the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 connectors. LINE: When connecting a stereo amplifier or other external audio signal source AES/EBU: When connecting an external digital audio signal source MIC: When connecting a microphone. 6 5. +48V/OFF (+48V external power source on/ 17 8 9 10 11 off) switch Switch between the following settings, according to the microphone used for audio input. +48V: Microphone requiring external power source (phantom power) OFF: Microphone using internal power source or not requiring a power source 6. SDI IN (SDI input) connector (BNC type) Connector used when connecting an external SDI signal source to the camcorder. 000 12 1. Overview: Name and Function of Parts 7. AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 (audio channel 1 and channel 2 input) connectors (XLR type, 3-pin, female) Connect to audio equipment or a microphone. 8. Bottom cover This is provided for protecting the cables connected to the connectors on the rear panel. By loosening the screws which retain the cover to the bottom of the camcorder, you can adjust the position of the cover depending on the size and shape of the microphone or audio cable plugs. After adjusting the position, tighten the screws to secure the cover. 9. AUDIO OUT connector (XLR type, 5-pin, male) Outputs the audio signals recorded on audio channels 1 and 2 or audio channels 3 and 4. The audio signals are selected by the MONITOR switch. 10. REMOTE connector (8-pin) Connect a remote control unit to control the camcorder remotely. [Note] Before connecting/disconnecting the Remote Control Unit to/from the camcorder, be sure to turn off the camcorder POWER switch. 11. SDI OUT 1/2 connectors (BNC type) Outputs an HD SDI or SD SDI signal (with embedded audio). The output signal from this connector can be turned on/off using Operation >Input/Output >SDI Out1 Output or SDI Out2 Output in the setup menu. [Note] Make sure that the ground connection between the camcorder and external device is securely established before turning the power on. (It is recommended that the camcorder and external device be turned on after connecting the 75 Ω coaxial cable.) If the external device must be connected to the camcorder while the camcorder is on, connect the 75 Ω coaxial cable to the external device first and then connect it to the camcorder. 000 13 1. Overview Screen Display LCD Monitor Information Screen (Status Display) 8. Remaining media capacity indicator Shows bar segments indicating the remaining capacity of recording media in the slots. Status Screens The LCD monitor information screen is displayed by pressing the DISP SEL/EXPAND (display select/ expand) button (page 8). 9. Warning indicator area Displays warnings when trouble with recording occurs. The status screens allow you to check camcorder settings and various types of status information. When no menu is displayed, push the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch up to the CANCEL/ PRST position to display the status screen. Each push selects the next status screen. The following status screens can be displayed. 1 23 4 5 For details, see “Error/Warning System” (page 145). 10. Clip name display Displays the name of the clip currently recording when recording, or displays the name of the next clip to be recorded during recording standby. 12 13 9 11 10 6 8 1. File system indicator 2. File format indicator 3. Status display PB: Appears during media playback. NDF: Appears when non-drop-frame timecode is selected. EXT-LK: Appears when the internal timecode generator is locked to an external signal input to the TC IN (timecode input) connector. HOLD: Appears when the operation mode of the internal timecode generator is set to R-RUN and stopped. 4. System frequency indicator Indicates the system frequency of video being currently played or recorded. 7 5. Audio format indicator Indicates the audio recording format or the audio format of clip being currently played. Indicator Recording format 16bit HD420 HQ DVCAM MPEG IMX 50 24bit HD422 50 MPEG IMX 50 XAVC Intra XAVC Long 11. Time data display Switches displays of duration, timecode, and user bits data, depending on the position of the DISPLAY switch. Displays the type of data currently shown in the time data display, as follows. TCG: Recorded timecode TCR: Playback timecode UBG: Recorded user bits UBR; Playback user bits CNT: Counter DUR: Duration CLK: Time display (when the PRESET/REGEN/ CLOCK switch is set to CLOCK) When the HOLD button is pressed to hold the timecode value, the timecode is displayed in the format shown below. When the HOLD button is pressed again to release the hold, the timecode is displayed in the normal format. 6. Audio level meters The three dots indicate that the timecode and counter progress are in hold mode. 7. Remaining battery capacity indicator 12. Resolution indicator Indicates the resolution of the output video. Indicates the audio recording or playback levels of channels 1 to 4. Displays the battery remaining capacity icon and the remaining recording time. 13. Recording format indicator Indicates the current recording format or the recording format of clip being currently played. Status screen Display indication Camera Status screen Settings and status information related to shooting Audio Status screen Settings and status information related to audio input and output System Status screen Settings and status information related to recording Video Output Status screen Settings and status information related to video output Assignable Button Status Names of functions screen assigned to assignable switches Battery Status screen Status of the battery mounted on the camcorder Media Status screen Status information about recording media Network Status 1 screen Settings and status information related to the network Network Status 2 screen Settings and status information related to streaming 000 14 1. Overview: Screen Display Camera Status screen Display item Description CH 1/CH 2/ CH 3/CH 4 Audio level, input source, reference input level, and wind noise reduction filter settings for each channel Video Output Status screen System Status screen Display item Description Display item Description Gain Gain level in dB units SDI Shutter Electronic shutter status SDI OUT connector output settings (output picture size, output form, output rate, superimposition) HDMI HDMI connector output settings (output picture size, output form, output rate, superimposition) Video VIDEO OUT connector output settings (output picture size, superimposition) Gamma Gamma category and curve White White balance mode setting Gain Switch GAIN switch status Zebra Zebra pattern status Iris Iris f-stop value Focal Length Focal length Focus Distance Focus distance Display item Description System Frequency System frequency File System File system Rec Format Recording format Clip Continuous Rec function on/ off setting Depth Of Field Depth of field Zoom Speed Zoom speed configured for the lens ZOOM button Clip Continuous Rec HDR Setting HDR settings Title Prefix Clip name prefix [Note] Picture Size Picture size Simul Rec Simul Rec function on/off Rec Function Enabled special recording format and settings Picture Cache Rec Picture Cache Rec function on/off setting Number Clip name suffix Gamma Gamma category in use Proxy Recording Mode Proxy data recording function on/ off setting Displayed only when using CBKZ-SLHL1 HDR LICENSE (option). Audio Status screen Display item Description Detected Battery Detected type of the battery Remaining Remaining capacity (%) Charge Count Number of recharges Capacity Remaining capacity (Ah) Voltage Voltage Manufacture Date Date of battery manufacture Power Source Power supply source Supplied Voltage Supplied power source voltage Media Status screen Assignable Button Status screen Battery Status screen Display item Description SxSA Remaining capacity (bar graph and remaining time display) and media life of media in slot A (0% to 100% indication. Replacement recommended at 0%. Displayed only for media that supports this function.) SxSB Remaining capacity (bar graph and remaining time display) and media life of media in slot B (0% to 100% indication. Replacement recommended at 0%. Displayed only for media that supports this function.) 000 15 1. Overview: Screen Display Display item Description Display item Description Network client mode status SD Proxy Remaining capacity (bar graph and remaining time display) and media life (displayed only if available) of media in PROXY SD card slot Wired LAN Remote Remote control enabled/ disabled state when connected using a LAN cable Status display State Description Off CCM not connected Network client mode is off. SD Utility A Remaining capacity (bar graph and remaining capacity) and media life (displayed only if available) of media in UTILITY SD card slot IP Address (Wired) IP address of wired LAN connection Network Status 2 screen Connected CCM connected Network client mode is on, CCM is connected, and CCM control is enabled. Connecting Connecting to CCM (disconnected) mark is displayed if the media is protected. Network Status 1 screen Display item Description Setting Network setting status Wireless Network Wireless network setting status Device Name Name of attached USB wireless LAN module device IP Address (Wireless) IP address of wireless LAN connection MAC Addr. (Wireless) MAC address of device attached the USB wireless LAN module connector Wireless Network Modem setting status Device Name Name of attached modem device IP IP address of attached modem Address(Modem) device Wired LAN Wired LAN network connection status Display item Description NW Client Mode Status Network client mode status For details about the status, see “Network client mode status” (page 15). CCM Name Name of the connected CCM when using network client mode Streaming Status Streaming distribution status Streaming Size Picture size of the currently selected streaming setting Streaming Bit Rate Bit rate of the currently selected streaming setting Streaming Type Type of the currently selected streaming setting Streaming Dest. Add. Streaming destination address Streaming Dest. Port Streaming destination port Number of Distribution Number of streaming distribution destinations File Transfer File transfer progress status Transfer to: Server name of file transfer destination Attempting to connect to CCM (or disconnecting). Wait until connection (disconnection) is successful. If the status does not change from “Connecting,” the CCM address setting may be incorrect. Check that the address is set correctly. Awaiting CCM connection Network client standby mode is on, but the network setting is off. Enable the network setting to connect to the CCM. Address Error CCM address error Auth. Failed CCM user name/ The user name or password error password used to connect to the CCM may be incorrect. Check that the setting is correct. The host name or IP address of the CCM to connect may be incorrect. Check that the setting is correct. Status display State Description No Inet Access Internet Cannot connect to connection error the network. The network settings may be incorrect. Check the network settings. Cert. not Valid CCM certification not valid error The CCM certificate is not valid. The date setting may be invalid. Check the date setting. 000 16 1. Overview: Screen Display 3. Color temperature indicator Displays the color temperature of the white balance. Viewfinder Screen The viewfinder screen displays images during shooting (recording or recording standby) and playback with camcorder information superimposed on the display. You can toggle the display of information on/off 7 1 23 4 5 6 8 using the DISPLAY switch. The information to display is linked to the settings in Operation >Super Impose in the setup menu, and the settings of the corresponding switches. 9 6. Electric color temperature filter indicator 10 11 12 Appears when the CC5600K function is on. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 22 24 33 32 31 30 1. Extender indicator 28 27 26 Displays the status of the digital extender function and lens extender function. EX: Appears when the lens extender function is ON X2D: Appears when the digital extender function (×2) is ON X3D: Appears when the digital extender function (×3) is ON X4D: Appears when the digital extender function (×4) is ON EX2D: Appears when both the lens extender function and digital extender function (×2) are ON EX3D: Appears when both the lens extender function and digital extender function (×3) are 5. Iris position indicator (with lens mounted) Displays the iris position setting. 38 37 36 35 34 29 4. Focus position indicator (with lens mounted) Displays the focus position as a distance to the subject (unit: meters). 25 ON EX4D: Appears when both the lens extender function and digital extender function (×4) are ON Turn the digital extender on/off using an assignable switch assigned with the Digital Extender function. [Note] The digital extender cannot be turned on when Slow & Quick Motion is enabled. 2. Zoom position indicator (with lens mounted) Displays the zoom position of the zoom lens in the range 0 to 99. The values displayed will vary with the lens used. 7. Depth of field indicator (serial lens mounted) Displays the depth of field using a bar. The units for display are set using Operation >Display On/Off >Lens Info in the setup menu, and can be set to meters or feet. 8. Recording mode indicator Displays the following recording operation states of the camcorder. Indicator Meaning Rec During recording Stby Recording standby Cont Rec Clip continuous recording in progress Cont Stby Recording standby in clip continuous recording mode S&Q Rec Recording in progress in Slow & Quick Motion mode S&Q Stby Recording standby in Slow & Quick Motion mode Rec Recording in Picture Cache Rec mode Cache Recording standby in Picture Cache Rec mode Int Rec Recording in progress in Interval Rec mode Int Stby Recording standby in Interval Rec mode Int Stby Recording paused in Interval Rec mode (during pause intervals) Indicator Meaning Sml Rec Recording in progress in Simul Rec mode Sml Stby Recording standby in Simul Rec mode CALL Call received from external connected device Green tally is displayed when the camcorder is in the following states. ˎˎMaintenance >Camera Config >HD SDI Remote I/F is set to Green Tally in the setup menu and a recording control signal is output from the SDI OUT connector. ˎˎGreen tally signal received (when a camera adaptor is mounted on the camcorder and a camera extension unit is connected) 9. Wireless receiver function indicator Displays “W” when a slot-in receiver is attached to the camcorder, and displays the reception level for each channel that can be used by the receiver (1ch, 2ch, or 4ch). Normal: Displays the strength of the received signal level by the number of white segment indicators. Analog receiver muting/Digital receiver error rate warning: Displays the strength of the received signal level by the number of gray segment indicators. If the received level exceeds the peak: Displays “P” in place of the indicator.1) If the transmitter is in power-save mode: “S” is displayed. Receiver battery is low: The corresponding channel number and indicators flash.1) 1)When using the DWR-S02DN 10. S&Q Motion (Slow & Quick) frame rate indicator Displays the shooting frame rate when the camcorder is set to Slow & Quick Motion recording mode. 11. GPS indicator (page 59) 000 17 1. Overview: Screen Display 12. Battery capacity/voltage display Displays the following indicators according to the type of battery power source. Battery type Indicator Info battery Battery remaining capacity icon and remaining recording time Anton/Bauer battery Remaining battery capacity (% indicator) Other batteries Input voltage Menu settings Paint >Gamma setting Gamma Gamma Category Gamma Select On Off — — On STD 13. Recording format (picture size) indicator Displays the picture size of clips recorded onto SxS memory cards. 14. Recording format (system frequency and scan method) indicator Displays the currently configured camcorder system frequency and the recording format scan method. HG 15. Recording format (codec) indicator Displays the format name of clips recorded onto SxS memory cards. 16. Gamma indicator User Displays the gamma setting. Menu settings Operation >Display On/Off >Gamma Paint >Gamma setting Off — Gamma Indicator Gamma Category Gamma Select — — — Indicator Operation >Display On/Off >Gamma STD1 DVW Gamma Off STD1 18. Wired LAN/Modem connection status indicator Displays icons for the wired LAN network or modem settings/connection status. Wired LAN settings/connection status State Network connection state/icon Maintenance >Network >Setting Maintenance >Network >Modem On Off – – On – – Off – On Modem connecting Network connection state/icon Operation >Display On/ Off >Network Condition Maintenance >Network >Setting Maintenance >Network >Wired LAN Off – – – (flashing) On Off – – On – – Modem connected STD2 x4.5 STD2 STD3 x3.5 STD3 STD4 240M STD4 STD5 R709 STD5 STD6 x5.0 STD6 HG1 3250G36 HG1 HG2 4600G30 HG2 (flashing) HG3 3259G40 HG3 Connected to LAN HG4 4609G33 HG4 User 1 User 1 User 2 User 2 User 3 User 3 User 4 User 4 User 5 User 5 Disable – Enable Connecting to LAN LAN connection error 3G/4G modem settings/connection status State The gamma indicator is “HLG” when Operation >Base Setting >Shooting Mode is set to HDR in the setup menu. Operation >Display On/ Off >Network Condition Maintenance >Network >Setting Maintenance >Network >Modem 17. Timecode external lock indicator Off – – Displays timecode lock when the timecode is input from an external source. State Operation >Display On/ Off >Network Condition Network connection state/icon Modem connection error 19. Streaming indicator Displays the status of streaming using icons. State Operation >Display On/Off >Streaming Status Maintenance >Streaming >Setting Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Setting Streaming state/Icon Off — — — On Off Off — On Off Not streaming – Streaming Error 000 18 1. Overview: Screen Display The following icons are displayed when streaming from a CCM. State Operation >Display On/Off >Streaming Status Maintenance >Streaming >Setting On Off Streaming state/Icon Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Setting On State Network connection state/icon Operation >Display On/ Off >Network Condition Maintenance >Network >Setting On Off – – On Wi-Fi Access Point Connecting to Wi-Fi Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode Not streaming (flashing) Wi-Fi standby (connected) 22. Proxy indicator Displays “Proxy” when proxy recording is on (Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Setting in the setup menu is set to On). During setup, “Proxy” blinks. “Proxy Rec” is displayed during proxy recording. 23. Network client mode indicator Displays the status of the connection to the CCM (Connection Control Manager) of either a Network RX Station or C3 Portal using icons when network client mode is on. State Streaming Wi-Fi Station Connecting to Wi-Fi [Note] Icons are not displayed before streaming starts. (flashing) 20. Wi-Fi mode status indicator Searching for access points Displays the wireless LAN settings and connection status using icons. State Operation >Display On/ Off >Network Condition Maintenance >Network >Setting Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode Off – – Network connection state/icon Connecting to access point Icon Operation >Display On/Off >NW Client Mode Status Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Setting State Off — — — On Off — — On CCM connected – Icon changes due to signal strength Access point connection error Off – 21. File transfer status indicator Displays and transfer rate (%) during file transfer. When transfer finishes, disappears to indicate 100% transfer. CCM connection error State Video signal indicator Operation >Input/ Output >Output Format >SDI Out Operation >HDR Setting 1920x1080 HD Rec/Out setting indicator (Using CBKZ-SLHL1 HDR LICENSE) HDR(HLG) HDR(HLG) SDR SDR 25. Recording media state/remaining capacity indicator for each media slot Displays the state and remaining capacity of the media in SxS slot A, SxS slot B, and the PROXY SD card slot. Connecting to CCM (disconnected) (flashing) CCM connection standby 24. Video signal indicator Displays the output video signal in realtime as a waveform, vectorscope, or histogram. SxS slot icon indicator *SxS slot A (SxSA) example. The icons for SxS slot B are labeled SxSB. Icon Media state — Media not inserted or not mounted Media mounted — Media mounting (flashing) Recording (active) For details about errors, see page 15. (orange bar) Playback (active) (green indicator) Recording/playback (active) (orange bar + green indicator) SD card (for proxy data recording) icon indicator Icon Media state — Media not inserted or not mounted 000 19 1. Overview: Screen Display Icon Media state Media mounted Media mounting (flashing) Recording (active) 31. SDI output REC trigger indicator Displays the superimposition state of the recording command sent to the SDI connector output. It is displayed when Maintenance >Camera Config >HD SDI Remote I/F is set to “Characters” in the setup menu. Displays the levels of audio channels 1 and 2. 32. ALAC indicator Displays “ALAC” when the ALAC (Auto Lens Aberration Correction) function is set to be performed automatically. ALAC will be performed automatically when an ALAC-compatible lens is attached, the ALAC function is enabled, and Maintenance >Camera Config >ALAC is set to “Auto” in the setup menu. 27. Clip name display Displays the name of the clip currently recording when recording, or displays the name of the next clip to be recorded during recording standby. 33. AE (auto iris) mode indicator Displays the current operating mode of the auto iris function using an icon and auto iris override level. (orange bar) The remaining recording time is displayed numerically. 26. Audio level meter indicators 28. Focus assist indicator Displays a detection frame (focus area marker) indicating the area for detection of degree of focus, and a level bar (focus assist indicator) indicating the degree of focus within that area. 29. Time data display Displays the remaining recording/playback time, timecode, user bits, etc., as selected by the DISPLAY switch (page 8). 30. SD card indicator for saving configuration data Displays the state of the SD card (for saving configuration data) inserted in the UTILITY SD card slot. Icon Media state — SD card not inserted or not mounted SD card mounted Mounted SD card is protected SD card mounting (flashing) Icon Meaning Backlight mode Standard mode Spotlight mode 34. Auto focus mode indicator (when an auto focus lens is attached only) Displays the focus adjustment mode of the camcorder. ˎˎAF (auto focus) ˎˎMF (manual focus) ˎˎMF* (manual focus with MF assist function on) ˎˎFull MF (full manual focus) 35. ND filter indicator Displays the position number of the currently selected ND filter (page 5). When “Electrical CC” is assigned to an assignable switch, the position (A/B/C/D) of the electrical CC filter is displayed on the right of the ND filter indicator (1 to 4). 36. Gain indicator Displays the gain setting (dB), set using the GAIN switch, of the video amplifier. 37. Shutter mode/shutter speed indicator/Flash Band Reduce status indicator Displays the shutter mode or shutter speed. “Setting the Electronic Shutter” (page 41) If Flash Band Reduce (page 105) is set to On in the Operation menu, FBR is displayed when the shutter is in a non-operating state. 38. White balance mode indicator Displays the currently selected white balance automatic adjustment memory. ATW: ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) mode W:A: Memory A mode W:B: Memory B mode W:C: Memory C mode W:P: Preset mode 3200K: Appears when an assignable switch assigned with Color Temp SW 3200K is on 4300K: Appears when an assignable switch assigned with Color Temp SW 4300K is on 5600K: Appears when an assignable switch assigned with Color Temp SW 5600K is on 6300K: Appears when an assignable switch assigned with Color Temp SW 6300K is on 000 20 1. Overview Supplied Lens and Viewfinder Lens Supplied with the PXW-X400KC [Note] The PXW-X400KC is supplied with a lens. 11. Zoom lever / zoom ring For manual zoom adjustment, set the zoom servo/ manual switch to the MANU position, then operate the lever/ring. 6 5 4 3 2 1 Always set the iris mode switch to the M (manual) position first and then adjust the iris. 12. Focus ring Current zoom position Turn this ring to adjust the focus. 7 8 9 10 11 12 1. DIP switches (page 20) Used for the shuttle shot function. 2. Iris gain adjustment trimmer (page 43) 3. Iris push auto switch When the iris mode switch is in the M (manual) position, press this switch for instantaneous auto iris adjustment. The iris is automatically adjusted while the switch is held down. 4. Iris mode switch A (auto): The iris is adjusted automatically. M (manual): Adjust the iris with the iris ring. 5. Zoom seesaw switch To move rapidly to the shuttle position, press and hold the Shtl (shuttle) switch. The zoom rapidly returns to the previous zoom position when the Shtl (shuttle) switch is released. This is enabled when the zoom servo/manual knob is in the SERVO position. Set to the W (wide angle) position when you want wide-angle, and set to the T (telephoto) side when you want telephoto. Press the switch harder for a faster zoom action, or softer for slower zoom action. 13 14 15 16 17 18 6. RET switch While pressed, the last few seconds recorded appear on the viewfinder screen (Rec Review) (page 21). 13. Zoom servo / manual knob SERVO (servo): Selects power zoom. Operate the zoom with the zoom seesaw switch. MANU (manual): Selects manual zoom. Operate the zoom with the zoom lever/zoom ring. Use this to start and stop recording. Press once to start recording, then press once more to stop. 16. Shtl (shuttle) switch (page 20) Used for the shuttle shot function. 17. Zoom remote control connector Connect to an optional zoom servo controller to enable remote control of zooming. 8. Positioning pin About shuttle shot 9. Macro button / macro ring Press and hold the macro button and turn the macro ring to adjust the focus (minimum focus distance: 10 mm). 10. Iris ring For manual iris adjustment, set the iris mode switch to the M (manual) position, then turn this ring. Release Shtl (shuttle) switch 15. VTR switch 18. Memo switch (page 20) Used for the shuttle shot function. When attaching the lens, align this pin with the recess in the top center of lens mount on the camcorder. Shuttle position 14. Power/iris control cable Connect to the LENS connector on the camcorder. 7. F.B. lock screw / F.B. adjustment ring (page 43) Press and hold Shtl (shuttle) switch Shuttle shot is a shooting function for rapidly moving to a preset zoom position set by the user. 1 Set the DIP switch 1 to ON. 2 Set the zoom position that you want to register. 3 Press and hold the Memo switch and press the Shtl (shuttle) switch. The zoom position is registered as the shuttle position. Original zoom position 000 21 1. Overview: Supplied Lens and Viewfinder operates, minimizing the amount of turning required for focusing. When you slide the focus ring back (toward the camcorder), the focus mode is set to Full MF mode, in which all focus adjustments are manual (page 44). Lens Supplied with the PXW-X400KF The PXW-X400KF is supplied with a lens. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7. Flange focal length adjustment button Press this to adjust the flange focal length (the distance from the lens mounting flange plane to the focusing plane) (page 27). 8. Zoom control connector (8-pin) Connect to an optional zoom servo controller to enable remote control of zooming. 10 11 12 13 14 7 8 9 1. PUSH AF (auto focus) button When adjusting focus in manual mode, pressing this button enables auto focus adjustment on the subject. Press the button to activate auto focus, and release the button when the subject is in focus. 2. FOCUS (adjustment mode) switch A (Auto): Activates the normal auto focus function. You can also adjust the focus manually using the focus ring, even when the switch is in the “A” position. M (manual): Selects manual mode for focus adjustment with the focus ring. In manual mode, auto focus adjustment is also possible, by pressing the PUSH AF button. 3. MACRO switch When this switch is in the ON position, macro mode is enabled, allowing focusing over the whole range (5 cm1) to ∞) including the macro range (from 5 cm1) to 80 cm from the front of the lens). This operation is independent of whether the focus adjustment mode is auto or manual. 1) At the wide-angle setting 4. Iris ring For manual iris adjustment, set the IRIS switch to the M (manual) position, then turn this ring. 5. Zoom ring For manual zoom adjustment, set the ZOOM switch to the MANUAL position, then turn this ring. 6. Focus ring Turn this ring to adjust the focus. When the ring is set to AF/MF mode, the faster you turn ring the faster the focusing mechanism 9. ZOOM switch SERVO: Selects power zoom. Operate the zoom with the power zoom lever. MANUAL (manual): Selects manual zoom. Operate the zoom with the zoom ring. 10. PUSH AUTO (instant auto iris) button When the IRIS switch is in the M position for manual adjustment, press this button for instantaneous auto adjustment. The iris is automatically adjusted while the button is held down. 11. IRIS (adjustment mode) switch A (auto): The iris is adjusted automatically. M (manual): Adjust the iris with the iris ring. 12. Power zoom lever This is enabled when the ZOOM switch is in the SERVO position. Set to the W (wide angle) position when you want wide-angle, and set to the T (telephoto) side when you want telephoto. Press the lever harder for a faster zoom action, or softer for slower zoom action. Notes about auto focus ˎˎIt may be difficult to focus on the subject in the following cases. If this does happen, use manual focusing. – If the subject has no contrast – If the subject is moving rapidly – When shooting point light sources, under street lighting or at night – When there are very bright objects close to the subject – When shooting through a glass window ˎˎIf there are a number of objects within the screen at close and far range, the focus may not be on the intended subject. In this case, with the subject on which you want to focus in the center of the screen, press the PUSH AF button. ˎˎAfter focusing with the PUSH AF button, if you operate the zoom or adjust the iris, the depth of field may become shallower, losing crisp focus. In such cases, press the PUSH AF button once more. ˎˎIf you focus at wide-angle then zoom to telephoto, the subject may no longer be in focus. ˎˎIt may take time until the image is in focus while using the slow shutter mode. 13. RET (return video) button You can assign a function and use this as an assignable switch (page 124). When “Lens RET” is assigned to this button (factory default setting), press this after recording stops to review the last few seconds recorded on the viewfinder screen (Rec Review) (page 49). Press this button (single click) during recording or playback to record a Shot Mark 1 mark, or doubleclick to record a Shot Mark 2 mark (page 51). 14. VTR button Use this to start and stop recording. Press once to start recording, then press once more to stop. 000 22 1. Overview: Supplied Lens and Viewfinder 7. Viewfinder barrel You can raise this up or rotate when required by the situation. Viewfinder Supplied with the PXW-X400KC/PXW-X400KF 8. Tally indicator 1 2 3 4 16 5 9 10 11 6 7 8 15 14 13 12 1. Connector Connect to the VF connector (26-pin) on the camcorder. 2. Viewfinder cable 3. Slide stopper Prevents the viewfinder from coming off the camcorder when it is slid from side to side. 4. Eyecup 5. Diopter adjustment ring Turn this ring to adjust the image until it is in sharpest focus. 6. Eyepiece You can raise this up when required by the situation. Lights up when recording is started by a press of the REC START button on this camcorder, the VTR button on the lens, or the START/STOP button on the remote control unit. When an abnormality occurs, the tally indicator flashes to indicate a warning. 9. PEAKING knob Turning this knob clockwise adjusts the picture sharpness, and makes focusing easier. This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder. 10. CONTRAST knob Adjusts the contrast of the screen. This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder. 11. BRIGHT knob Adjusts the brightness of the screen. This control has no effect on the output signals of the camcorder. 12. TALLY switch Controls the tally indicator located on the front of the viewfinder. HIGH: The tally indicator brightness is set to high. OFF: The tally indicator is disabled. LOW: The tally indicator brightness is set to low. 13. ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch Controls the zebra pattern display. ON: Display a zebra pattern. OFF: Do not display a zebra pattern. 14. DISPLAY switch ON: Display text information. OFF: Do not display text information. 15. MIRROR switch The image display on the monitor screen becomes reversed horizontally or vertically when the viewfinder barrel is raised up or rotated. L/R: Reverse the image horizontally. OFF: Do not reverse the image. B/T: Reverse the image vertically. 16. Microphone holder 000 23 2. Preparation Preparing a Power Supply For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and AC adaptors listed below. ˎˎBP-GL95B Lithium-ion Battery Pack [CAUTION] Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. When you dispose of the battery, you must obey the law in the relative area or country. Using a Battery Pack Press the battery pack against the back of the camcorder, aligning the line on the side of the battery pack with the line on the camcorder. Then slide the battery pack down until its “LOCK” arrow aligns with the line on the camcorder. To detach the battery pack, pull the battery pack up by holding the release button in. [Notes] ˎˎ If the battery pack is not attached correctly, the terminals may become damaged. ˎˎ During recording and playback (while the ACCESS lamp on the right-side panel is lit in blue and the ACCESS lamp in the card slot section is lit in orange), be careful never to remove the battery pack. Doing so may corrupt the data recorded on the card. ˎˎ Make sure to power the camcorder off before replacing the battery pack. When a BP-GL95B Battery Pack is used, the camcorder will operate continuously for approximately 195 minutes. [WARNING] Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. [Note] The battery pack operating time depends on the frequency of use of the battery pack, and the ambient temperature when used. Before use, charge the battery pack with a charger suitable for each battery. For details on the battery charging procedure, refer to the battery charger operation manual. Note on using the battery pack A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully recharged. Using AC Power Mount an AC-DN10A on the camcorder in the same way as a battery pack, then connect to the AC power supply. 000 24 2. Preparation Attaching a Viewfinder This section describes the viewfinder supplied with the PXW-X400KC/PXW-X400KF models. [CAUTION] When the viewfinder is attached, do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece lens facing the sun. Direct sunlight can enter through the lens, be focused in the viewfinder and cause fire. 2 Couple the viewfinder connector to the VF connector (26-pin). Viewfinder left-toright positioning ring VF connector (26-pin) Lifting Up the Viewfinder Barrel and Eyepiece [Note] A viewfinder is supplied with the PXW-X400KC/PXWX400KF models. A viewfinder for the PXW-X400 is available separately. You can view the LCD screen inside the viewfinder or its mirrored image by lifting up the viewfinder barrel or the eyepiece. Attaching the Supplied Viewfinder Viewfinder front-to-back positioning knob When attaching a viewfinder, take note of the following points. ˎˎ Be sure to the power off the camcorder before coupling the viewfinder connector to the camcorder’s VF connector (26-pin). If you make this connection when the camcorder power is on, the viewfinder may not function properly. ˎˎ Couple the viewfinder connector firmly to the camcorder’s VF connector (26-pin). If the coupling is loose, noise may appear on the video or the tally light may not operate properly. 1 [1] Loosen the viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring, [2] attach the viewfinder to the viewfinder fitting shoe, and [3] tighten the viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring. Slide stopper [3] [2] Left-to-right positioning ring You can detach the viewfinder by following the attaching procedure in reverse order. But, when detaching the viewfinder from the attachment shoe, pull up the stopper. 1 Push the clip on the bottom to release and flip up the viewfinder barrel. 2 It locks at the 120-degree position. Up [Note] To restore the normal display, set the MIRROR switch on the rear panel of the viewfinder to B/T. Adjusting the Viewfinder Angle You can adjust the angle of the viewfinder. Adjusting the Viewfinder Position 2 To adjust the viewfinder left-right position, loosen the left-right positioning ring, and to adjust the front-back position, loosen the front-to-back positioning knob. 1 Reversing the Display (image/text indication) Vertically [1] The viewfinder can be rotated as much as 180 degrees toward the direction facing the subject. When you do this, the picture and other information displayed in the viewfinder appear upside down. Normally use it in the locked position. Although you can open it farther from the lock position, you must return it to the closed position to lock it at the 120-degree position again. 000 25 2. Preparation: Attaching a Viewfinder Detaching the Viewfinder Barrel 1 Push the clip on the bottom to release. 2 Flip up the viewfinder barrel. 3 Slide the knob on the top to the opposite side Reversing the Display (image/text indication) Horizontally By setting the MIRROR switch on the rear panel of the viewfinder to L/R, you can reverse the picture and other information displayed in the viewfinder horizontally. of the viewfinder barrel. 4 Detach the viewfinder barrel by horizontally sliding it. Hex socket bolts Adjusting the Diopter Turn the diopter adjustment ring until the viewfinder image is sharpest. Attaching the BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket By fitting an optional BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket, you can rotate the viewfinder out of the way so that your right leg does not hit the viewfinder while you are carrying the camcorder. Viewfinder slide assembly 3 Attach the BKW-401 with the supplied bolts. Bolts supplied with the BKW-401 1 Loosen the front-to-back viewfinder 3 positioning levers and the front-to-back viewfinder positioning knobs, and then pull the viewfinder slide assembly forward. 4 4 Adjust the front-to-back position so that the arm of the BKW-401 does not touch the handle when it is raised. Diopter adjustment ring Adjust position so that arm does not touch handle You can also attach a commercially available protection filter, close-up lens, etc. that is 52 mm in diameter. 2 1 Adjusting the Screen Adjust the brightness, contrast, and peaking of the viewfinder screen with the controls shown below. Outlines: Adjust using the PEAKING knob. Contrast: Adjust using the CONTRAST knob. Brightness: Adjust using the BRIGHT knob. 2 Using a 2.5 mm diameter hexagonal wrench, detach the viewfinder slide assembly. 000 26 2. Preparation Using the Camcorder for the First Time When using the camcorder for the first time, configure the following settings in the menu. For details about menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 92). 3 Turn the MENU knob to set the year, month, or day, and then press the knob. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set the remaining digits. Setting the Time Zone Set the time zone for the region of use. The default value is “UTC Greenwich.” 1 Select Operation >Time Zone >Time Zone in the setup menu. 5 Press the SET button. The internal clock is set to the date set in steps 2 to 4. Next, set the time. 6 Select Maintenance >Clock Set >Time in the setup menu. The Time screen appears. 2 Select the time zone to use. Setting the Date and Time of the Internal Clock Set the year, month, day, and day-of-week of the internal clock. 1 Select Maintenance >Clock Set >Date in the setup menu. The Date screen appears. 7 Set the time in the same way as when setting the date. 8 Press the SET button. The time is registered in the internal clock. To cancel the setting, press the Cancel button. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select the year, month, or day, and then press the knob. The selected year, month, or day becomes editable. 000 27 2. Preparation Mounting and Adjusting the Lens [Note] When connecting or disconnecting the lens cable to this connector, power off the camcorder first. When carrying out the adjustment, use a flange focal length adjustment chart as the subject. Lens mount securing rubber 7 Repeat steps 3 to 6 until the proper focus is achieved at both ends of the zoom ring. 8 When the optimum position of the F.B. adjustment ring is achieved, tighten the F.B. lock screw. Attaching a Lens This section describes how to attach the lens supplied with the PXW-X400KF as an example. Approx. 3 m (10 ft.) 3 1 Push the lens locking lever up and remove the lens mount cap from the lens mount. 2 Align the center pin on the lens with the center slot in the lens mount, and insert the lens into the mount. [Notes] 4 Connect the lens cable to the LENS connector. 5 Secure the lens cable with the cable clamp. If an aberration correction lens is attached 2 1 1 The aberration correction function is activated automatically.1) Starting the camcorder with an aberration correction lens may require more time than normal because of data loading at start-up. The lens supplied with the PXW-X400 is an aberration correction lens. Contact a Sony sales or service representative for information about other aberration correction lenses. 1) The aberration correction function does not operate if Maintenance >Camera Config >ALAC in the setup menu is set to Off. 3 Holding the lens in place, push the lens locking lever down to lock the lens. [CAUTION] If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off while the camcorder is being used. This could cause a serious accident. Make sure the lens is firmly locked. It is recommended that the lens mount securing rubber be put on the lens locking lever as illustrated below. Adjusting the Flange Focal Length If the lens does not stay in focus properly as you zoom from telephoto to wide angle, adjust the flange focal length (the distance from the plane of the lens mounting flange to the imaging plane, also called flange-back). Make this adjustment just one time after mounting or changing the lens. ˎˎ If you use a subject with insufficient contrast, or move the camcorder or subject during adjustment, this will cause an adjustment error. ˎˎ Place the subject (the flange focal length adjustment chart) so that it appears at the center of the screen at the telephoto end. Arrange it so that no nearby object (no object closer to the camera than the chart) enters the screen at the wide-angle end. Adjusting the flange focal length on the lens supplied with the PXW-X400KC 1 Place a subject (Siemens star chart, for example) 3 m (10 ft) in front of the camera. 2 Open the iris. The depth-of-field is reduced when the iris is open, making adjustment easier. 3 Set the lens zoom to T (telephoto). 4 Adjust the focus on the subject. 5 Set the lens zoom to W (wide angle). 6 Loosen the F.B. lock screw on the lens, and turn the F.B. adjustment ring to adjust the focus. Adjusting the flange focal length on the lens supplied with the PXW-X400KF With an auto focus lens, zoom and focus operations automatically adjust the flange focal length. 1 Place the supplied focal length adjustment chart about 3 m (10 ft) in front of the camera. 2 Open the iris. The depth-of-field is reduced when the iris is open, making adjustment easier. 3 Set the ZOOM switch to SERVO (power zoom mode). 4 Hold down the flange focal length adjustment button for 3 seconds. The following message appears on the viewfinder screen. Auto FB Adjust Executing... After successful adjustment, the message on the viewfinder screen changes to the following. Auto FB Adjust OK If the flange focal length adjustment is not successful Check the subject and lighting conditions, and repeat the adjustment. 000 28 2. Preparation: Mounting and Adjusting the Lens Adjusting the flange focal length on manual lenses other than the lens supplied with the PXW-X400KC/PXW-X400KF 1 Set the iris to manual. 2 Place the supplied flange focal length adjustment chart about 3 m (10 ft) in front of the camera. 3 Open the iris. The depth-of-field is reduced when the iris is open, making adjustment easier. 4 Loosen the fixing screws on the F.f or F.B ring (flange focal length adjustment ring). 5 Use manual or power zoom to set the lens to telephoto. 6 Point the camcorder at the chart by turning the focus ring and focus on it. 7 Set the zoom ring to wide angle. 8 Turn the F.f or F.B ring until the chart is in focus, being careful not to disturb the focus ring. 9 Repeat steps 5 to 8 until the chart stays in focus all the way from wide angle to telephoto. 10 Tighten the F.f or F.B ring fixing screws. 000 29 2. Preparation Preparing the Audio Input System Connecting a Microphone to the MIC IN Connector 3 Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN connector, then set the AUDIO IN switch for the channel on which you want to record the audio from this microphone to FRONT. Attach the supplied microphone to the microphone holder of the supplied viewfinder. 1 Loosen the screw and open the microphone holder clamp. Microphone holder clamp 4 Secure the microphone cable with the cable clamp. 2 Place the microphone in the microphone holder. [1] Place the microphone in the holder so that “UP” is at the top. [2] Close the microphone holder. [3] Tighten the screw. [2] [3] Connecting Microphones to the AUDIO IN Connectors You can connect up to two monaural microphones to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors, using an optional CAC-12 Microphone Holder. Supported microphones: ECM-674/678 electret condenser microphone For details about attaching the microphone holder and microphone, refer to the instruction manual of each product. [1] On how to attach the microphone, refer to the operation manual for the microphone. To use a Sony wireless microphone system, power the camcorder off and then attach a wireless receiver. ˎˎDWR-S02DN/DWR-S03D Digital Wireless Receiver ˎˎURX-S03D UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit channels 3 and 4 does not depend on the XLR automatic detection function. It is determined by the switch selection only. The XLR connection automatic detection function can be switched on/off using Maintenance >Audio >Rear XLR Auto in the setup menu. [4] For details about attaching a wireless receiver, refer to the instruction manual of each product. [1] [2] Attaching a Wireless Receiver Connecting Line Input Audio Equipment 1 Connect the audio output connector of the audio equipment that supplies the line input signal to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector. 2 Set the AUDIO IN selector for the channel to which the audio signal source is connected to LINE. XLR connection automatic detect function ˎˎWith the XLR connection automatic detection function switched off (the factory default setting): Set the AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 switch to REAR for the channels to which the audio equipment is connected. ˎˎWith the XLR connection automatic detection function switched on: When a cable is connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector, the input from that connector is automatically selected for audio recording, regardless of the setting of the AUDIO IN CH1/ CH2/CH3/CH4 switch. ˎˎWhen the AUDIO IN selector switch is set to LINE or MIC, the type of audio recorded on audio [1] [2] [3] [1] AUDIO IN CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 switches [2] To AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector [3] Monaural microphone [4] AUDIO IN selector switches 000 30 2. Preparation Attaching and Adjusting Peripheral Devices [Note] Mounting on a Tripod 1 Attach the optional VCT-14/U14 Tripod Adaptor to the tripod. The tripod adaptor pin may remain in the engaged position even after the camcorder is removed. If this happens, press the red button and move the lever as shown above until the pin returns to the stowed position. If the pin remains in the engaged position, you will not be able to mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor. Attaching the Shoulder Strap 1,3 1 Fit one of the clips to a shoulder strap fitting. Pull up the strap to lock the fitting. 2 Mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor. Connecting a Video Light Slide the camcorder forward along the groove in the adaptor until it clicks. 3 Make sure that the camcorder is securely attached by moving it back and forth. To remove the camcorder from the tripod attachment, hold down the red button and pull the lever in the direction of the arrow. With this camcorder, you can use the Anton Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light (powered by 12 V with maximum power consumption of 50 W). ˎˎIf you connect the video light to the LIGHT connector on the camcorder and set the LIGHT switch to AUTO, you can turn the light on and off automatically as you start and stop recording on this camcorder. ˎˎThe output of the LIGHT connector on the camcorder is regulated to 12 V even when the camcorder is supplied with over 12 V power (through the DC IN connector or battery pack). The brightness or color temperature of the light will not change in response to voltage increase. Clip 2 Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap fitting on the other side of the grip in the same way. To remove the shoulder strap, refer to the following diagram. Press here and pull in the direction shown by the arrow to release. [Notes] [Note] The accessory shoe on the camcorder is of the 1/4-inch tapped hole type. If you want to replace this with a slide-type shoe, use the supplied cold shoe kit. Lever Shoulder pad ˎˎ Do not connect video lights with power consumption of 50 W or greater. ˎˎ The brightness or color temperature of the light will change when the voltage (supplied through the DC IN connector or from the battery pack) is less than 12 V. To attach a video light, fit the video light to the accessory shoe on the camcorder grip, and connect the video light cable to the LIGHT connector. Red button 2 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position You can slide the shoulder pad back and forth within a 40 mm range. This adjustment helps you get the best balance for shooting with the camcorder on your shoulder. 1 Raise the lever in the center of the shoulder pad to unlock the shoulder pad. 2 Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward until it is in the most convenient position. 3 Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder pad in the selected position. 000 31 2. Preparation Handling SxS Memory Cards This camcorder records video and audio on SxS memory cards (not supplied) loaded into one or both of its memory card slots. In addition to SxS memory cards, you can also use XQD memory cards (not supplied) with the QDAEX1 XQD ExpressCard Adaptor (optional) or SDXC/ SDHC cards (not supplied) with the MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor (optional) in the camcorder to make recordings. The file system supported by each type of media is given below. Memory card File system exFAT UDF FAT SxS memory cards Yes Yes No XQD memory cards Yes Yes No SDXC cards Yes No No SDHC cards No No Yes SxS memory cards Use Sony SxS memory cards (SxS PRO X, SxS PRO+, SxS PRO, or SxS-1) with this camcorder. SxS PRO X series SxS PRO+ series SxS PRO series SxS-1 series The memory cards listed above comply with the ExpressCard memory card standard. ˎˎSxS, SxS PRO X, SxS PRO+, SxS PRO, and SxS-1 are trademarks of Sony Corporation. ˎˎThe ExpressCard label and logo are the property of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA) and are licensed to Sony Corporation. All other [Note] Inserting SxS Memory Cards Slot A access indicator 1 Slide the cover to the left to open. 2 Insert an SxS memory card into a card slot. Slot B access indicator Slot A Slot B About SxS Memory Cards 2 Press the EJECT button again to eject the card. trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective owners. Indicator Slot status Lights in orange Accessing the SxS memory card (lights during data reading and writing) Lights in green Standby (the loaded SxS memory card is ready for recording or playback) Not lit No SxS memory card is loaded. An unusable card is loaded. An SxS memory card is loaded, but the other slot is selected. [Note] Make sure to insert the SxS card in the correct orientation. Hold the card with the arrow on one side facing the direction shown in the diagram, and then insert the card. The ACCESS indicator lights in orange, and then lights in green to indicate that the memory card is usable. 3 Close the cover. Ejecting SxS Memory Cards 1 Open the cover, and then press the EJECT button to release the lock and extract the button. ACCESS indicator status Card slots A and B each have an ACCESS indicator that indicate the slot status. Press the button once to release the lock. When you press the EJECT button, take care not to impede the SxS memory card. If the movement of the SxS memory card is impeded, the lock may fail to release. [Note] Data integrity cannot be guaranteed if you power the camcorder off or remove a memory card while the card is being accessed. All data recorded on the card may be discarded. Always make sure that the ACCESS indicator is lit green or not lit before you power the camcorder off or remove a memory card. Selecting the SxS Memory Card to Use When SxS memory cards are loaded in both slot A and slot B, you can press the SLOT SELECT button to select the SxS memory card to use. When the remaining recording time on the recording SxS memory card falls below 60 seconds, the remaining capacity indicator for the corresponding media slot flashes on the viewfinder screen to indicate that the camcorder will switch SxS memory cards soon. Subsequently, the camcorder switches automatically to the other card when the selected card becomes full, and recording continues. 000 32 2. Preparation: Handling SxS Memory Cards [Note] The SLOT SELECT button is disabled during playback. The memory cards are not switched even if you press the button. Button operations are enabled when a thumbnail screen (page 83) is displayed. Formatting (Initializing) SxS Memory Cards If formatting fails A format operation may fail because the SxS memory card is write protected, or because it is not the type of card specified for use with this camcorder. In this case, an error message appears. Follow the instructions in the error message and exchange the card for an SxS memory card that can be used with this camcorder. [Notes] When an unformatted SxS memory card or an SxS memory card formatted in another specification is inserted, a message notifying you that the media has a different file system appears. In this case, format the memory card in the following way. SxS memory cards are formatted in exFAT or FAT by factory default. [Note] SxS memory cards must be formatted on an XDCAM device that supports the exFAT or UDF file system or on this camcorder. Cards in other formats cannot be used. 1 Select Operation >Format Media in the setup menu. 2 Select Media(A) (slot A) or Media(B) (slot B). 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. A confirmation screen prompting whether to format the card appears. 4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the confirmation message screen, then press the knob. Formatting begins. During formatting, a message is displayed, and the ACCESS indicator is lit orange. When formatting ends, a completion message appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message. ˎˎ Formatting a memory card erases all data, including recorded video data and setup files. ˎˎ Use the format function of this camcorder to format SxS memory cards for use on this camcorder. The formats of cards formatted on other devices are not recognized as valid formats, making it necessary to format them again on this camcorder. Formatting while recording Even while recording, the SxS memory card loaded in the other card slot can be formatted. [Note] A mark appears when a memory card is write protected. When to exchange SxS memory cards ˎˎThe warning message “Media Near Full” appears, the WARNING indicator and the REC indication on the viewfinder screen flash, and the buzzer sounds when the total remaining recording time of the two memory cards falls to five minutes during recording. Exchange one of the cards for media with available recording capacity. ˎˎIf you continue recording, the message “Media Full” appears and recording stops when the total remaining recording time falls to 0. [Note] About up to 600 clips can be recorded on one SxS memory card. The display of remaining recording time changes to “0” and the message “Media Full” appears when the clip limit is reached. [Notes] ˎˎ Formatting is not supported during playback or when the thumbnail screen is displayed. ˎˎ During formatting, recording to an SxS memory card loaded in the other card slot cannot be started. Checking the Remaining Recording Time You can check the remaining capacity of the SxS memory cards loaded in the two slots by checking the recording media remaining capacity indicator in the viewfinder. The remaining recording time is calculated from the remaining capacity of the media in each slot and the current video format (recording bit rate), and is displayed in units of minutes. You can check the remaining capacity on a bar graph by displaying the Media Status screen (page 14). Restoring SxS Memory Cards If restoration fails ˎˎWrite protected SxS memory cards and cards on which memory errors have occurred cannot be restored. A warning message appears for such cards. Follow the instructions in the message and unprotect the card or replace it with another card. ˎˎSxS memory cards on which memory errors have occurred may become usable if they are reformatted. ˎˎIn some cases, some clips can be restored while others cannot. The restored clips can be played normally. ˎˎIf the message “Could not Restore Some Clips” keeps appearing after repeated attempts at restoration, it may be possible to restore the SxS memory card with the following procedure. [1] Use the application software (page 172) to copy the required clips to another SxS memory card. [2] Format the unusable SxS memory card on the camcorder. [3] Copy the required clips back to the newly formatted SxS memory card. [Note] If for any reason an error should occur in a memory card, the card must be restored before use. When you load an SxS memory card that needs to be restored, a message appears in the viewfinder to ask whether you want to restore it. To execute the restore, turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], and then press the knob. The restoration starts. During restoration, a message is displayed, and the ACCESS indicator is lit orange. When restoration ends, a completion message appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message. For restoration of media recorded with this camcorder, be sure to use this camcorder. Media recorded with a device other than this camcorder or with another camcorder of different version (even of the same model) may not be restored using this camcorder. 000 33 2. Preparation Handling SD Cards for Saving Configuration Data The following SD cards can be used for saving configuration data. Checking the Remaining Capacity SDHC memory cards* (Speed Class: 4 or higher, non-UHS, Capacity: 4 GB to 32 GB) You can check the remaining capacity on an SD card on the Media Status screen (page 14). To use an SD card formatted on the camcorder in the slot of another device, make a backup of the card, then reformat the card in the device to be used. * Referred to as “SD cards” in this manual. Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards SD cards must be formatted the first time they are used in the camcorder. SD cards for use in the camcorder should be formatted using the format function of the camcorder. If a message appears when the SD card is inserted into the camcorder, format the SD card. 1 Select Operation >Format Media >SD Card(Utility) in the setup menu. A confirmation screen prompting whether to format the card appears. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. Formatting begins. During formatting, a message is displayed, and the ACCESS indicator is lit orange. When formatting ends, a completion message appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message. [Note] Formatting an SD card erases all data on the card. The card cannot be restored. 000 34 2. Preparation Using a Media Adaptor [Notes] ˎˎ For professional applications, the use of other media will not provide the same high reliability and durability that is obtained using SxS memory cards. ˎˎ Not all memory cards are guaranteed to work with this camcorder. For compatible memory cards, contact your Sony dealer. XQD Memory Cards By using an optional QDA-EX1 XQD ExpressCard Adaptor, you can insert an XQD memory card into an SxS memory card slot and use it instead of an SxS memory card for recording and playback. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. A confirmation screen prompting whether to format the card appears. 4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the confirmation message screen, then press the knob. Formatting begins. During formatting, a message is displayed, and the ACCESS indicator is lit orange. When formatting ends, a completion message appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message. [Note] For details about using a QDA-EX1 XQD ExpressCard Adaptor, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the adaptor. Formatting an XQD memory card erases all data on the card, including protected video. The data cannot be restored. [Note] Connection between the camcorder and a computer The following operations may not be available depending on the type of XQD memory cards used. ˎˎ High-speed playback ˎˎ Slow & Quick Motion shooting Formatting (initializing) XQD memory cards must be formatted the first time they are used in the camcorder. XQD memory cards for use in the camcorder should be formatted using the format function of the camcorder. If a message appears when the XQD memory card is inserted into the camcorder, format the XQD memory card. If an unformatted XQD memory card or an XQD memory card that was formatted in a different specification is inserted, a message asking for confirmation to format media or a message notifying you that the media has a different file system appears. 1 Select Operation >Format Media in the setup menu. 2 Select Media(A) (slot A) or Media(B) (slot B). Insert the recorded XQD memory card into a slot in the camcorder, and connect the camcorder to a computer using a USB cable. To use a memory card formatted on the camcorder in the slot of another device First, make a backup of the card, then reformat the card in the device to be used. The following SD cards are supported. SDXC memory cards (SD speed class: Class 10) 1) SDHC memory cards (SD speed class: Class 10) 2) 1) Supported if the file system is exFAT. 2) Supported if the file system is FAT. For details about using an MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the adaptor. [Notes] ˎˎ High-speed playback may not be properly achieved with an SD card. ˎˎ Seamless playback across clip boundaries is not supported. ˎˎ Recording and playback using SD cards is not supported when shooting in XAVC-I format. ˎˎ Slow motion recording using the Slow & Quick Motion recording function cannot be used with an SDXC card. Formatting (initializing) SD cards must be formatted the first time they are used in the camcorder. SD cards for use in the camcorder should be formatted using the format function of the camcorder. If a message appears when the SD card is inserted into the camcorder, format the SD card. If an unformatted SD card or an SD card that was formatted in a different specification is inserted, a message asking for confirmation to format media or a message notifying you that the media has a different file system appears. Format the card using the following procedure. 1 Select Operation >Format Media in the setup menu. SD Cards By using an optional MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor, you can insert an SD card into an SxS memory card slot and use it for recording and playback. [Note] If an SD card and other media are inserted in their respective memory card slots, only the first inserted media is recognized and the last inserted media is not recognized. 2 Select Media(A) (slot A) or Media(B) (slot B). 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. A confirmation screen prompting whether to format the card appears. 4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the confirmation message screen, then press the knob. Formatting begins. During formatting, a message is displayed, and the ACCESS indicator is lit orange. When formatting ends, a completion message appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message. [Note] Formatting an SD card erases all data on the card, including protected video. The data cannot be restored. Connection between the camcorder and a computer Insert the recorded SD card into a slot in the camcorder, and connect the camcorder to a computer using a USB cable. To use a memory card formatted on the camcorder in the slot of another device First, make a backup of the card, then reformat the card in the device to be used. 000 35 3. Settings and Adjustments Format Settings You can set the file system, system frequency, and video format using Operation >Format in the setup menu. For details about menu operations, see “Basic Setup Menu Operations” (page 92). Selecting the File System 2 Turn the MENU knob to select the system frequency, and press the knob. A confirmation screen appears. 3 Select [Execute] to execute, or select [Cancel] to cancel, and then press the MENU knob. The camcorder will reboot automatically after executing [Execute]. Video Formats The following recording formats can be selected for different combinations of video resolution and system frequency. Video format File system System frequency (Operation >Format >File (Operation >Format (Operation >Format >Rec Format in setup menu) >Frequency in setup menu) System in setup menu) 59.94/50 You can select the file system. 1 Select Operation >Format >File System in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file system, then press the knob. A confirmation screen appears. 3 Select [Execute] to execute, or select [Cancel] to cancel, and then press the MENU knob. The camcorder will reboot automatically after executing [Execute]. [Note] The file system cannot be changed during recording/ playback or while the thumbnail screen is displayed. Switching the System Frequency Switching the Video Format Refer to “Video Formats” (page 35) as required when switching the video format. 1 Select Operation >Format >Rec Format in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to change the video format, and press the knob. A confirmation screen appears. 3 Select [Execute] to execute, or select [Cancel] to cancel, and then press the MENU knob. 29.97/25/23.98 Picture size exFAT UDF FAT Yes – – XAVC-I 1920×1080P Yes – – XAVC-I 1920×1080i Yes – – XAVC-I 1280×720P 1280×720 Yes – – XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P 1920×1080 Yes – – XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i Yes – – XAVC-L 50 1280×720P 1280×720 Yes – – XAVC-L 35 1080P 1920×1080 Yes – – XAVC-L 35 1080i Yes – – XAVC-L 25 1080i Yes Yes – HD422 50 1080i Yes Yes – HD422 50 720P 1280×720 Yes Yes Yes HQ 1920×1080i 1920×1080 1920×1080 1920×1080 Yes Yes Yes HQ 1440×1080i 1440×1080 Yes Yes Yes HQ 1280×720P 1280×720 – – Yes SP 1440×1080i 1440×1080 Yes Yes – MPEG IMX 50 720×486/720×576 Yes Yes – DVCAM 720×480/720×576 Yes – – XAVC-I 1920×1080P 1920×1080 Yes – – XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P 1920×1080 Yes – – XAVC-L 35 1080P You can switch the system frequency as required. Yes Yes – HD422 50 1080P [Notes] Yes Yes – HD422 50 720P 1280×720 Yes Yes Yes HQ 1920×1080P 1920×1080 ˎˎ The system frequency cannot be changed during recording/playback or while the thumbnail screen is displayed. ˎˎ After switching between 29.97 and 59.94 or between 25 and 50, the camcorder does not reboot automatically. ˎˎ Switching the system frequency will automatically switch the video format to the format used previously at that frequency. 1 Select Operation >Format >Frequency in the setup menu. 1920×1080 000 36 3. Settings and Adjustments: Format Settings SDI OUT Connector and HDMI Output Connector Output Formats The signals that can be output from the SDI OUT connector and HDMI output connector are shown in the following table according to the Operation >Format setting in the setup menu. Frequency 59.94 Rec Format (codec omitted) 1920×1080P 1440×1080i 1280×720P 720×480i 1920×1080P 1280×720P 23.98 Frequency Input/Output Rec Format (codec omitted) 1920×1080P Input/Output 1920×1080i 29.97 Format 50 Operation menu Format Operation menu 1920×1080P 1280×720P Output Format SDI HDMI 1920×1080P (Level A) 1920×1080P 1920×1080P (Level B) No signal 1920×1080i 1920×1080i 720×486i 720×480i 1920×1080i 1920×1080i 720×486i 720×480i 1920×1080i 1920×1080i 720×486i a) 720×480i a) 1280×720P 1280×720P 720×486i 720×480i 720×486i 720×480i No signal 720×480P 1920×1080PsF 1920×1080i 720×486i 720×480i 1280×720P 1280×720P 720×486i 720×480i 1920×1080PsF No signal 1920×1080i (2-3PD) 1920×1080i (2-3PD) 720×486i (2-3PD) 720×480i (2-3PD) 1280×720P (2-3PD) 1280×720P (2-3PD) 720×486i (2-3PD) 720×480i (2-3PD) 1920×1080i 1440×1080i 1280×720P 720×576i 25 1920×1080P 1280×720P Output Format SDI HDMI 1920×1080P (Level A) 1920×1080P 1920×1080P (Level B) No signal 1920×1080i 1920×1080i 720×576i 720×576i 1920×1080i 1920×1080i 720×576i 720×576i 1920×1080i 1920×1080i 720×576i a) 720×576i a) 1280×720P 1280×720P 720×576i 720×576i 720×576i 720×576i No signal 720×576P 1920×1080PsF 1920×1080i 720×576i 720×576i 1280×720P 1280×720P 720×576i 720×576i a) Switches to 1920×1080i when proxy recording or wireless LAN connection function is on. 000 37 3. Settings and Adjustments: Format Settings VIDEO Connector Output Formats Operation menu Format The signals that can be output from the VIDEO connector are shown in the following table according to the Operation >Format setting in the setup menu. Operation menu Frequency 50 VIDEO OUT signal format Rec Format (codec omitted) 1920×1080P Format Frequency 59.94 Rec Format (codec omitted) 1920×1080P 1920×1080i 1440×1080i 1280×720P 720×480i 29.97 1920×1080P 1280×720P 23.98 1920×1080P 1280×720P VIDEO OUT signal format Proxy recording/Wireless LAN connection function OFF ON HD-Y HD-Y HD-Y HD-Y HD-Y HD-Y Composite Composite c) HD-Y HD-Y Composite Composite c) HD-Y HD-Y Composite – HD Sync a) HD Sync a) Composite Composite c) Composite Composite c) Composite HD-Y HD-Y HD-Y Composite Composite HD-Y b) HD-Y b) Composite Composite c) HD-Y HD-Y HD-Y HD-Y Composite Composite c) HD-Y b) HD-Y b) Composite Composite c) 1920×1080i 1440×1080i 1280×720P 720×576i 25 c) 1920×1080P 1280×720P Proxy recording/Wireless LAN connection function OFF ON HD-Y HD-Y HD-Y HD-Y HD-Y HD-Y Composite Composite c) HD-Y HD-Y Composite Composite c) HD-Y HD-Y Composite – HD Sync a) HD Sync a) Composite Composite c) Composite Composite c) Composite HD-Y HD-Y HD-Y Composite Composite c) HD-Y HD-Y b) b) Composite Composite c) a) 1080i sync signal output. b) 1080PsF signal output. c) Character information (superimposed) turns on/off in sync with the SDI OUT2/HDMI character information display switching. 000 38 3. Settings and Adjustments Expansion of Imaging Dynamic Range You can set the imaging dynamic range to High Dynamic Range (HDR) mode to record and output images with BT.2020 equivalent color space and increased dynamic range when the recording format is HD. This function requires the CBKZ-SLHL1 HDR LICENSE (option). [Notes] ˎˎ Not supported for MPEG IMX and DVCAM file formats. ˎˎ An SD format signal cannot be output when HDR is configured. If the signal format is SD and then HDR is selected, the image is output in the default HD format. ˎˎ Change the dynamic range mode setting with the Picture Cache Rec function set to Off. Operation >Rec Function >Picture Cache Rec >Off Setting the Dynamic Range 1 Select Operation >Base Setting >Shooting Mode in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select the dynamic range mode. Select HDR to set to High Dynamic Range or SDR to set to standard dynamic range. Checking HDR settings You can check the settings using Operation >HDR Setting in the setup menu. For details, see page 97. Gamma display assist function When the HDR(HLG) function is used, the contrast of the video shown in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor is lower than when using conventional dynamic range, making the picture harder to see. In this case, you can adjust the contrast of the image displayed in the viewfinder and LCD monitor to an appropriate level using the gamma display assist function. The gamma display assist function is automatically applied when HDR Setting >HD Rec/Out is set to HDR(HLG). You can also assign the gamma display assist function to an assignable switch, and then turn the function on/off with a single button touch as required. [Note] This function is applied to the image in the viewfinder and LCD monitor. It is not applied to the recorded image or output image. 000 39 3. Settings and Adjustments Adjusting the Black Balance and White Balance To ensure excellent image quality when using this camcorder, conditions may require that both the black balance and the white balance be adjusted. Black balance and white balance adjustment values that are automatically set by the camcorder and the various settings are stored in the camcorder memory and retained even when the power is turned off. Adjusting the Black Balance 2 Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLACK and release the switch. The message “Executing…” appears during execution, and changes to “OK” when the adjustment finishes. Adjustment values are saved to memory automatically. [Notes] ˎˎ During the black balance adjustment, the iris is automatically closed. ˎˎ During the black balance adjustment, the gain selection circuit is automatically activated so you may see flickering on the viewfinder screen, but this is not a fault. The black balance will require adjustment in the following cases. ˎˎWhen the camcorder is used for the first time ˎˎWhen the camcorder has not been used for a long time ˎˎWhen the camcorder is used under conditions in which the surrounding temperature has changed greatly ˎˎWhen the GAIN selector (L/M/H/Turbo) values have been changed with Operation >Gain Switch in the setup menu. It is not usually necessary to adjust the black balance when using the camcorder after it has been off. If automatic black balance adjustment cannot be made In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are performed in the following order: black set and black balance. Manual black balance adjustment can be selected from the setup menu. If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the black balance adjustment. If the error message occurs again, an internal check is necessary. Automatic black balance adjustment is disabled in the following cases. ˎˎDuring recording ˎˎDuring special recording modes ˎˎWhen the shutter mode is SLS 1 Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to CAM. If the black balance adjustment cannot be completed normally, an error message will appear for about three seconds on the viewfinder screen. Error message Meaning NG: Iris not Closed The lens iris did not close; adjustment was impossible. NG: Timeout Adjustment could not be completed within the standard number of attempts. Adjusting the White Balance Always readjust the white balance when the lighting conditions change. 1 Set the switches and selectors as shown below. ˎˎGAIN switch: L (set to a gain value that is as small as possible) ˎˎOUTPUT/DCC switch: CAM ˎˎWHITE BAL switch: A or B1) 1) Adjustment values are saved to memory B only when Operation >White Setting >White Switch<B> in the setup menu is set to Memory. 2 Set the FILTER knob to suit the lighting conditions as follows. 3 Place a white test card under the same lighting conditions as the subject to be shot and zoom in on it. Alternatively, any white object such as a cloth or a wall can be used. The absolute minimum white area is as follows. Rectangle centered on the screen The lengths of the sides are 70% of the length and width of the screen. 10% or more of the surface area of the image within the rectangular area must be white. Iris adjusted using auto iris: Set the automatic/ manual switch on the lens to automatic. 5 Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to WHITE and then release the switch. The message “Executing…” appears during execution, and changes to “OK: (color temperature of subject)” when the adjustment finishes. The adjustment values are saved automatically in the memory selected in step 1 (A or B). [Note] The iris may hunt1) during the adjustment. To prevent this, adjust the iris gain knob (indicated as IG, IS, or S) on the lens. 1) Hunting: Repeated brightening and darkening of the image, resulting from repeated response to automatic iris control. For details, refer to the lens operation manual. If the automatic white balance adjustment cannot be made If the white balance adjustment cannot be completed normally, an error message will appear for about three seconds on the viewfinder screen. Error message Meaning NG: Low Light The white video level is too low. Either open the lens iris or increase the gain. NG: High Light The white video level is too high. Either stop down the lens iris or change the ND filter. NG: Color Temp. High The color temperature of the subject lighting is too high, and could not be adjusted. Adjust the color temperature of the lighting, then update memory. For information about this internal check, refer to the Maintenance Manual (option). [Note] If the lens cable is not firmly connected to the LENS connector, it may not be possible to adjust the lens iris. If this happens, the black balance will be incorrect. [Note] Make sure there are no bright spots in the rectangle. 4 Adjust the lens iris. Iris adjusted manually: Set the iris to an appropriate setting. 000 40 3. Settings and Adjustments: Adjusting the Black Balance and White Balance Error message Meaning NG: Color Temp. Low The color temperature of the subject lighting is too low, and could not be adjusted. Adjust the color temperature of the lighting, then update memory. NG: Out of Range Value could not be adjusted because the difference between the current value and reference value exceeds the adjustment range. NG: Poor White Area The white surface of the subject is too narrow, and could not be adjusted. NG: Timeout Adjustment could not be completed within the specified time. If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the white balance adjustment. If the error message occurs again, an internal check is necessary. For information about this internal check, refer to the Maintenance Manual. If you have no time to adjust the white balance Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST. Changing the color temperature when the ND filter is switched You can assign electrical CC (color correction) filters to ND filters (page 5) allowing you to change the color temperature automatically when the ND filter is switched. 1 Set Maintenance >White Filter >ND Filter C. Temp to On in the setup menu (page 115). 2 To assign an electrical CC filter to FILTER knob position number 1, select [ND FLT C. Temp<1>]. To assign it to positions 2 to 4, select [ND FLT C.Temp<2-4>]. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired color temperature. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required. Switching electrical CC filters with an assignable switch You can assign the function that switches between electrical CC filters to an assignable switch. This allows you to switch between color temperatures (3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K) that have been assigned using up to four positions (A to D) with each press of the assignable switch. 1 Select Maintenance >White Filter in the setup menu. 2 Select the position to which to assign a CC filter by selecting one of [Electrical CC<A>] to [Electrical CC <D>], and then turn the MENU knob to select the desired color temperature. Select “-----” with Electrical CC<C> or <D> selected. When the assignable switch is pressed, the setting for that position is not displayed. For example, if “-----” is set for one position, then switching between the remaining three positions is carried out. 3 Repeat step 2 as required. 4 Assign the electrical CC filter switching function (ELECTRICAL CC) to an assignable switch (page 126). White balance memory Values stored in memory are held until the white balance is next adjusted, even if the camcorder power is turned off. The camcorder has two white balance memories, A and B. You can automatically save adjustment values for each ND filter in the memory that corresponds to the WHITE BAL switch setting (A or B). The camcorder has four built-in ND filters, allowing you to save a total of eight adjustment values (4×2). However, the contents of the memories are not linked to ND filter settings in the following case. ˎˎWhen the number of memories allocated to each of A and B is limited to one by setting Operation >White Setting >Filter White Memory in the setup menu to Off. Also, when Operation >White Setting >White Switch<B> in the setup menu is set to [ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance)], and the WHITE BAL switch is set to B, the ATW function is activated to automatically adjust the white balance of the picture being shot for varying lighting conditions. 000 41 3. Settings and Adjustments Setting the Electronic Shutter Shutter Modes ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode When a remote control unit, such as the RM-B170, is connected, only standard mode (Speed) can be selected. Select this mode for obtaining images with no horizontal bands of noise when shooting subjects such as monitor screens. As shown in the following tables, the range of shutter speeds that can be set varies depending on whether the Slow & Quick Motion (S&Q) function is on or off. Standard mode System frequency Shutter speed (unit: Hz) S&Q: Off S&Q: On 59.94i 60.00 to 7000 — The shutter modes that can be used with the electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can be selected are listed below. [Note] Select this mode for shooting fast-moving subjects with little blurring. You can set the shutter speed in one of two shutter modes: Speed mode, in which the speed is set in seconds, and Angle mode, in which the speed is set in degrees. Speed mode System frequency Shutter speed (unit: seconds) 59.94i 59.94P 50i 50P 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 29.97P 1/40 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 25P 1/33 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 23.98P 1/32 a), 1/48 a), 1/50 a), 1/60, 1/96, 1/100, 1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 a) This speed cannot be selected when the camcorder is in Slow & Quick Motion mode and Operation >Rec Function >Frame Rate in the setup menu is set to a value that is greater than the system frequency. Angle mode 180°, 90°, 45°, 22.5°, 11.25° 59.94P 60.00 to 8000 60.00 to 8000 29.97P 30.00 to 8000 30.00 to 8000 23.98P 23.99 to 6000 30.03 to 6000 50i 50.00 to 7000 — 50P 50.00 to 7000 50.00 to 7000 25P 25.02 to 7000 30.00 to 7000 SLS (slow speed shutter) mode This mode is used to shoot subjects with low illumination. The number of accumulated frames shot when using the slow speed shutter function can be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 16 using Operation >Slow Shutter >Number of Frames in the setup menu. ˎˎ The selectable shutter speeds vary depending on the current system frequency. Switching between Speed mode and Angle mode Setting the Shutter Mode and Shutter Speed [Notes] ˎˎ When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens wider as the shutter speed increases, thus reducing the depth of field. 1 Set the shutter mode to ECS (see the previous item). 1 Select Operation >Shutter >Mode in the setup 2 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired menu. frequency or number of frames. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Speed] or [Angle], and then press the knob. Setting the shutter mode and shutter speed (standard mode) Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained even when the camcorder power is turned off. 1 Push the SHUTTER switch from ON to SELECT. The current shutter setting indication appears in the viewfinder for about three seconds. 2 Before the shutter setting in step 1 disappears, push the SHUTTER switch down to SELECT again. Repeat this step until the desired mode or speed appears. When all modes and speeds are displayed, the display changes in the following order. Speed Mode (with system frequency 59.94i) [Notes] ˎˎ SLS mode cannot be used when the camcorder is in Slow & Quick Motion mode. ˎˎ It is not possible to turn the SLS mode on or off, or change the number of accumulated frames when recording. Setting the shutter speed (ECS mode) ECS Mode [Note] Depending on the frame rate setting (page 52), some shutter speeds cannot be selected in Slow & Quick Motion mode. These speeds are replaced by the slowest selectable shutter speed. Example when shooting in XAVC-I 1080P/29.97P, frame rate of 60, and Slow & Quick Motion: ˎˎSlow & Quick Motion mode: Off 1/401/501/601/100… ˎˎSlow & Quick Motion mode: On 1/601/100… Setting the shutter speed (SLS mode) 1 Select Operation >Slow Shutter >Setting in the setup menu and set the shutter mode to On. 2 Select Operation >Slow Shutter >Number of Frames in the setup menu and select the desired number of frames. 000 42 3. Settings and Adjustments Setting Auto Iris The reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be changed to aid the shooting of clear pictures of back-lit subjects, or to prevent blownout highlights. Convergence level Description –99 Sets the iris 2 f-stops or more darker ±0 Reference level +99 Sets the iris 2 f-stops or more lighter Setting the Auto Iris Operating Mode Set the operating mode used when adjusting levels using auto iris. 1 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Mode in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select the operating mode, then press the knob. Operating mode Description Backlight Mode for shooting in backlight conditions Standard Standard mode Spotlight Mode for reducing blown out highlights when there are spotlights centered on a subject. Set the target convergence level for auto iris 1 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Level in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select the level in the range –99 to +99, then press the knob. Setting the auto iris speed Set the operating speed when adjusting levels using auto iris. 1 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Speed in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select the speed in the range –99 (slowest) to +99 (fastest), then press the knob. 3 Turn the MENU knob to change the reference value. Be sure to confirm that the current shutter mode is not ECS. The current reference value is shown by the iris position indicator (page 16) on the viewfinder screen. ˎˎTo open the iris slightly, turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from the front of the camcorder. Select one of +0.25, +0.5, +0.75, or +1. ˎˎTo close the iris slightly, turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front of the camcorder. Select one of –0.25, –0.5, –0.75, or –1. The changed reference value is retained until the power of the camcorder is turned off. Even if the reference value is changed, it reverts to the standard value every time the power is turned on. Changing the Reference Value of the Lens Iris Setting the Auto Iris Detection Window The reference value for the lens iris can be set within the following range with respect to the standard value. ˎˎ+0.25 to +1 (increments of 0.25): About 0.25 to 1 stop further open ˎˎ–0.25 to –1 (increments of 0.25): About 0.25 to 1 stop further closed Also you can set the area where light detection occurs. 1 Set Operation >Auto Iris >Detect Window 1 Set Operation >Auto Iris >Iris Override in the setup menu to On. 2 Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF. The shaded parts indicate the area of light detection. [Note] Indication in the setup menu to On. The current automatic iris window appears on the viewfinder screen. If it is not necessary to display the auto iris window on the screen, set to Off. 2 Select Operation >Auto Iris >Detect Window in the setup menu. 3 Turn the MENU knob until the desired auto iris window appears, and then press the knob. If you select Var, the following items become effective and you can set the window of the desired size. Set Operation >Auto Iris >Iris Var Width, Iris Var Height, Iris Var, Iris Var H Position, and Iris Var V Position in the setup menu. Item Setting Iris Var Width The width of the window Iris Var Height The height of the window Iris Var H Position The position of the window in the horizontal direction Iris Var V Position The position of the window in the vertical direction. When you exit the menu, the auto iris window selected in step 3 appears. Unless you need to keep this window displayed, set Operation >Auto Iris >Detect Window Indication in the setup menu to Off. Reducing the Effect of Bright Highlights If the subject is too bright, the iris may close too much, leaving the overall image dark, a condition known as clipped blacks. In such cases, switching the clip highlight function on will clip the signal above a certain level, reducing the effects of the auto iris. Set Operation >Auto Iris >Clip High Light in the setup menu to On. 000 43 3. Settings and Adjustments: Setting Auto Iris Adjusting the Iris Gain on the Lens Supplied with the PXW-X400KC 1 Set the iris mode switch to the A (auto) position. 2 Flip off the rubber cap of the iris gain adjustment trimmer. 3 Turn the iris gain adjustment trimmer using a screwdriver, or similar object, to adjust the gain. Turn clockwise to increase the gain. Turn counterclockwise to decrease the gain. Adjust while watching the iris ring on the lens body. 4 Reattach the rubber cap. 000 44 3. Settings and Adjustments Adjusting the Focus This section describes the focus adjustment when using the lens supplied with the PXW-X400KF. One-push Auto Focus [Note] The lens is designed with an extra margin at the infinity position (∞), to compensate for focus drifting due to variations in temperature. When shooting a subject at infinity in MF or Full MF mode, check the picture in the viewfinder as you focus. Press the PUSH AF button. The auto focus activates temporarily. The one-push auto focus stops when the subject comes into focus. Adjusting in Full MF Mode MF Assist Function When you slide the focus ring back (toward the camcorder), the focus mode is set to Full MF mode for full manual focus adjustment. When the MF assist function is on (page 125), auto focus is activated after you stop focusing using the focus ring and provides fine control adjustment of the focus of the subject in the center of the display (focus tracking). When fine adjustment stops, the MF assist auto focus operation ends. [Note] When you slide the focus ring back, the focus instantly moves to the marker position. Focus by turning the focus ring while viewing the viewfinder. The distance indications on the ring are valid in Full MF mode. The distances where the picture is in focus correspond to absolute positions of the focus ring. Peaking You can turn the PEAKING knob on the viewfinder to use the peaking function. Edges are emphasized in the monitor picture, which facilitates manual focusing. The recorded video signals are not affected. Adjusting in AF Mode When you slide the focus ring forward and set the FOCUS switch to A (auto), the focus mode becomes AF mode, in which auto focus is available continuously. The distance indications on the ring are invalid in AF mode. Using Macro Mode Using the Focus Ring Adjust the focus by turning the focus ring while viewing the viewfinder. The distance indications on the ring are invalid in MF mode. When the focus mode is MF or AF, set the MACRO switch to the ON position to enable macro mode. Macro mode allows you to adjust the focus over a range that includes the macro area. Macro mode is disabled in Full MF mode. 000 45 3. Settings and Adjustments Adjusting the Audio Level When you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to AUTO, the input levels of analog audio signals recorded on each channel are adjusted automatically. You can also make manual adjustments. [Note] Even if you set the AUDIO SELECT switch to AUTO, the input levels of digital audio signals are not adjusted automatically. Target Audio Level for Manual Adjustment Make adjustment using –20 dB as the target level. If the audio level meter shows a maximum level of 0 dB, then it indicates that the input audio level is excessive. Excessive input level 2 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) corresponding to the channel(s) selected in step 1 to MANUAL. 3 With the LEVEL knob(s) for the channel(s) selected in step 1, adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to –20 dB for a normal input volume. Selecting the knob used for adjusting the recording level In Maintenance >Audio in the setup menu, you can select which audio level control controls the audio recording level of the input to each of the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors. The correspondences between the settings of the menu items and the controls are as follows. [Note] If an AES/EBU digital audio signal is input, the recording level cannot be adjusted using the camcorder. 1 To adjust the signal input to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector, set the AUDIO IN CH1 or CH2 switch to REAR. To adjust both input signals, set both switches to REAR. 2 Set the AUDIO SELECT switch(es) for the desired channel(s) selected in step 1 to MANUAL. 3 Turn the MIC LEVEL knob, and adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to –20 dB for a normal input volume. Selecting the knob used for adjusting the recording level Knob Side1 LEVEL (CH1) knob Front MIC LEVEL knob Setting Knob Front+Side1 LEVEL (CH1) knob and MIC LEVEL knob (linked operation) Side1 LEVEL (CH1) knob Front MIC LEVEL knob Front+Side1 LEVEL (CH1) knob and MIC LEVEL knob (linked operation) Setting Knob Side2 LEVEL (CH2) knob MIC CH2 Level: Channel 2 recording level Front MIC LEVEL knob Setting Knob Front+Side2 LEVEL (CH2) knob and MIC LEVEL knob (linked operation) Side2 LEVEL (CH2) knob Front MIC LEVEL knob Front+Side2 LEVEL (CH2) knob and MIC LEVEL knob (linked operation) [Note] When you have operation of the LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs and MIC LEVEL knob linked together, if the MIC LEVEL knob is set to 0, the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position of the MIC LEVEL knob before adjusting the LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs. [Note] When you have operation of the MIC LEVEL knob and LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs linked together, if the LEVEL (CH1/CH2) knobs are set to 0, the audio signals on channels 1 and 2 cannot be recorded. Check the position of the LEVEL (CH1/ CH2) knobs before adjusting the MIC LEVEL knob. to FRONT. Setting Rear2/WRR Level: Channel 2 recording level Manually Adjusting the Audio Levels of the Audio Inputs from the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 Connectors 1 Set either or both of the AUDIO IN switch(es) In Maintenance >Audio in the setup menu, you can select which audio level control controls the audio recording level of the front microphone input. The correspondences between the settings of the menu items and the controls are as follows. MIC CH1 Level: Channel 1 recording level Rear1/WRR Level: Channel 1 recording level Target input level Manually Adjusting the Audio Level of the MIC IN Connector Recording Audio on Channels 3 and 4 1 Select the audio recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 with the AUDIO IN CH3/CH4 switches. CH3 switch Channel 3 recording target FRONT Front microphone audio REAR Audio signal input to AUDIO IN CH1 connector WIRELESS Wireless microphone audio CH4 switch Channel 4 recording target FRONT Front microphone audio REAR Audio signal input to AUDIO IN CH2 connector Wireless microphone audio WIRELESS 2 To adjust automatically, set the AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switch to AUTO. To adjust manually, set the AUDIO SELECT CH 3-4 switch to MANUAL. 3 Select the knobs that adjust the audio levels with the Audio CH3 Level and Audio CH4 Level items under Maintenance >Audio in the setup menu. Audio CH3 Level: Channel 3 recording level Setting Knob Side3 LEVEL (CH3) knob Front MIC LEVEL knob 000 46 3. Settings and Adjustments: Adjusting the Audio Level Setting Knob Front+Side3 LEVEL (CH3) knob and MIC LEVEL knob (linked operation) Audio CH4 Level: Channel 4 recording level Setting Knob Side4 LEVEL (CH4) knob Front MIC LEVEL knob Front+Side4 LEVEL (CH4) knob and MIC LEVEL knob (linked operation) You can now adjust the levels of audio channels 3 and 4 with the knobs selected here. 000 47 3. Settings and Adjustments Setting Time Data Setting the Timecode The timecode setting range is from 00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29 (hours:minutes:seconds:frames). 1 Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to switch the display in the LCD monitor to status display. 2 Set the DISPLAY switch to TC. 3 Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET. 4 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET. The first (leftmost) digit of the timecode flashes. 5 Use the up and down arrow buttons to change values, and use the left and right arrow buttons to move the flashing digit. Repeat until all digits are set. To reset the value to 00:00:00:00, press the RESET/RETURN button. 6 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or R-RUN. F-RUN: Free run (timecode generator keeps running) R-RUN: Recording run (timecode generator runs only while recording) [Note] When Picture Cache Rec mode is active, time data cannot be set by switching the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET. To set time data, turn Picture Cache Rec mode off. Switching between DF and NDF You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or non-drop frame (NDF) mode using Maintenance >Timecode >DF/NDF in the setup menu. To make the timecode consecutive When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to R-RUN, recording a number of scenes on the media normally produces consecutive timecode. However, once you remove the media and record on another media, the timecode will no longer be consecutive when you use the original media again for recording. In this case, to make the timecode consecutive, set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to REGEN. Saving the real time in the timecode Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to CLOCK saves the real time in the timecode. The time of the camcorder internal clock is applied as the real time. For details about adjusting the internal clock, see “Setting the Date and Time of the Internal Clock” (page 26). Setting the User Bits By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal digits), you can record user information such as the date, time, or scene number on the timecode track. To reset the value to 00 00 00 00, press the RESET/RETURN button. 5 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN or R-RUN, corresponding to the desired operating mode for the timecode generator. User bit memory function The user bit setting (apart from the real time) is automatically retained in memory even when the power is turned off. Synchronizing the Timecode to an External Source You can synchronize the internal timecode generator of this camcorder with an external generator. You can also synchronize the timecode generators of other camcorders/VTRs with the internal generator of this camcorder. 1 Connect both the reference video signal and the external timecode as illustrated below. Example 1: Synchronizing with an external signal 1 Press the DISP SEL/EXPAND button to switch the display in the LCD monitor to status display. 2 Set the DISPLAY switch to U-BIT. 3 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET. The first (leftmost) digit flashes. 4 Use the up and down arrow buttons to change values, and use the left and right arrow buttons to move the flashing digit. Repeat until all digits are set. To next camcorder [1] VIDEO OUT connector [2] TC OUT connector [3] TC IN connector [4] GENLOCK IN connector 2 Turn on the POWER switch. 3 Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET. [1] [2] External timecode Reference video signal [1] GENLOCK IN connector [2] TC IN connector Example 2: Interconnecting a number of camcorders with one camcorder as reference 4 Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN. 5 Set the DISPLAY switch to TC. 6 Supply a timecode signal and a reference video signal, complying with the SMPTE standard and in proper phase relationship, to the TC IN connector and to the GENLOCK IN connector, respectively. This operation synchronizes the internal 000 48 3. Settings and Adjustments: Setting Time Data timecode generator with the external timecode. Once about ten seconds have elapsed after the timecode locks, the external lock state is maintained even if the external timecode source is disconnected. To release the external synchronization, first stop the external timecode input, then set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN. [Notes] ˎˎ When you finish the above procedure, the internal timecode is immediately synchronized with the external timecode and the time data display will show the value of the external timecode. However, wait for a few seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before recording. ˎˎ If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the same as the system frequency of the camcorder, the camcorder cannot be correctly genlocked. If this occurs, the timecode will not acquire successful lock with the external timecode. User bit settings during synchronization When the timecode is synchronized to an external signal, only the time data is synchronized with the external timecode value. Note on changing the power supply from the battery pack to an external power supply during external synchronization To maintain a continuous power supply, connect the external power supply to the DC IN connector before removing the battery pack. You may lose timecode external synchronization if you remove the battery pack first. Camcorder genlock during external synchronization During external synchronization, the camcorder is genlocked to the reference video signal input from the GENLOCK IN connector. 000 49 4. Shooting Basic Operations This section explains the basic shooting and recording procedures. Before starting to shoot, inspect the camera system to verify that it is operating properly. 1 Attach a fully charged battery pack (page 23). 2 Load one or two SxS memory cards (page 31). If you load two cards, the camcorder switches automatically to the second card when the first card becomes full. 3 Set the camcorder’s POWER switch (page 3) to ON. 4 Make the following settings. Marker display: On (page 100) Iris: Auto (page 42) Zoom: Auto Camera output: Select the picture currently being shot (camera picture), and turn the DCC function on (page 6) Timecode advance mode: F-RUN (Free Run) or R-RUN (Rec Run) (page 47) Audio input channel selection: Auto (page 9) 5 Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to the BLACK position to adjust the black balance (page 39). 6 Select a filter according to the lighting conditions, and adjust the white balance (page 39). 7 Point the camcorder at the subject, and adjust the focus and zoom. 8 If you are using the electronic shutter, select an appropriate shutter mode and speed (page 41). 9 Do one of the following to start recording. –– Press the REC START button (page 4). –– Press the VTR button on the lens. –– Turn on the assignable switch to which the Rec function has been assigned (page 124). During recording, the TALLY indicators, the tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder, and the REC indicator on the viewfinder screen light. Adjust the zoom and focus as required. normal speed. The clip is played to the end, then Rec Review ends and the camcorder returns to Stby mode. When the Rec Review function is assigned to the RET button on the lens, you can also conduct a review by using the RET button. 11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 to continue recording. With each repetition, another clip is created on the memory card. Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 [Notes] ˎˎ Never remove the battery pack while the camcorder is recording (while the ACCESS indicator on the right-side panel is lit in blue and the ACCESS indicator in the card slot section is lit in orange). Doing so risks the loss of several seconds of data before the recording was interrupted, because internal processing will not end normally. ˎˎ The playback control buttons (EJECT, F REV, F FWD, NEXT, PREV, PLAY/PAUSE, STOP) do not function during recording. 10 To stop recording, perform one of the operations listed in step 9. The TALLY indicators, the tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder, and the REC indicator on the viewfinder screen go out, and camcorder enters recording standby (Stby) mode. A clip is created from the video and audio data and the metadata recorded between steps 9 and 10. To review the recording (rec review) With the camcorder in recording standby mode, press an assignable switch assigned with the Rec Review function to play back the last two seconds of the clip at normal speed. Press and hold an assignable switch assigned with the Rec Review function for one second or longer to start play back from the frame two seconds prior to the last frame at four times speed in the reverse direction. Then, release the button to play the clip from that point at [Notes] ˎˎ You cannot resume recording for about one second after stopping recording. ˎˎ The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on one memory card is 600. Even if the memory card has enough free capacity to record more clips, when 600 clips have been recorded, no further recording is possible. ˎˎ Clips shorter than 2 seconds cannot be created. For example, even if recording is started and then stopped within 2 seconds, the recording continues for a duration of 2 seconds. Also, if recording is started, immediately stopped, and then restarted within 2 seconds of the initial recording start, two clips are created. ˎˎ The maximum continuous recording time spanning several memory cards is 24 hours. When 24 hours have elapsed, recording stops. Clip names Eight-character clips names (consisting of a four-character prefix and a four-digit number) are generated automatically for clips recorded by this camcorder. Example: ABCD0001 You can also use Operation >Clip >Title Prefix in the setup menu to set the clip name prefix to a user-specified string of characters (four to 46 characters in length). (A user-specified prefix cannot be changed after recording.) The four-digit number at the end of clip names is generated automatically, incrementing as clips are recorded. Playing Recorded Clips 1 Insert the SxS memory card to play (page 31). 2 Press the PREV button (page 8) or the F REV button (page 7) to cue up the clip to play. 3 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button. The PLAY/PAUSE indicator lights, and the playback picture appears in the viewfinder. Seamless playback Seamless playback across clip boundaries is supported if each clip recorded on an SxS PRO+, SxS PRO X, or XQD-G series memory card has the following status. ˎˎVideo format is XAVC-I/XAVC-L and clip length is 4 seconds or longer ˎˎVideo format is MPEG HD and clip length is 2 seconds or longer [Notes] ˎˎ For SxS-1 cards, double the length described above is required. ˎˎ Seamless playback not supported for SD cards. Pausing playback Press the PLAY/PAUSE button. The PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes while play is paused. Press the button again to return to play mode. High-speed playback Press the F FWD button (page 8) or the F REV button (page 7). To return to normal playback, press the PLAY/ PAUSE button. 000 50 4. Shooting: Basic Operations Stopping playback Press the STOP button: Playback stops, and the camcorder enters E-E mode. Press the THUMBNAIL button: Playback stops and the thumbnail screen (page 83) appears in the viewfinder. Playback also stops and the timecode screen appears in the viewfinder when you start recording during playback, and when you eject an SxS memory card. Switching between memory cards When two memory cards are loaded, press the SLOT SELECT button (page 31) to select the active slot. It is not possible to switch between memory cards during playback. 000 51 4. Shooting Advanced Operations Recording Shot Marks On this camcorder, two types of shot marks are available. You can record them at user-specified positions to make it easier for editors to cue up those positions. The maximum number of shot marks per clip is 999. You can also use the Thumbnail menu to add and delete shot marks in clips. For details, see “Adding/Deleting Essence Marks in Clips” (page 87). To record shot marks, turn on an assignable switch assigned with the Shot Mark 1 or Shot Mark 2 function. When a shot mark is recorded, a “Shot Mark 1” or “Shot Mark 2” indication appears in the viewfinder for about three seconds near the timecode indicator. [Note] An SD card inserted in an SxS card slot using the MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor (option) cannot be used for recording. Recording Retroactive Images (Picture Cache Rec Function) The camcorder always maintains a cache of video and audio data for a set interval (maximum of 15 seconds) in internal storage memory when shooting, allowing you to record several seconds of footage before the start of recording. For details about the video formats supported for this function, see “Special Recording Support by Recording Format” (page 164). To start recording in Picture Cache Rec mode, Picture Cache Rec mode and the storage time of images in memory (Picture Cache Rec time) must be set beforehand in the Operation menu. When recording is started, the duration of footage that can be recorded retroactively is determined by the Picture Cache Rec time. The duration that can be recorded retroactively may be reduced in some circumstances, as described in [Notes] below. [Notes] Setting Clip Flags To make it easier for editors to select good clips, you can set clip flags in recorded clips. Clip flags are set in the Thumbnail menu. For details, see “Adding Clip Flags to Clips” (page 87) and “Deleting a Clip Flag” (page 87). [Note] An SD card inserted in an SxS card slot using the MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor (option) cannot be used for recording. ˎˎ The storage of video in memory starts when Picture Cache Rec mode is selected. However, if recording is started immediately after selecting this mode, a portion of the images shot immediately prior to selecting Picture Cache Rec mode will not be recorded. ˎˎ Images are not stored in memory during playback, recording review, or thumbnail display, so recording of images during these periods is not supported. Setting the Picture Cache Rec time 1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Picture Cache Rec in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press the knob. 3 Select Operation >Rec Function > Cache Rec Time in the setup menu. 4 Turn the MENU knob to select the Picture Cache Rec time setting, then press the knob. The options will vary depending on the recording format and system frequency settings. See “Picture Cache Rec Mode Settings” (page 165) in the Appendix. Device operation when recording in Picture Cache Rec mode When recording starts, the “Cache” indication in the viewfinder changes to the “Rec” indication. The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do during normal recording. The recording procedure is essentially the same, except for the following points where operation varies from normal. ˎˎIf recording is started while accessing media, the actual start point of recording may be delayed even longer than the set Picture Cache Rec time. The delay increases with the number of recorded clips, so stopping recording and quickly restarting recording should be avoided in Picture Cache Rec mode. ˎˎRegardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/RRUN switch, the camcorder operates in F-RUN mode. ˎˎIn Picture Cache Rec mode, time data cannot be set by switching the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET. To set time data, first stop Picture Cache Rec mode. ˎˎIf the remaining recording time of the media in the currently selected slot is shorter than the Picture Cache Rec time, images are recorded to the media (if there is sufficient remaining recording time) in the non-selected slot. However, images are not recorded if there is no media in the non-selected slot or if the media in the slot has insufficient remaining recording time. (A message notifying you that there is insufficient remaining recording time will appear on the viewfinder screen.) ˎˎShot marks are not recorded, even if the shot marks are set before the recording start operation. To exit, stop the recording. If the camcorder is turned off during recording Canceling Picture Cache Rec mode ˎˎIf the POWER switch on the camcorder is set to the OFF position, the media is accessed for several seconds to record the images stored in memory up till that moment, and then the power turns off automatically. ˎˎIf the battery is removed, the DC cable disconnected, or the AC adaptor turned off Once Picture Cache Rec mode is selected, it is maintained until the settings are changed. Alternatively, instead of performing steps 1 and 2, you can also select Picture Cache Rec mode using an assignable switch (page 124) which has been assigned with the Picture Cache Rec function. [Notes] ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Picture Cache Rec, can be used at any one time. If another special recording mode is enabled while Picture Cache Rec is in use, Picture Cache Rec is automatically released. ˎˎ Changing system settings, such as the video format, clears all images stored in memory. Consequently, images shot just before changing settings cannot be recorded, if recording is started immediately after changing settings. Picture Cache Rec mode is automatically released. ˎˎ The Picture Cache Rec time cannot be set during recording. Starting Picture Cache Rec recording Shoot as described in “Basic Operations” (page 49). In recording standby mode, set Operation >Rec Function >Picture Cache Rec in the setup menu to Off. 000 52 4. Shooting: Advanced Operations during recording, the video and audio data stored in memory is erased, and images up till that point are not recorded. Care should be exercised when exchanging the battery. Recording Time-lapse Video (Interval Rec Function) The camcorder’s Interval Rec function allows you to capture time-lapse video to the camcorder’s internal memory. This function is an effective way to shoot slow-moving subjects. When you start recording, the camcorder automatically records a specified number of frames at a specified interval time. This function is enabled when the camcorder is set to any of the following video formats (page 35). XAVC-I XAVC-L MPEG HD 422 Recording interval (Interval Time) allows you to record pictures under stable light and color temperature conditions. [Notes] ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Interval Rec recording, can be used at any one time. If another special recording mode is enabled while Interval Rec is in use, for example, Interval Rec is automatically released. ˎˎ Interval Rec settings cannot be changed during recording. Setting Interval Rec 1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Interval Rec in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press the knob. The camcorder enters Interval Rec mode, and “Int Stby” appears at the REC indicator position on the viewfinder screen. (The green tally indicator in the HDVF series viewfinder also flashes.) 3 Select [Number of Frames], turn the MENU knob to select the number of frames to record in one take, and then press the knob. You can select 2, 6, or 12 when the format is 50P or 59.9P. You can select 1, 3, 6, or 9 when the format is 23.98P, 25P, 29.97P, 50i, or 59.94i. 4 Select [Interval Time], turn the MENU knob to select the desired interval, and then press the knob. You can select 1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 sec, 1 to 10/15/20/30/40/50 min, or 1 to 4/6/12/24 hour. Number of frames in one take (Number of Frames) A pre-lighting function is available when Interval Rec is enabled. This function automatically turns on the video light before recording starts, which 5 As required, select [Pre-Lighting], turn the MENU knob to select the length of lighting time before recording starts, and then press the knob. You can select 2, 5, 10 seconds, or Off. [Notes] ˎˎ If you want to turn the video light on before the start of recording, set the camcorder’s LIGHT switch to AUTO. The video light switch must also be turned on. When this is done, the video light turns on and off automatically. However, the video light remains lit if the time that it would be off is five seconds or less. ˎˎ If you set the LIGHT switch to MANUAL and turn the video light switch on, the video light is always lit. (The video light does not turn on and off automatically.) The camcorder exits Interval Rec mode when it is powered off, but the number of frames, interval time, and pre-lighting settings are maintained. You do not need to set them again the next time you shoot in Interval Rec mode. Starting Interval Rec recording Make the settings and preparations described in “Basic Operations” (page 49), secure the camcorder so that it does not move, and begin shooting. When Interval Rec mode is set to On, “Int Stby” appears at the REC position on the viewfinder screen. When you start recording, “Int Rec” and “Int Stby” are displayed alternately. The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do during normal recording. (The green tally indicator in the HDVF series viewfinder also flashes at high speed.) If you are using the pre-lighting function, the video light comes on before recording starts. To exit, stop the recording. When shooting ends, the video data stored in memory up to that point is written to the media. Canceling Interval Rec mode Do one of the following. ˎˎSet the POWER switch to OFF. ˎˎIn recording standby mode, set Operation >Rec Function >Interval Rec in the setup menu to Off. [Note] Restarting the camcorder automatically releases Interval Rec mode. Limitations during recording ˎˎRegardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/RRUN switch, the advance mode of the internal timecode generator is always R-RUN. ˎˎAudio is not recorded. ˎˎReviewing the recording (Rec Review) is not possible. ˎˎGenlock is not possible. If the camcorder is turned off during recording ˎˎIf the POWER switch on the camcorder is set to the OFF position, the media is accessed for several seconds to record the images stored in memory up till that moment, and then the power turns off automatically. ˎˎIf power is lost because the battery was removed, the DC power cord was disconnected, or the power was turned off on the AC adaptor side, then the video and audio data shot up to that point may be lost (maximum 10 seconds). Care should be exercised when exchanging the battery. Shooting with Slow & Quick Motion You can specify a recording frame rate that is different from the playback frame rate. [Note] When shooting in XAVC recording format, use SxS PRO+ type SxS memory cards. 000 53 4. Shooting: Advanced Operations Recording format System frequency S&Q frame rate XAVC-I 1080P 59.94P/50P /29.97P/23.98P /25P XAVC-L 50 1080P 59.94P/50P/ 29.97P/23.98P/ 25P XAVC-L 35 1080P 59.94P/50P /29.97P/23.98P 25P HD422 50 1080P a) 29.97P 23.98P 25P 1 FPS to 60 FPS (1 FPS units) [Notes] 1 FPS to 30 FPS (1 FPS units) 1 FPS to 25 FPS (1 FPS units) a) Supported for exFAT and UDF files systems. Only exFAT is supported for other recording formats. By shooting with a frame rate that differs from the playback frame rate, you can obtain slow and quick motion effects that are smoother than lowspeed or high-speed playback of content recorded at the normal frame rate. Setting Slow & Quick Motion 1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Slow & Quick Motion in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press the knob. Slow & Quick Motion starts, and “S&Q Stby” appears in the recording status indicator area in the viewfinder. Next, set the frame rate. 3 Select Operation >Rec Function >Slow & Quick Motion >Frame Rate in the setup menu. 4 Turn the MENU knob to select the frame rate, then press the knob. When you finish making these settings, the system frequency and the frame rate appear at the top of the viewfinder screen. You can change the frame rate while viewing the display in the viewfinder by turning the MENU knob. The Slow & Quick Motion mode setting and the frame rate are retained even after the camcorder is powered off. ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Slow & Quick Motion, can be used at any one time. ˎˎ If another special recording function is enabled while using Slow & Quick Motion, Slow & Quick Motion is automatically canceled. ˎˎ Slow & Quick Motion cannot be set during recording, playback, or while the thumbnail screen is displayed. ˎˎ Slow & Quick Motion cannot be set if the slow shutter function is set. Starting Slow & Quick Motion recording Shoot as described in “Basic Operations” (page 49). ˎˎAudio cannot be recorded when the recording and playback frame rates differ. ˎˎReviewing the recording (Rec Review) is not possible. ˎˎIf you change the recording frame rate to a value faster than the current shutter speed, the shutter speed is changed to the slowest value for which shooting is possible. Example: If the frame rate is 32 and the shutter speed is 1/40, and you change the frame rate to 55, then the shutter speed is changed to 1/60. It is not possible to select a shutter speed that is slower than the recording frame rate. ˎˎGenlock is not possible. Recording with the Clip Continuous Rec Function With the camcorder in recording standby mode, set Operation >Rec Function >Slow & Quick in the setup menu to Off. Limitations during recording Setting Clip Continuous Rec ˎˎRegardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/RRUN switch, the advance mode of the internal timecode generator is always R-RUN. 1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Clip To exit, stop the recording. [Note] It takes longer than normal for recording to stop when the frame rate is set to a low value (for a slow frame rate). Canceling Slow & Quick Motion mode the knob. “Cont Stby” appears in the viewfinder, and the function is enabled. [Notes] ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Clip Continuous Rec, can be used at any one time. ˎˎ If another special recording mode is enabled while Clip Continuous Rec is in use, for example, the currently selected mode is automatically released. You can assign the Clip Continuous Rec on/off function to one of the ASSIGN. 1/2/3 switches, ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches, or the ONLINE button. For details, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches” (page 124). Normally, a clip is created as an independent file each time that you start and stop recording. But this function allows you to start and stop recording while continuously recording to the same clip, for as long as the function remains enabled. This is convenient when you do not want to generate a large number of short clips, and when you want to record without worrying about exceeding the clip limit. It is still easy to find recording start points, because a Rec Start essence mark is recorded at the recording start point each time you start recording. This function is enabled when the camcorder is set to any of the following video formats (page 35). XAVC-I XAVC-L MPEG HD 422 When recording starts, the “S&Q Stby” indication in the viewfinder changes to the “S&Q Rec” indication. The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do during normal recording. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press Continuous Rec in the setup menu. Starting Clip Continuous Rec recording Shoot as described in “Basic Operations” (page 49). When recording starts, the “Cont Stby” indication in the viewfinder changes to “Cont Rec” indication. The TALLY indicators and the tally indicator on the front panel of the viewfinder light as they do during normal recording. [Note] During recording or in recording standby mode (when “Cont Stby” indication is displayed), if you remove the media, the battery, or the power source, the media needs to be restored. It is not possible to restore media on a device other than this camcorder. Exit Clip Continuous Rec mode (page 54) and then remove the media. When “Cont Stby” indication is flashing (once per second), you can remove the media. To exit, stop the recording. [Note] Stop the recording after recording for two or more seconds. 000 54 4. Shooting: Advanced Operations Canceling Clip Continuous Rec mode With the camcorder in recording standby mode, set Operation >Rec Function >Clip Continuous Rec in the setup menu to Off. Limitations during recording A single continuous clip cannot be created if you perform one of the following operations while the camcorder is in recording or recording standby mode. (A new clip will be created when you next start recording.) ˎˎOperate on a clip (lock, delete, or rename a clip) ˎˎSwitch slots ˎˎChange the recording format ˎˎTurn off the POWER switch ˎˎPlayback ˎˎSwitch to the thumbnail screen Recording Video Simultaneously to Two SxS Memory Cards (Simul Rec) Operation >Format >Rec Format in the setup menu Operation >Format >Frequency in the setup menu XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P 59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98 XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i 59.94/50 XAVC-L 50 1280×720P 59.94/50 XAVC-L 35 1080P 59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98 XAVC-L 35 1080i 59.94/50 XAVC-L 25 1080i 59.94/50 HD 422 50 1080P 29.97/25/23.98 HD 422 50 1080i 59.94/50 HD 422 50 720P 59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98 HQ 1920×1080P 29.97/25/23.98 HQ 1920×1080i 59.94/50 HQ 1440×1080i 59.94/50 HQ 1280×720P 59.94/50 Setting Simul Rec 1 Select Operation >Rec Function >Simul Rec in the setup menu. When the video format (page 35) is set to one of the options in the following table, you can record the same video to two SxS memory cards. This function is useful for making a video backup while shooting. [Notes] ˎˎ It is recommended that both SxS memory cards be formatted (initialized) using the camcorder before use. ˎˎ Simultaneous recording is not supported when the file system is UDF. ˎˎ SD cards cannot be used. Operation >Format >Rec Format in the setup menu Operation >Format >Frequency in the setup menu XAVC-I 1920×1080P 59.94/59/29.97/25/23.98 XAVC-I 1920×1080i 59.94/50 XAVC-I 1280×720P 59.94/50 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press the knob. [Notes] ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Simul Rec, can be used at any one time. ˎˎ If another special recording mode is enabled while using Simul Rec, Simul Rec is automatically released. ˎˎ Simul Rec cannot be set during recording, playback, or while the thumbnail screen is displayed. Starting Simul Rec recording 1 Insert SxS memory cards in both memory slots A and B. The ACCESS indicators for SxS slots A and B are lit. Also, icons for SxS slots A and B appear in the viewfinder (page 18). 2 Shoot as described in “Basic Operations” (page 49). [Notes] ˎˎ Simultaneous recording is not possible if either of the media is defective or if the media is write protected. ˎˎ During simultaneous recording, if either of the media becomes full or an error occurs and recording cannot continue, recording to that media stops but recording to the other media continues. To exit, stop the recording. Canceling Simul Rec mode In recording standby mode, set Operation >Rec Function >Simul Rec in the setup menu to Off. 000 55 4. Shooting Proxy Data Proxy data is made up of low-resolution video data (H.264) and audio data (AAC-LC). This lightweight proxy data can be used in the same way as the original data, but it can be transferred more quickly, for more efficient viewing and editing. During clip recording, proxy data is recorded onto the SD card inserted into the PROXY SD card slot. PROXY SD card slot By importing proxy data recorded on the SD card into a computer, you can quickly check the recorded content or perform rapid offline editing. You can record proxy data not only simultaneously when recording on SxS memory cards, but also independently from recording to SxS memory cards. indicator for the PROXY SD card slot is not lit, then turn off the camcorder or turn off the proxy recording/wireless LAN connection function. To turn off the proxy recording/wireless LAN connection function, make the following settings in the setup menu. - Set Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Setting to Off. - Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to Off. ˎˎAttempting to remove the SD card while either the proxy recording or wireless LAN connection function is enabled may display a warning (E91-1C0) in some cases. If the warning appears while recording, data is still recorded correctly to the SxS memory cards, but proxy files are not recorded. The warning message can be cleared by turning the camcorder off and then on again. ˎˎProxy recording will not start if Picture Cache Rec, Interval Rec, Slow & Quick Motion, or streaming is enabled. SD Cards ˎˎWhen recording simultaneously, proxy recording will not start unless an SxS memory card is inserted. ˎˎWhen the camcorder has been turned on for about 35 seconds, the icon (media status indicator for Proxy SD slot) turns on in the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen to indicate that proxy recording is enabled. If you start shooting while the icon is flashing or is not lit, proxy files are not recorded. ˎˎBefore removing an SD card from the camcorder, always check that the ACCESS >Setting in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press the knob. 3 Select Operation >Format Media >SD Card(Proxy) in the setup menu. 4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. A confirmation screen prompting whether to format the card appears. 5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. Formatting begins. During formatting, a message and progress state (%) is displayed and the ACCESS indicator is lit orange. When formatting ends, a completion message appears. Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message. [Note] SD cards supported for recording proxy data Proxy Recording using the Camcorder 1 Select Operation >Proxy Recording Mode ˎˎSDHC memory cards* (Speed Class: 4 or higher, non-UHS, Capacity: 4 GB to 32 GB) ˎˎSDXC memory cards* (Speed Class: 4 or higher, non-UHS, Capacity: 64 GB to 256 GB) * Referred to as “SD cards” in this manual. Formatting (initializing) SD cards SD cards must be formatted the first time they are used in the camcorder. SD cards for use in the camcorder should be formatted using the format function of the camcorder. If a message appears when the SD card is inserted into the camcorder, format the SD card. Formatting an SD card erases all data on the card. The card cannot be restored. Recording Proxy Data To record proxy data simultaneously You can record proxy data to an SD card simultaneously as the recording to SxS memory cards. 1 Select Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Setting in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [On], then press the knob. 3 Insert an SD card for recording proxy data into the PROXY SD card slot. 4 Start recording. The proxy data file is saved in the “/PRIVATE/ PXROOT/Clip” directory of the SD card at the same time as the original data is being recorded onto an SxS memory card. Proxy data recording automatically stops when you stop recording. Checking the remaining recording capacity To record proxy data separately from recording original data You can check the remaining capacity on an SD card on the Media Status screen (page 14). You can record proxy data to an SD card independent of the SxS memory cards. To use an SD card formatted on the camcorder in the slot of another device First, make a backup of the card, then reformat the card in the device to be used. [Notes] ˎˎ If simultaneous proxy recording is started while recording proxy data independently is in progress, the proxy data recording continues without interruption. Subsequently, when simultaneous recording is stopped, proxy data recording also stops. ˎˎ Proxy recording cannot be stopped independently during simultaneous proxy recording. Proxy recording limitations Proxy recording is not supported in the following cases. 000 56 4. Shooting: Proxy Data ˎˎDuring streaming (Maintenance >Streaming >Setting in the setup menu set to On) ˎˎDuring Interval Rec (Operation >Rec Function >Interval Rec in the setup menu set to On) ˎˎDuring Picture Cache Rec (Operation >Rec Function >Picture Cache Rec in the setup menu is set to On) ˎˎDuring Slow & Quick Motion (Operation >Rec Function >Slow & Quick Motion in the setup menu set to On) ˎˎWhen network client mode is enabled (Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Setting in the setup menu is set to On) and Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the setup menu is set to Disable. ˎˎWhen Operation >Format >Frequency in the setup menu is set to 23.98P and Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Size is set to HD Auto(9Mbps) or HD Auto(6Mbps) ˎˎWhen power is being supplied to the external device connector (Operation >USB in the setup menu). ˎˎThe maximum number of clips that can be recorded is 600. About the recorded files ˎˎThe file name extension is “.mp4”. ˎˎThe timecode is also recorded simultaneously. ˎˎA still image of the first frame is also recorded simultaneously. ˎˎLocation information and a Log file are recorded simultaneously if the GPS function is enabled. The Log file is saved in “Root/PRIVATE/SONY/ GPS.” Canceling proxy data recording Set Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Setting in the setup menu to Off. When there is insufficient remaining capacity on an SD card A warning is displayed to indicate that there is insufficient free space. Changing proxy recording settings Select Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Size and Audio Channel in the setup menu to change the settings for the size of the proxy recording format and the audio channel for proxy recording, respectively. [Note] When Operation >XAVC Proxy Rec Mode >Size in the setup menu is set to HD Auto(9Mbps) or HD Auto(6Mbps) and the system frequency is set to 29.97 or 25, the proxy data picture size will be set to 1920×1080 even if the picture size of the recording video format is set to 1280×720. Checking proxy recording settings Select Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Frame Rate and Bit Rate in the setup menu to view the settings for the video frame rate and video bit rate, respectively. 000 57 4. Shooting Planning Metadata Planning metadata is information about shooting and recording plans, recorded in an XML file. You can shoot using clip names and shot mark names defined in advance in a planning metadata file. You can send and receive planning metadata using the “Content Browser Mobile” application. [Note] Use a font set that is compatible with the language set using Maintenance >Language in the setup menu when defining clip names and shot mark names. Using fonts for a language that is different from the language setting on the camcorder may cause characters to be displayed abnormally. “Sort by” setting Sort order Item Information Date/Time (9-0) Sort the file list in descending order in the Date/Time column (newest creation date at the top). Modified Date and time of most recent modification Modified by Name of person who modified the file Title Title1 specified in file (ASCII format clip name) Title2 Title2 specified in file (UTF-8 format clip name) Material Group Number of material groupsa) Shot Mark0 to Shot Mark9 Names defined in file for Shot Mark 0 to Shot Mark 9 4 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load and press the knob. 5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Load] and press the knob, then select [Execute] and press the knob again. Loading a Planning Metadata File into Camcorder Memory when Recording a Clip 1 Save the planning metadata file on an SxS memory card beforehand. Planning metadata files are stored in the “General/Sony/Planning” directory. 2 Insert an SxS memory card in slot A or B. 3 Select Operation >Planning Metadata >Load from Media(A) or Load from Media(B) in the setup menu. A file list screen appears. Up to 512 planning metadata files are displayed in the list. You can change the file list sort order using Operation >Planning Metadata > Sort by in the menu. [Note] Planning metadata files can be loaded from SDXC cards using an optional MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor. However, data cannot be loaded from SDHC/SD cards. a) Material group: A group of clips recorded with the same planning metadata. You can turn the MENU knob to scroll the list. Displaying Detailed Information in Planning Metadata Clearing the Loaded Planning Metadata After loading planning metadata into the camcorder, you can check the detailed information that it contains, such as file names, date and time of creation, and titles. 1 Select Operation >Planning Metadata >Clear 1 Select Operation >Planning Metadata >Properties in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], and then press the knob. The planning metadata information is displayed. Item Information “Sort by” setting Sort order File Name File name Date/Time (0-9) Sort the file list in ascending order in the Date/Time column (oldest creation date at the top). Assign ID Assign ID Created Date and time of creation Memory in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], and then press the knob. Deletion starts. When the deletion ends, the following message appears. Clear Planning Metadata File Done Defining Clip Names in Planning Metadata The following two types of clip name strings can be written in a planning metadata file. ˎˎAn ASCII format name that appears in the viewfinder ˎˎA UTF-8 format name that is actually registered as the clip name You can select which type of clip name is displayed with Operation >Planning Metadata >Clip Name Disp in the setup menu. When a clip name is set with planning metadata, the clip name is displayed. [Note] When you define both an ASCII format name and a UTF-8 format name with planning metadata, the UTF-8 format string is used as the clip name string. If you define either an ASCII format name or a UTF-8 format name with planning metadata, the defined format name is displayed though it is not selected by menu setting. 000 58 4. Shooting: Planning Metadata Clip name string example Use a text editor to modify the two fields in the <Title> tag that contain the clip name strings. The shaded fields in the example are clip name strings. “Typhoon” is described in ASCII format (up to 44 characters). “Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo” is described in UTF-8 format (up to 44 bytes). “sp” indicates a space and indicates a carriage return. <?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding=" UTF-8"?> <PlanningMetadataspxmlns="http:// xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/ planningmetadata"spassignId=" P0001"spcreationDate=" 2016-11-30T17:00:00+09:00"sp lastUpdate=" 2016-12-06T17:00:00+09:00"sp version="1.00"> <PropertiessppropertyId=" assignment"spupdate=" 2016-12-06T17:00:00+09:00"sp modifiedBy="Chris"> <TitlespusAscii="Typhoon"sp xml:lang="en">Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo </Title> </Properties> </PlanningMetadata> [Notes] ˎˎ When you create a file, enter each statement as a single line with a CRLF only after the last character in the statement line, and do not enter spaces except where specified. ˎˎ The following characters cannot be used in clip names. If they are used, they are replaced by an underscore character (_). "*/:<>?\| ˎˎ Up to 44 bytes (or characters) can be entered for the clip name. If the UTF-8 format string exceeds 44 bytes, the first 44 bytes are used as the clip name. If only an ASCII format name is specified, a 44-character string is used as the clip name. When neither an ASCII format name string nor UTF-8 format name string can be used, the standard format clip name is used. Setting clip names 1 Load a planning metadata file that contains clip names into camcorder memory (page 104). 2 Set Operation >Clip >Clip Naming in the setup menu to Plan. Each time that you record a clip, the camcorder automatically generates a name consisting of the clip name defined in the planning metadata file, with the addition of an underbar (_) and a five-digit serial number (00001 to 99999). Examples:Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00001, Typhoon_Strikes_Tokyo_00002,… After the number reaches 99999, the next increment returns the number to 00001. [Note] When you load another planning metadata file, the serial number continues incrementing. You can change the numbering using Operation >Clip >Number Set in the setup menu. Selecting the clip name display format When names are defined in both ASCII format and UTF-8 format, you can use Operation >Planning Metadata >Clip Name Disp in the setup menu to select which of the names to display on the LCD monitor and on the viewfinder screen. To display ASCII format names: Select Title1(ASCII). The clip name becomes “Typhoon_Strikes_ Tokyo_SerialNumber”, but “Typhoon_ SerialNumber” is displayed on the screen. To display UTF-8 format names: Select Title2(UTF-8). The clip name becomes “Typhoon_Strikes_ Tokyo_SerialNumber”, and the same name is displayed on the screen. Defining Shot Mark Names in Planning Metadata When you use planning metadata to set shot marks, you can define names for Shot Mark 0 to Shot Mark 9. When you record shot marks, you can add the shot mark name strings defined in the planning metadata. [Note] Only Shot Mark 1 and Shot Mark 2 can be recorded on the camcorder. Shot mark name string example Use a text editor to modify the fields in the <Meta name> tag. The shaded fields in the example are essence mark name strings. Names can be either in ASCII format (up to 32 characters) or UTF-8 format (up to 16 characters). “sp” indicates a space and indicates a carriage return. [Note] If a name string contains even one non-ASCII character, the maximum length of that string is 16 characters. <?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding=" UTF-8"?> <PlanningMetadata xmlns="http:// xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/ planningmetadata"spassignId=" H00123"spcreationDate=" 2016-11-30T08:00:00Z"splastUpdate=" 2016-11-30T15:00:00Z"spversion= "1.00"> <PropertiessppropertyId= "assignment"spclass="original"sp update="2016-11-30T15:00:00Z"sp modifiedBy="Chris"> <TitlespusAscii="Football Game"spxml:lang="en"> Football Game 30/11/2016</ Title> <Metaspname="_ShotMark1"sp content="Goal"/> <Metaspname="_ShotMark2"sp content="Shoot"/> <Metaspname="_ShotMark3"sp content="Corner Kick"/> <Metaspname="_ShotMark4"sp content="Free Kick"/> <Metaspname="_ShotMark5"sp content="Goal Kick"/> <Metaspname="_ShotMark6"sp content="Foul"/> <Metaspname="_ShotMark7"sp content="PK"/> <Metaspname="_ShotMark8"sp content="1st Half"/> <Metaspname="_ShotMark9"sp content="2nd Half"/> <Metaspname="_ShotMark0"sp content="Kick Off"/> </Properties> </PlanningMetadata> [Note] When you create a definition file, enter each statement as a single line with a CRLF only after the last character in the statement line, and do not enter spaces except where specified, except within essence mark name strings. 000 59 4. Shooting Obtaining Location Information (GPS) Location and time information of video shot when positioning is enabled is recorded by the camcorder. The GPS function is set to Off by factory default. Supported formats for GPS recording GPS recording is supported in XAVC-I and XAVC-L recording formats. When a recording format that does not support GPS recording is set, location information can still be obtained on an SDI output if SDI output is set to On (Operation >Input/Output >SDI Out1 Output or SDI Out2 Output set to On). [Note] Location information is not output when the format is SD SDI. Nor is it output during playback. 1 Check that the camcorder is in standby state. 2 Set Operation >GPS to On in the setup menu. is displayed in the viewfinder when the camcorder is seeking GPS satellites. When positioning is established, location information is recorded when shooting video. The icon displayed in the viewfinder varies, depending on the signal reception from the GPS satellites. Positioning Display status GPS reception state Off GPS is set to Off or an error occurred. No display Positioning not available Location information could not be obtained because GPS signal could not be received. Move to a location with a clear view of the sky. Searching for satellites Searching for GPS satellites. Several minutes may be required to acquire satellites. Positioning Display status GPS reception state Positioning A weak GPS signal is being received. A GPS signal is being received. Location information can be acquired. A strong GPS signal is being received. Location information can be acquired. ˎˎIt may take some time to start acquiring location information after turning on the camcorder. ˎˎIf a positioning icon is not displayed after several minutes, there may be a problem with signal reception. Start shooting without location information, or move to an area with a clear view of the sky. Shooting when a positioning icon is not displayed means that location information will not be recorded. ˎˎThe GPS signal may not be received when indoors or near tall structures. Move to a location with a clear view of the sky. ˎˎThe recording of location information may be interrupted, depending on the strength of the received signal, even if a positioning icon is displayed. 000 60 5. Network Configuration Network Functions Supported by the Camcorder The camcorder supports various network functions. This section provides an overview and detailed description of the network connections and functions. Configure a password in order to use network functions using Access Authentication >Password. [Notes] ˎˎ The Access Authentication >Password setting is blank when network functions are used for the first time and after updating the software to version 5.0 or later from a version prior to version 5.0 or updating to version 6.1 or later from a version prior to version 6.1. ˎˎ If a password is not configured, the Network menu items in the setup menu are disabled (grayed out), and network settings cannot be configured. Network Connection Overview Connecting devices using wireless LAN The camcorder can connect to smartphones, tablets, and other devices using wireless LAN connection using the IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied) or CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option). 1 Select the wireless connection device. IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied) (page 61) CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option) (page 61) 2 Select the wireless LAN access mode. Wi-Fi Access Point mode (page 62) Wi-Fi Station mode (page 63) Connecting to the Internet using a LAN cable Connect the camcorder to the Internet via a router using the network connector. 1 Connect the camcorder and router using a LAN cable. (page 65) Using a modem 1 Attach the USB extension adaptor of the CBK-NA1 (option). (page 65) 2 Connect the modem. (page 66) Connecting to the Internet using wireless LAN Using Wi-Fi remote control You can access the Wi-Fi remote control built into the camcorder from a smartphone, tablet, or other device over a wireless LAN connection. (page 75) Configuring from the web menu Connect the camcorder to the Internet using the IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied), CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option), or modem (option). Network Function Overview The web menu of the camcorder appears when the camcorder is accessed from a browser on a device connected using a wireless LAN connection. (page 77) [Note] Transferring files recorded on the camcorder to a server on the Internet Supported network functions and operating limitations You can transfer proxy files recorded on an SD card and original files recorded on SxS memory cards to a server on the Internet when connected via a 3G/4G/LTE network, access point, wired LAN router. (page 69) (page 82) The CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor Kit (option) is required if connecting using a CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option) or modem (option). When using the IFU-WLM3 (supplied) 1 Attach the IFU-WLM3 to the camcorder. (page 61) 2 Set the wireless LAN access mode to Wi-Fi Station mode and connect to the Internet. (page 67) When using the CBK-WA02 (option) 1 Attach the CBK-WA02 to the camcorder. (page 61) 2 Set the wireless LAN access mode to Wi-Fi Station mode and connect to the Internet. (page 67) Transmitting streaming video and audio You can transmit the video and audio captured/ played back with the camcorder via the Internet or local network. Streaming using the streaming settings on the camcorder (page 73) High-quality streaming using the Connection Control Manager (CCM) of either a Sony Network RX Station (option) or C3 Portal (page 74) 000 61 5. Network Configuration Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN The camcorder can connect to smartphones, tablets, and other devices using wireless LAN connection by attaching the IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied) or CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option). The following operations can be performed between the camcorder and devices connected using a wireless LAN. [Note] USB wireless LAN modules/adaptors other than the IFUWLM3 or CBK-WA02 cannot be used. Remote operation via wireless LAN The camcorder can be operated remotely from a smartphone, tablet, or computer that is connected using a wireless LAN. File transfer via wireless LAN Proxy files (low-resolution files) stored on the camcorder SD card and original files (highresolution files) recorded on the camcorder can be transferred to a server via a wireless LAN. ˎˎ Streaming is not supported when the video format is set to MPEG-IMX or DVCAM. ˎˎ Obstructions and electromagnetic interference between the camcorder and wireless LAN access point or terminal device, or the ambient environment (such as wall materials) could shorten the communication range or prevent connections altogether. If you experience these problems, check the connection/communication status after moving the camcorder to a new location, or bringing the camcorder and access point/terminal device closer together. “Content Browser Mobile” is an application that can operate the camcorder remotely on the device screen, while streaming content, and can be used to configure the camcorder. You can also transfer a cutout part of a file by specifying In and Out points in the proxy file (page 70). Always check that you have the latest version of the “Content Browser Mobile” application. For details about the “Content Browser Mobile” application, contact your Sony sales or service representative. [Notes] ˎˎ Proxy files (low-resolution files) recorded on the SD card in the camcorder can be streamed via a wireless LAN. 1 Open the cover of the USB wireless LAN If not using the IFU-WLM3 Unscrew the two screws, remove the guard, and close the connector cover. module connector. Guard (supplied) Attaching the CBK-WA02 1 Attach the attachment bracket to the handle Compatible Devices You can use a smartphone, tablet, or computer to configure and operate the camcorder. The supported devices, OS, and browsers are shown in the following table. in the position shown in the following diagram. For attachment of the attachment bracket (Service Part No. A-2092-367-), contact a Sony service representative. Device OS Browser Attachment bracket Smartphone Android 11/12 Chrome iOS 15.x Safari Tablet Computer Monitoring video via wireless LAN You can create a stream (H.264) of the camera picture or playback picture of the camcorder for monitoring from a device via wireless LAN using the “Content Browser Mobile” application. Attaching the IFU-WLM3 [Notes] Android 10/11 Chrome iPadOS 15.x Safari Microsoft Windows 10/11 Chrome macOS 12.x Safari ˎˎ The picture may not be depicted correctly, depending on the version of your browser. Operation with the following browser versions has been verified. Safari: 15 Chrome: 103 ˎˎ Playback may not be supported, depending on the operating system of the terminal device used and the browser version. If this occurs, use “Content Browser Mobile.” 2 Attach the protective cap to the IFU-WLM3. 3 Plug the IFU-WLM3 into the connector. 2 Attach the USB extension adaptor, supplied with the CBK-WA02 (option), to the attachment bracket. 3 Turn the fixing screw clockwise to secure the USB extension adaptor. [Note] Always turn the camcorder off before connecting or removing the IFU-WLM3. 000 62 5. Network Configuration: Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN Fixing screw Guard (supplied) 8 Set the wireless LAN channel in Maintenance >Network >Channel in the setup menu (page 117). USB extension adaptor For details about using the CBK-WA02, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the CBK-WA02. [Notes] You can adjust the position of the USB extension adaptor over the range shown in the following diagram. 6 Plug the USB connector of the USB extension adaptor into the USB wireless LAN module connector. ˎˎ Always turn the camcorder off before connecting or removing the CBK-WA02. ˎˎ Attaching the CBK-WA02 and selecting Wi-Fi Station in Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode in the setup menu enables connection to a 5 GHz access point. ˎˎ The Ch setting “Auto(5GHz)” in Wi-Fi Access Point mode may not be displayed, depending on the CBK-WA02 used. ˎˎ “Auto(5GHz)” is not displayed in the menu if use of the CBK-WA02 in the 5 GHz band is prohibited for outdoor use in your country or region. Check that the use of the CBK-WA02 is permitted in your country or region. For details, refer to the CBK-WA02 operation manual. Connecting using Wireless LAN Access Point (Wi-Fi Access Point Mode) The camcorder can connect to devices that are set up as an access point. Smartphone/ Tablet Computer If not using the CBK-WA02 Unscrew the two screws, remove the guard, and close the connector cover. Install “Content Browser Mobile” on the device to connect before starting the connection configuration. 4 Attach the protective cap (supplied) to the [Note] USB connector of the USB extension adaptor. 7 Plug the CBK-WA02 into the USB connector of the USB extension adaptor. 5 Open the cover of the USB wireless LAN module connector. The default Wi-Fi Access Point password should not be used as-is. Use a password generated using the following procedure. 1 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On. 2 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode to Wi-Fi Access Point. 3 Execute Maintenance >Network >Regenerate Password. 000 63 5. Network Configuration: Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN One-touch connection using NFC-equipped devices 5 Touch the device against the camcorder. The device connects to the camcorder, and “Content Browser Mobile” launches. Devices that support NFC can be connected by one touch using NFC. 5 Open the device Network Settings or Wi-Fi Settings, and turn Wi-Fi on. 6 Select the camcorder SSID from the Wi-Fi network SSID list, display Option, and select WPS Push Button. 1 Select [Settings] on the device and enable the [NFC] function. [Note] The steps will vary depending on the device used. Connecting using SSID and password on the device 2 Turn the camcorder on, and set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On. 3 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode to Wi-Fi Access Point. 4 Activate the NFC function. Set NFC connection mode by executing Maintenance >Network >NFC in the setup menu or by pressing and holding an assignable switch that has been assigned with the NFC function for three seconds. The NFC function can be used only when is displayed on the screen. [Note] It may take some time (30 seconds to 90 seconds) for to appear on the screen. Wait until the network “AP” (access point) wireless network indicator (page 18) stops flashing on the viewfinder screen. [Notes] ˎˎ Wake a sleeping device and unlock the lock screen beforehand. ˎˎ Continue to hold the device against the camcorder without moving it until “Content Browser Mobile” launches (1 to 2 seconds). ˎˎ If a device with identical SSID has already been registered, the device may not be able to be connected, depending on the OS version of the device. In this case, you can connect the device by deleting the registered SSID from the device. Connecting using WPS-equipped devices Devices that support WPS can be connected using WPS. 1 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On. 2 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode to Wi-Fi Access Point. [Note] It may take some time (30 seconds to 90 seconds) to enable access point mode. Wait until the network “AP” (access point) indicator (page 18) stops flashing on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. 3 Select Maintenance >Network >WPS in the setup menu. 4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. Connect by entering the SSID and password on the device. 1 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On. 2 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode to Connecting Using Wireless LAN Station Mode (Wi-Fi Station Mode) The camcorder can connect to an existing wireless LAN access point as a client. The device connects via the access point. The connection can be established using the setup menu or the web menu. This section describes the method using the WPS function in the setup menu. For details about connecting using the web menu, see “Connecting to an access point in station mode without using WPS” (page 79). For details about connecting using the network auto detection function or by manual entry, see “Connecting to an Access Point using the Setup Menu” (page 67). Wi-Fi Access Point. [Note] It may take some time (30 seconds to 90 seconds) to enable access point mode. Wait until the network “AP” (access point) indicator (page 18) stops flashing on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. Smartphone/ Tablet Computer 3 Open the device Network Settings or Wi-Fi Settings, and turn Wi-Fi on. 4 Select the camcorder SSID from the Wi-Fi network SSID list, then enter a password to connect. For the camcorder SSID and password, see Maintenance >Network >SSID & Password (page 117) in the setup menu. [Note] The steps will vary depending on the device used. Access point 000 64 5. Network Configuration: Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN Connecting to an access point using WPS If an access point supports the WPS function, you can connect using a basic setting. 1 Turn the access point on. 2 Turn the camcorder on. 3 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On. 4 Set Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode to Wi-Fi Station. [Note] It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) to enable station mode. Wait until the network indicator (page 18) signal strength icon stops flashing on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. 5 Select Maintenance >Network >WPS in the setup menu. 6 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. 7 Press the access point WPS button. For details about WPS button operation, refer to the instruction manual for the access point. When the connection is successful, the network indicator (page 18) signal strength icon will show a strength of 1 or higher on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. [Note] If the connection fails, perform the procedure again from step 1. 8 Connect the device to the access point. For details about how to connect, refer to the instruction manual for each device. 000 65 5. Network Configuration Connecting to the Internet You can connect to the Internet using a wired LAN or wireless LAN. For wired LAN, connect a LAN cable (not supplied) to the network connector on the camcorder, and connect to the Internet via a router. For wireless LAN, connect to the Internet using the IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied), CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option), or modem (option). For details, see “Limitations on Simultaneous Use of Network Functions” (page 82). Required device for network connection You can connect to the Internet using a wired LAN connection via a router connected to the network connector on the camcorder. Wireless LAN connection One of the following devices is required. ˎˎIFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied) ˎˎCBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option) + CBK-NA1E USB Extension Adaptor supplied with the CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor Kit (option) ˎˎModem (option) + CBK-NA1E USB Extension Adaptor supplied with the CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor Kit (option) [Notes] ˎˎ For safety, do not connect the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage to this port. Follow the instructions for this port. ˎˎ When you connect the LAN cable of the unit to peripheral device, use a shielded-type cable to prevent malfunction due to radiation noise. Computer [Notes] The camcorder can connect to a network using wireless LAN or wired LAN methods. However, there are limits on the simultaneous use of these connection functions. 2 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On. 3 Set Maintenance >Network >Wired LAN to Enable. An IP address is automatically assigned to the camcorder. [Notes] Wired LAN connection Limitations on simultaneous use of network connection function camcorder and a router using a LAN cable. Connecting Using a LAN Cable (Wired LAN Connection) ˎˎLAN cable (not supplied) ˎˎ The wireless LAN module may not be available in some countries/regions. ˎˎ The frequency band for the wireless LAN module is shared by various devices. Depending on the use environment, transmission speed and distance may be decreased, or communication may be disconnected, by using other devices. ˎˎ To use the 3G/4G/LTE services, you need to contract with a cell phone company. ˎˎ For details about the required compatible device for the network connection, contact your Sony dealer or a Sony service representative. 1 Connect the network connector of the Router Internet ˎˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) for the wired LAN connection to become enabled. Wait until the network status indicator (page 18) LAN icon stops flashing on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. ˎˎ To transfer original files/proxy files recorded on the camcorder, use Wi-Fi remote control, operate the web menu, or monitor output using the “Content Browser Mobile” application, set Maintenance >Network >Wired LAN Remote in the setup menu to On (page 118). ˎˎ When connected to a network, using a LAN cable, that will not be used to connect to the Internet, it is recommended that Wired LAN Remote be set to On to prevent unauthorized access from the Internet. When connecting to the Internet, check that the network connection is to a secure network before use. ˎˎ A wired LAN connection is not possible if a modem (option) is attached to the USB wireless LAN module connector. For wired LAN connection, first remove the modem (option). ˎˎ When connected to the Internet using Wi-Fi Station mode and the wired LAN is not connected to the Internet, a network error may occur and Internet-related functions may not operate. In this case, set Wired LAN to Disable, and connect to the Internet using Wi-Fi Station mode only. Preparation for Connection to the Internet Using a Modem You can connect the camcorder to the Internet via a 3G/4G network by connecting an optional modem to the unit. You can connect the CBK-NA1E USB Extension Adaptor, supplied with the CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor Kit (option), to the USB wireless LAN module connector on the camcorder in preparation for connection using the following procedure. You can also connect to the Internet using a smartphone network by attaching a USB cable to the USB wireless LAN module connector of the unit and connecting a smartphone. 1 Attach the attachment bracket to the handle in the position shown in the following diagram. For attachment of the attachment bracket (Service Part No. A-2092-367-), contact a Sony service representative. Attachment bracket 2 Attach the USB extension adaptor to the attachment bracket. 000 66 5. Network Configuration: Connecting to the Internet 3 Turn the fixing screw clockwise to secure the USB extension adaptor. Fixing screw 5 Open the cover of the USB wireless LAN module connector. Guard (supplied) USB extension adaptor Connecting Using a Modem You can connect the camcorder to the Internet via a 3G/4G network by attaching a modem (option) to the camcorder using a CBK-NA1 Network Adaptor Kit (option). Internet You can adjust the position of the USB extension adaptor over the range shown in the following diagram. 6 Plug the USB connector of the USB extension CBK-NA1 + Modem adaptor into the USB wireless LAN module connector. Connecting 1 Connect the modem (option) to the USB connector of the CBK-NA1E USB extension adaptor. ˎˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) to enable modem mode. Wait until the 3G/4G modem settings/ connection status indicator (page 17) stops flashing on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder. Connecting Using the Network Setup Assist Tool Using the network setup assist tool, you can create a QR code with the information required to access the camcorder via a C3 Portal connection. Loading the created QR code onto a smartphone allows you to quickly connect to the camcorder via C3 Portal connection. To use this function, first install the C3 Portal dedicated app on your smartphone using the following procedure. 1 Plug the USB cable connected to a smartphone into the USB wireless LAN module connector. 2 Turn the camcorder on. 3 Select Maintenance >Setup for Mobile App >Setup in the menu. A screen appears showing the settings that will be changed automatically to enable connection with C3 Portal. 4 Attach the protective cap (supplied) to the USB connector of the USB extension adaptor. [Note] For details about connecting a modem, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the modem. 2 Set Maintenance >Network >Setting to On. 3 Set Maintenance >Network >Modem to On. [Notes] ˎˎ Always turn the camcorder off before connecting or removing the CBK-NA1 and modem. Setup cannot be executed when both Maintenance >Network Client Mode is set to On in the menu and streaming is in progress. 000 67 5. Network Configuration: Connecting to the Internet 4 Check the settings and select OK. The configuration starts. A “Processing” message appears while configuration is in progress. When the configuration is completed, the required information and a QR code for accessing the unit is displayed. Connecting Using Wireless LAN Station Mode (Wi-Fi Station Mode) You can connect to the Internet using Wi-Fi station mode by attaching the IFU-WLM3 USB Wireless LAN Module (supplied) or CBK-WA02 Wireless LAN Adaptor (option) to the camcorder, and using a 3G/4G/LTE-compatible access point (option) or using device tethering. For details about attaching devices, see “Attaching the IFU-WLM3” (page 61) and “Attaching the CBK-WA02” (page 61). Smartphone/ Tablet First, turn the access point and device on, and configure the device tethering function if planning to use tethering. Computer Connecting to an Access Point using the Setup Menu Access point Internet [Notes] ˎˎ Take care that the password cannot be viewed and the QR code image cannot be copied by others. ˎˎ The QR code screen appears on the LCD monitor, but it is not displayed when the LCD monitor is set to “Video without superimposed information (MONI)” or “Status display (STATUS)” mode. Switch to “Video with superimposed information (CHAR)” mode using the DISP SEL button (page 8). 5 Launch the C3 Portal dedicated app installed Connection using network auto detection function 1 Perform steps 1 to 4 in “Connecting to an access point using WPS” (page 64). 2 Select Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Station Smartphone/ Tablet Internet on your smartphone, and scan the QR code using the camera of the smartphone. For details about using the dedicated app, refer to the dedicated app Help Guide. Detail Settings >Scan Networks in the setup menu, then select [Execute]. The camcorder starts detection of connection destinations. Detected destinations for connection are displayed in the Scan Networks result list. [Note] The required information for accessing the camcorder is loaded into the smartphone. For details about the dedicated app, visit the C3 Portal site. https://www.c3p.sony.net You can connect to an access point using the setup menu. The connection can be established using the network auto detection function or by manual entry. Close the list display first if you want to turn the camcorder off. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination to Connecting Using a Device If the access point and device supports WPS, connect using the procedure in “Connecting to an access point using WPS” (page 64). If WPS is not supported, connect using the procedure in “Connecting to an access point in station mode without using WPS” (page 79). which to connect, then press the knob. When the connection is established, the Password input screen appears. 4 Set the password on the Password input screen. After setting the password, the display returns to the Wi-Fi Station Detail Settings screen. If information about a previous connected destination is stored in the device history, 000 68 5. Network Configuration: Connecting to the Internet selecting the SSID for that destination displays the Wi-Fi Station Detail Settings screen. 5 Configure the following connection settings on the Wi-Fi Station Detail Settings screen. Item Description DHCP Enables/disables DHCP. When set to On, an IP address is automatically assigned to the camcorder. To enter the camcorder IP address manually, set to Off. IP Address Subnet mask Gateway Enter the IP address of the camcorder. Enabled only when DHCP is [Off]. Enter the subnet mask of the camcorder. Enabled only when DHCP is [Off]. Enter the gateway for the access point. Enabled only when DHCP is [Off]. DNS Auto Obtains DNS address automatically. When set to On, the address of the DNS server is obtained automatically. Primary DNS Server Enter the primary DNS server for the access point. Enabled only when DNS Auto is [Off]. Secondary DNS Server Enter the secondary DNS server for the access point. Enabled only when DNS Auto is [Off]. 6 When finished, select Set >Execute to apply the settings. [Notes] ˎˎ If the connection settings are changed, always select Set >Execute. If Execute is not selected, the configured settings are not applied. ˎˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) to enable station mode. Wait until the network indicator (page 18) signal strength icon stops flashing on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. ˎˎ The connection station setup information is stored in the history. The history can be cleared using ALL Reset and Network Reset. Connection by manual entry 1 Perform steps 1 to 4 in “Connecting to an access point using WPS” (page 64). 2 Configure the following connection settings Item Description Gateway Enter the gateway for the access point. Enabled only when DHCP is [Off]. DNS Auto Obtains DNS address automatically. When set to On, the address of the DNS server is obtained automatically. Primary DNS Server Enter the primary DNS server for the access point. Enabled only when DNS Auto is [Off]. Secondary DNS Server Enter the secondary DNS server for the access point. Enabled only when DNS Auto is [Off]. using Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Station Detail Settings in the setup menu. Item Description SSID Enter the SSID for the destination to which to connect. Password Enter the password for the access point to connect. The entered password is displayed using asterisks. The entered characters are visible while the SHIFT key is pressed. DHCP Enables/disables DHCP. When set to On, an IP address is automatically assigned to the camcorder. To enter the camcorder IP address manually, set to Off. IP Address Enter the IP address of the camcorder. Enabled only when DHCP is [Off]. Subnet mask Enter the subnet mask of the camcorder. Enabled only when DHCP is [Off]. 3 When finished, select Set >Execute to apply the settings. [Notes] ˎˎ If the connection settings are changed, always select Set >Execute. If Execute is not selected, the configured settings are not applied. ˎˎ It may take some time (30 seconds to 1 minute) to enable station mode. Wait until the network indicator (page 18) signal strength icon stops flashing on the LCD monitor or in the viewfinder. 000 69 5. Network Configuration Transferring Files You can transfer proxy files recorded on an SD card and original files recorded on SxS memory cards to a server on the Internet when connected to the Internet via a 3G/4G/LTE network, access point, or wired LAN router. Transferring Proxy Files using the Thumbnail Screen 2 Select OK. Setting a Transfer Destination 1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet using the procedures in “Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN” (page 61) and “Connecting to the Internet” (page 65). 2 You must first register a server to which you want to transfer files. For details about registering a server, see “To register a destination server” (page 80). Configuring the Transfer Destination Using the Dedicated App (smartphone connection) You can send the settings required for file transfer from a smartphone to the camcorder when connected to C3 Portal using a smartphone (page 66). 1 Send the file transfer information to the camcorder using the dedicated app on a smartphone. For details about using the dedicated app, refer to the dedicated app Help Guide. If the camcorder receives the file transfer information successfully, the following message appears. The setup information starts loading. When the setup is loaded successfully, a “Network File loaded.” message appears. Items configured automatically For items configured automatically, see “To register a destination server” (page 80). [Note] Service, Show Password, and Load Certification are not included in the items that are configured automatically. For details about the dedicated app, visit the C3 Portal site. https://www.c3p.sony.net Transferring Proxy Files using the Web Menu You can upload proxy files recorded on an SD card to a server using the web menu. 1 Connect the camcorder and device using a Using “Content Browser Mobile” application version 2.0 or later, you can quickly display a thumbnail for a proxy file on an SD card by using the still image of the first frame. 4 Select the files you want to transfer. Tap a file to select it. Tap a file a second time to de-select it. You can double-tap a file to play the file to check its content. 5 Tap [Transfer]. The default destination server specified in [Default Setting] appears (see “To register a destination server” (page 80)). To change the destination server, tap the destination server to display a list and then select a different server. Enter the directory on the destination server, as required. You can select a transfer destination using Maintenance >File Transfer >Default Upload Server in the setup menu. LAN connection, then launch a browser on the device to access the camcorder. 2 Display a file list screen to select files. 3 Tap and select [Media Info], then tap [SD Card]. The SD Card screen appears. You can upload proxy files recorded on an SD card to a server using the thumbnail screen of the camcorder. Transferring a specific proxy file 1 Select a transfer destination previously registered in the web menu. You can select a transfer destination using the web menu or using Maintenance >File Transfer >Default Upload Server in the setup menu. 2 Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail screen. 3 Select Thumbnail >Transfer Clip(Proxy) >Select Clip in the setup menu. A transfer file selection screen appears. 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the cursor to a file (clip) to be transferred, then press the knob. A check mark is attached to the selected clip. To clear the check mark from a selected clip, press the MENU knob again. 5 Press and hold the SHIFT button, and press the 6 Tap [Transfer]. Transfer of the selected files begins. To cancel file transfer, tap [Cancel]. SET button. A confirmation screen appears. 6 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the confirmation message screen, then press the knob. The selected file is registered in the job list, and a registration completed message appears. 000 70 5. Network Configuration: Transferring Files Transferring all proxy files planning metadata file. You can transfer all proxy files recorded on an SD card at the same time. Transferring parts of proxy files [Notes] ˎˎ Proxy files for which there are no original files cannot be selected for transfer on the thumbnail screen. ˎˎ Proxy files that are not displayed on the transfer file selection screen cannot be transferred. 1 Select Thumbnail >Transfer Clip(Proxy) >All Clips in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. A confirmation screen appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. All files are registered in the job list, and a registration completed message appears. The file transfer starts transferring files in the order the files were registered in the job list. You can check the registered files by displaying the transfer job list using Maintenance >File Transfer >View Job List in the setup menu. Transferring automatically when recording finishes If Maintenance >File Transfer >Auto Upload(Proxy) in the setup menu is set to On beforehand, the file is automatically uploaded to the specified server when proxy recording finishes. If a proxy file with an identical duration as the original file, inheriting the information from the original file, is recorded based on planning metadata, a folder is created on the transfer destination with a name defined by the content of the <Title> tag of the planning metadata file, and the proxy file is transferred to that folder. When transferring, the ID of the recording media is automatically appended to the file name of the Using “Content Browser Mobile” application version 2.0 or later, you can specify In/Out points in proxy files to cut out and transfer the cutout parts. You can also transfer the cutout portions of multiple files using the Storyboard. [Notes] ˎˎ Margins of up to 15 frames are added before and after the cutout region in the created file. ˎˎ Files created from cutouts from proxy files recorded using network function software (V1.25 or earlier) may not be imported into non-linear editors. ˎˎ When partial transfer is performed using the Storyboard, the file for sending Storyboard information to a non-linear editor is displayed in the Job List. ˎˎ When transferring, a General/Sony/tmp folder is created automatically on the SD card. The file is temporarily stored in this folder, and is automatically deleted after the file transfer is completed. ˎˎ Files cannot be transferred under the following conditions. –– When Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode is set to Wi-Fi Access Point, and Wired LAN is set to Disable in the setup menu –– When the streaming function is enabled (Maintenance >Streaming >Setting is set to On) –– When network client mode is enabled and highquality streaming is in progress (streaming when Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Setting is set to On) Transferring Original Files using the Web Menu You can upload original files recorded on an SxS memory card to a server using the web menu. 1 Connect the camcorder and device using a LAN connection, then launch a browser on the device to connect to the camcorder “Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN” (page 61). 7 Tap [Transfer]. The default destination server specified in [Default Setting] appears (see “To register a destination server” (page 80)). To change the destination server, tap the destination server to display a list and then select a different server. Enter the directory on the destination server in [Directory]. You can select a transfer destination using Maintenance >File Transfer >Default Upload Server in the setup menu. 2 Select Maintenance >File Transfer >File Transfer in the setup menu. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. Original file transfer mode is initiated. 4 Display a file list screen to select files in the browser on the device. 5 Tap and select [Media Info], then tap Slot A (for files recorded on media in slot A) or Slot B (for files recorded on media in slot B). The Slot A or Slot B screen appears. Example: Slot A screen 6 Select the files you want to transfer. Tap a file to select it. Tap a file a second time to de-select it. 8 Tap [Transfer]. Transfer of the selected files begins. To cancel file transfer, tap [Cancel]. When the transfer of all files is completed, transfer mode is automatically released, and the display returns to the camera shooting screen. 000 71 5. Network Configuration: Transferring Files Transferring Original Files using the Thumbnail Screen You can upload original files recorded on an SxS memory card to a server using the thumbnail screen. Transferring an original file 1 Select a transfer destination previously registered in the web menu. You can select a transfer destination using the web menu or using Maintenance >File Transfer >Default Upload Server in the setup menu. 2 Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail screen. 3 Select Thumbnail >Transfer Clip >Select Clip in the setup menu. A transfer file selection screen appears. 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the cursor to a file (clip) to be transferred, then press the knob. A check mark is attached to the selected clip. To clear the check mark from a selected clip, press the MENU knob again. 5 Press and hold the SHIFT button, and press the SET button. A confirmation screen appears. 6 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the confirmation message screen, then press the knob. The selected file is registered in the job list, and a registration completed message appears. Transferring all original files You can transfer all original files recorded on an SxS memory card at the same time. 1 Select Thumbnail >Transfer Clip >All Clips in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. A confirmation screen appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. All files are registered in the job list, and a registration completed message appears. The file transfer starts transferring files in the order the files were registered in the job list. You can check the registered files by displaying the transfer job list using Maintenance >File Transfer >View Job List in the setup menu. out and transfer the cutout parts. You can also transfer the cutout portions of multiple files using the Storyboard. The following formats of original files are supported. ˎˎXAVC-I ˎˎXAVC-L ˎˎHD422 (exFAT/UDF) ˎˎHD420HQ (exFAT/UDF) [Note] To transfer a part of an original file using “Content Browser Mobile,” a proxy file with the same file name as the original file is required. Enable the creation of proxy files before you start to record. The relevant settings are shown below. ˎˎ Set Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Setting in the setup menu to On. ˎˎ When network client mode is enabled, set Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the setup menu to Enable. Checking the Status of File Transfer Monitoring using the web menu Tap [Job List] on the SD Card, Slot A, or Slot B screen to display the Job List screen to check the status of the file transfer (page 81). Monitoring using the setup menu Select Maintenance >File Transfer >View Job List in the setup menu to display the Job List screen. You can check the status of file transfer on the Job List screen. If Maintenance >File Transfer >Remote File Transfer in the setup menu is set to Enable beforehand, original file transfer mode is initiated automatically without having to set file transfer mode. Item Description Src. Transfer clip source media indicator A: Slot A media B: Slot B media P: PROXY SD card slot media [Note] Clip Name Name of transfer clip Destination Transfer clip destination server Files cannot be transferred under the following conditions. ˎˎ During recording, playback, or when displaying the thumbnail screen ˎˎ When both Maintenance >Network >Wireless Network is set to Wi-Fi Access Point and Wired LAN >Disable is set to Disable in the setup menu. ˎˎ When the streaming function is enabled (Maintenance >Streaming >Setting is set to On) ˎˎ When network client mode is enabled and high-quality streaming is in progress (streaming when Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Setting is set to On) Transferring parts of original files Using “Content Browser Mobile” application version 2.0 or later, you can specify In/Out points in original files recorded by the camcorder to cut 000 72 5. Network Configuration: Transferring Files Item Description Status Transfer status Completed: Transfer completed Transferring: Transfer in progress Aborted: Transfer aborted Waiting: Transfer pending Server Cap. Over: Transfer destination server capacity exceeded (“E03-006” displayed in Job List (page 81) in the web menu) Upload Error: Transfer destination server upload error (“E03-003” displayed in Job List (page 81) in the web menu) Dest. Auth. Failed: Transfer destination server authentication error (“E03-005” displayed in Job List (page 81) in the web menu) Dest. Cert. Err.: Transfer destination certificate error (“E03-008” displayed in Job List (page 81) in the web menu) Deleting Transfer Files on the Job List Screen of the Camcorder You can select and delete any registered transfer files on the Job List screen. [Note] Delete files one at a time. Multiple files cannot be deleted simultaneously. 1 On the Job List screen, turn the MENU knob to move the cursor to a file you want to delete. 2 Press the MENU knob. A confirmation message appears, asking if you want to delete. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. A deletion completion message appears. Deleting all registered transfer files Tap [Clear All jobs] on the Job List screen. Deleting all completed transfer jobs Tap [Clear Completed jobs] on the Job List screen. 000 73 5. Network Configuration Transmitting Streaming Video and Audio You can transmit the video and audio captured/ played back with the camcorder via the Internet or local network. Preparation for Streaming Transmission 1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet using the procedures in “Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN” (page 61) and “Connecting to the Internet” (page 65). 2 Select Preset1 (or Preset2, Preset3) in Maintenance >Streaming in the setup menu. The streaming connection destination setup screen appears. 3 Set Size, Bit Rate, Type, and items according to Type on the screen. For details and limitations about settings, see “Streaming Settings” (page 78). 4 Select Preset1 (or Preset2, Preset3), set in steps 1 and 2, in Maintenance >Streaming >Preset Select in the setup menu. Starting Streaming 1 Set Maintenance >Streaming >Setting in the setup menu to On. Streaming starts according to the settings. You can assign Streaming to an assignable switch. For details about assignment, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches” (page 124). [Notes] ˎˎ Streaming cannot be started under the following menu settings. –– When Maintenance >Network >Setting in the setup menu is set to Off –– When Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Setting in the setup menu is set to On –– When Maintenance >Network >Setting in the setup menu is set to On, but Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode is set to Off and Maintenance >Network >Wired LAN is set to Disable ˎˎ It may take several tens of seconds to stream actual video or audio after starting streaming. ˎˎ You cannot start streaming when playing back an SD format clip. ˎˎ If you set the streaming transmission destination is set incorrectly or the camcorder does not connect to the network, “×” appears on the screen as the streaming status indicator. ˎˎ Streaming in network client mode (page 74), monitoring, proxy recording, and file transfer are not available after switching to streaming mode. ˎˎ Starting streaming while monitoring, proxy recording, or transferring files will stop the corresponding function. Stopping Streaming Set Maintenance >Streaming >Setting to Off to stop streaming. When Streaming is On, streaming can also be stopped by pressing the assignable switch to which Streaming has been assigned. When the camcorder is connected to a device via Wireless LAN (page 61) or is connected to the Internet using wireless LAN station mode (page 63), you can also set the streaming transmission destination and start/stop streaming from the web menu (page 77). 000 74 5. Network Configuration Streaming High Quality Video High-quality streaming using Sony QoS technology is supported by enabling network client mode and connecting to the Connection Control Manager (CCM) of either a Sony Network RX Station (option) or C3 Portal. Higher quality, stable streaming can be achieved using multiple networks. Item Description CCM Port Enter the port number of the CCM to connect. User Name Enter the user name. Password Enter the password. The entered password is displayed using asterisks. The entered characters are visible while the SHIFT key is pressed. [Notes] ˎˎ Use V1.18.2 or later for the Network RX Station. ˎˎ To stream stably using multiple networks, use a different carrier line for each network. ˎˎ When using multiple networks, the target bit rate may be exceeded depending on the scene being shot. ˎˎ C3 Portal is a cloud service that is provided by Sony. To use this service, registration is required. C3 Portal is not provided in some regions. For details on areas where the service is provided, refer to the following site. https://www.c3p.sony.net In addition, refer to the following sites for the privacy policy of C3 Portal. –– Terms of service https://www.c3p.sony.net/site/tos_eu.html –– C3 Portal privacy policy https://www.c3p.sony.net/site/c3p_privacy_policy. html –– Professional ID privacy policy https://www.pro-id.sony.net/#/privacyPolicy ˎˎ For more details, contact a Sony professional sales representative. 1 Connect the camcorder to the network. For details, see “Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN” (page 61) and “Connecting to the Internet” (page 65). 2 Configure the network settings of the destination to which to connect in Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 in the setup menu. You can save network settings of a destination to which to connect as a preset in Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3. Item Description CCM Address Enter the IP address of the CCM to connect. (Host name or IP address) NCM with Proxy Enable/disable proxy recording when connected with a CCM. Camera Control Enable/disable camera control when a CCM is connected. Camera Setting Enable/disable ALL file handling when a CCM is connected. [Notes] ˎˎ Network client mode cannot be set if values are not entered for all items. ˎˎ Setting Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the setup menu to Enable enables proxy recording, even when network client mode is enabled. To enable the NCM with Proxy setting, set Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Setting in the setup menu to On. ˎˎ If Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the setup menu is set to Disable, proxy recording stops if network client mode is set to On during recording. If original file recording is continuing, set both to Off to restart proxy recording. ˎˎ If Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Proxy File >Size in the setup menu is set to HD Auto(9Mbps) or HD Auto(6Mbps), NCM with Proxy cannot be enabled. If HD Auto(9Mbps) or HD Auto(6Mbps) is set after NCM with Proxy is set to Enable, the setting is maintained, but proxy recording is not performed. 3 Select one of the presets, set in step 1, in Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset Select in the setup menu. 4 Set Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Setting in the setup menu to On. Network client mode is enabled, and the camcorder connects to the Network RX Station or C3 Portal. Live streaming starts in response to Network RX Station operation. An ALL file can also be saved/loaded using remote control of the unit by the Network RX Station. For details about operation, refer to the instruction manual for the Network RX Station or the Help Guide for C3 Portal. You can assign Setting (On/Off) for Network Client Mode to an assignable switch. For details about assignment, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches” (page 124). [Notes] ˎˎ Changing to network client mode during normal streaming (page 73) is not possible. ˎˎ After changing to network client mode, normal streaming (page 73) and monitoring are not available. ˎˎ Changing to network client mode while monitoring will stop the monitoring. ˎˎ File transfer is not supported during streaming in network client mode. File transfer is supported after stopping streaming. ˎˎ If streaming in network client mode is started during file transfer, the file transfer stops. File transfer restarts after stopping streaming. ˎˎ The available streaming bit rates that can be configured by the Network RX Station are limited to the following, depending on the proxy recording format. –– If the proxy recording format is 1280×720 9Mbps/6Mbps, the streaming bit rate is set to 1 Mbps or lower. –– If the proxy recording format is 640×360 3Mbps, the streaming bit rate is set to 3 Mbps or lower. ˎˎ The proxy format cannot be changed in network client mode. To change the format, first set Network Client Mode to Off. ˎˎ Network client mode cannot be set to On when Maintenance >Network >Modem Remote is set to On in the menu. Transferring files in network client mode You can transfer files to a server set by a CCM by connecting the camcorder in network client mode to the CCM of either a Network RX Station or C3 Portal. 1 Select the files you want to transfer. ˎˎTo transfer a proxy recording: Follow steps 1 to 5 in “Transferring Proxy Files using the Web Menu” (page 69). ˎˎTo transfer original files: Follow steps 1 to 6 in “Transferring Original Files using the Web Menu” (page 70). 2 Tap [Transfer]. “NCM: RX Server” is displayed as a destination. Specify “NCM: RX Server” as the destination. 3 Tap [Transfer]. Transfer of the selected files to the server specified on the CCM starts. [Note] The destination can also be set to “NCM: RX Server” when not in network client mode. In this case, transfer is placed on hold, and then transfer to the server specified on the CCM starts after connecting to the CCM in network client mode. 000 75 5. Network Configuration Using Wi-Fi Remote Control You can access the Wi-Fi remote control built into the camcorder from a smartphone, tablet, or other device over a wireless LAN connection. Using the Wi-Fi remote control allows you to operate the camcorder remotely. This allows you to start/stop recording or configure settings remotely, and is useful in applications where the camcorder is fixed in a remote location or mounted on a crane, for example. Displaying the Wi-Fi Remote Control The Wi-Fi Remote screen is automatically resized to match the screen size of the connected device. using [Cam Remote Control] (page 77) from the web menu. Wi-Fi Remote Screen (Smartphones) [Notes] ˎˎ To display the page for a smartphone, change “rm. html” to “rms.html” in the URL. To display the page for a tablet, change “rm.html” to “rmt.html” in the URL. When “rm.html” is entered, the page automatically switches for display on the corresponding device. However, the appropriate page may not be displayed, depending on the device. ˎˎ The Wi-Fi Remote screen may not match the camcorder settings under the following circumstances. If this occurs, reload the browser window. –– If the camcorder is restarted while connected –– If the camcorder is operated directly while connected –– If the device has been reconnected –– If the browser Forward/Back buttons have been used ˎˎ The Wi-Fi remote control may not function if the wireless signal strength becomes weak. ˎˎ Status display ˎˎ Shooting settings Iris, Focus, Zoom, S&Q FPS, Shutter, White, Gamma, Auto Iris, Gain, ATW, Color Bars, Auto Black, Auto White Assign screen the procedures in “Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN” (page 61) and “Connecting to the Internet” (page 65). ˎˎ Status display ˎˎ Assignable switches Assignable switch 0, 1, 3, 4, 5 2 Launch a browser on the device and enter 3 Enter the user name and password (Maintenance >Access Authentication (page 116) in the setup menu) on the browser screen. When connection is successful, the Wi-Fi Remote screen appears on the device. You use the Wi-Fi Remote screen to operate the camcorder. You can disable the REC button operation by sliding the Lock knob to the right on the screen. You can also display the Wi-Fi remote control ˎˎ Status indicators ˎˎ Cursor control buttons, menu/ status display Up, Left, Set, Right, Down, Cancel/Back, Menu, Status, Thumbnail, Option (SHIFT + SET) Main screen 1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet using “http://<IP_address>/rm.html” in the URL bar, where “<IP_address>” is the IP address (Maintenance >Network >IP Address (Wireless) in the setup menu) of the camcorder. For example, if the IP address is 192.168.1.1, enter “http://192.168.1.1/rm.html” in the URL bar. Cursor screen Playback screen ˎˎ Status display ˎˎ Playback control buttons F Rev, Play/Pause, F Fwd, Prev, Stop, Next 000 76 5. Network Configuration: Using Wi-Fi Remote Control Wi-Fi Remote Screen (Tablets) Cursor screen Main screen ˎˎ Status display ˎˎ Cursor control buttons, menu/status display Up, Left, Set, Right, Down, Cancel/Back, Menu, Status, Thumbnail, Option (SHIFT + SET) Assign screen ˎˎ Status display ˎˎ Assignable switches Assignable switch 0, 1, 3, 4, 5 ˎˎ Shooting settings S&Q FPS, Shutter, White, Gamma, Auto Iris, Gain, ATW, Color Bars, Auto Black, Auto White Playback screen ˎˎ Assignable switches Assignable switch 0, 1, 3, 4, 5 ˎˎ Status display ˎˎ Playback control buttons F Rev, Play/Pause, F Fwd, Prev, Stop, Next 000 77 5. Network Configuration Configuring from the Web Menu The web menu of the camcorder appears when the camcorder is accessed from a browser on a device connected using a wireless LAN connection. Using the web menu, you can configure settings related to wireless functions, transfer files, and perform other actions. Displaying the Web Menu 1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet using the procedures in “Connecting Devices using Wireless LAN” (page 61) and “Connecting to the Internet” (page 65). 2 Launch a browser on the device and enter “http://192.168.1.1:8080/index.html” in the URL bar. The user name and password entry screen appears. 3 Enter a user name and password, then select [OK]. For the user name and password for access authentication, see Maintenance >Access Authentication (page 116) in the setup menu. Setup Menu Launch a browser on the device and enter “http://<IP_address>:8080” in the URL bar, where “<IP_address>” is the IP address (Maintenance >Network >IP Address in the setup menu) of the camcorder, to display the Media Info >SD Card screen of the camcorder. Tapping in the top left of the web menu screen will display the configuration menus. Tap the item you want to configure. The menu has the following items: Settings, Media Info, Job List, and Cam Remote Control. Settings Used to configure the camcorder. This screen has the following items. Item Description See Wireless Module >Streaming Format Streaming format settings Streaming Format Settings (page 77) Wireless Module >Proxy Format Proxy format settings Proxy Format Settings (page 78) Wireless Module >System Settings Load Network System Settings (page 78) Client Mode Settings certificate (execute using Load button of Load Certification) Wireless LAN Wireless LAN settings >Station Settings Wireless LAN Station Settings (page 79) Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Checking wireless >Status settings status LAN settings (page 79) Wired LAN >Wired LAN Settings Wired LAN settings Wired LAN Settings (page 79) Wired LAN >Status Wired LAN Checking wired LAN settings status settings (page 80) Upload Settings Transfer settings Transfer (Upload) Settings (page 80) Media Info Video Displays media information and is used to select files to transfer from media. ˎˎSD Card: Media inserted into the PROXY SD card slot of the camcorder. Double-clicking a file will start playback of the selected file. ˎˎAVC/H.264 Main Profile, 4:2:0 Long GOP ˎˎSize is selected in the following settings. [Note] Playback may not be supported, depending on the operating system of the terminal device used and the browser version. If this occurs, use “Content Browser Mobile.” Audio ˎˎAAC-LC compression ˎˎSampling frequency: 48 kHz ˎˎBit rate: 128 kbps for stereo ˎˎSlot A: Media inserted into card slot A of the camcorder ˎˎSlot B: Media inserted into card slot B of the camcorder Job List Displays the Job List screen for managing file transfers (page 81). Cam Remote Control Displays the Wi-Fi remote control screen (page 75). OSS Information Displays copyright information. Streaming Format Settings You can configure the stream for monitoring by devices, and set the format and transmission destination of the stream for streaming via the Internet or local network. Monitoring Settings You can set the format for monitoring by devices. Item Description Monitoring Size Sets the video size 480×270(1Mbps)/ and bit rate for 480×270(0.5Mbps) monitoring. Monitoring Frame Rate Displays the video 23.98fps/25fps/ frame rate for 29.97fps/50fps/ monitoring. 59.94fps Monitoring Bit Rate Displays the video 1Mbps(VBR)/ 0.5Mbps(VBR) bit rate for monitoring. [Notes] Setting ˎˎ The bit rate is an average value, so this value may be exceeded at times. ˎˎ A video frame rate of 24 fps is not supported. ˎˎ 640×360 (3Mbps (VBR)) is not supported for Monitoring Size. 000 78 5. Network Configuration: Configuring from the Web Menu Streaming Settings You can set the format and transmission destination for streaming. Up to three settings can be preset. Item Description Setting On/Off Switches streaming On/Off transmission on/off. Preset Selects the preset from Preset 1 to Preset 3. You can edit Preset by tapping Edit. Preset1/Preset2/ Preset3 Type Selects the type of MPEG-2 TS/UDP/ video for streaming. MPEG-2 TS/ RTP Size HD Auto/ Sets the size of video for streaming. 1280×720/ 640×360/ When HD Auto is selected, the size is 480×270/ set to 1920×1080 or 320×180 1280×720, according to the setting of the recording format recorded on the SxS memory card or the format of the clip to be played back. Bit Rate Sets the bit rate of video for streaming. The selectable bit rate varies depending on the Size setting. Destination Address Enter the address of Host name or IP address the transmission destination server for streaming data. 9Mbps/6Mbps/ 3Mbps/2Mbps/ 1Mbps/0.5Mbps/ 0.3Mbps(Mono L)/ 0.3Mbps(Mono R)/ 0.2Mbps(Mono L)/ 0.2Mbps(Mono R) Item Description Setting Destination Port Enter the port number of the transmission destination server used for streaming. 1 to 65535 Audio Channel Select Selects the audio channels for the streaming output. Ch-1 & Ch-2/ Ch-3 & Ch-4 [Notes] Proxy Format Settings You can set the format of the proxy file that is recorded on the SD card of the camcorder. ˎˎ When Streaming is set to On, the monitoring function cannot be used. ˎˎ Audio/video data is transmitted as-is via the Internet. Accordingly, the data may potentially be exposed to other parties. Always check that the transmission destination can receive the streaming data. The data may be sent to an unintended party if the address or other settings are configured incorrectly. ˎˎ Not all frames may be played, depending on the status of the network. ˎˎ The picture quality may deteriorate in scenes with excessive motion. ˎˎ Not all frames may be played when the stream is set to a large size with a small bit rate. To reduce this, select a smaller size for the Size setting. ˎˎ If a network with bandwidth of less than 500 kbps is used, Size and Bit Rate are set to the following. –– When Size is 480×270, Bit Rate is set to 0.3Mbps(Mono L), 0.3Mbps(Mono R), 0.2Mbps(Mono L), or 0.2Mbps(Mono R). –– When Size is 320×180, Bit Rate is set to 0.2Mbps(Mono L) or 0.2Mbps(Mono R). When this occurs, video is set to a frame rate of 10 fps, and audio is set to a sampling frequency of 48 kHz and a bit rate of 56 kbps Mono. ˎˎ When Bit Rate is 0.3Mbps(Mono L) or 0.2Mbps(Mono L), Audio Channel Select >Ch-1 & Ch-2 is set to Ch-1 or Ch-3 & Ch-4 is set to Ch-3. When Bit Rate is 0.3Mbps(Mono R) or 0.2Mbps(Mono R), Audio Channel Select >Ch-1 & Ch-2 is set to Ch-2 or Ch-3 & Ch-4 is set to Ch-4. Video ˎˎXAVC Proxy (AVC/H.264 Main Profile, 4:2:0 Long GOP) ˎˎSize is selected in the following settings. Audio ˎˎAAC-LC compression ˎˎSampling frequency: 48 kHz ˎˎBit rate: 128 kbps for stereo Item Description Setting Proxy File recording >Audio Channel Select Sets the audio channel to record to proxy data. Ch-1 & Ch-2/ Ch-3 & Ch-4 [Notes] ˎˎ The bit rate is an average value, so this value may be exceeded at times. ˎˎ 24 fps is not supported. ˎˎ When HD Auto is selected for Size in the proxy format settings, the proxy format is set according to the setting of the recording format recorded on the SxS memory card or the format of the clip to be played back. ˎˎ Proxy files recorded with Size set to HD Auto in the proxy format settings may not be able to be played in a browser or Content Browser Mobile. Insert SD cards for recording proxy files directly into a computer to play the files. System Settings Item Description Setting Proxy File recording >Size Sets the video size and bit rate for proxy files. HD Auto(9Mbps)/ HD Auto(6Mbps)/ 1280×720(9Mbps)/ 1280×720(6Mbps)/ 640×360(3Mbps)/ 480×270(1Mbps)/ 480×270(0.5Mbps) Proxy File recording >Frame Rate Displays the video 23.98fps/ frame rate for proxy 25fps/ 29.97fps/ files. 50fps/ 59.94fps Proxy File recording >Bit Rate Displays the video bit rate for proxy files. 9Mbps(VBR)/ 6Mbps(VBR)/ 3Mbps(VBR)/ 1Mbps(VBR)/ 0.5Mbps(VBR) Use to load the Network Client Mode Settings certificate. 000 79 5. Network Configuration: Configuring from the Web Menu Network Client Mode Settings ˎˎLoad Certification: Load button Write the “CCM_certification.pem” CCM certificate to be loaded to the root directory of an SD card beforehand. For details about CCM certificates, contact a Sony professional sales representative. Wireless LAN Station Settings Use this screen to make settings for connecting the camcorder to a wireless LAN. Item Description Host Name Name of the camcorder (can be modified) SSID Displays the SSID selected in [Access Point]. Key Enter the password for the access point. 2 Configure settings on the Station Settings Item Description Show Key When set to On, entered characters are displayed. DHCP Enables/disables DHCP. When set to [On], an IP address is automatically assigned to the camcorder. To enter the camcorder IP address manually, set to [Off]. 3 Tap [Submit]. IP Address Enter the IP address of the camcorder. Enabled only when DHCP is [Off]. Subnet mask Enter the subnet mask of the camcorder. Enabled only when DHCP is [Off]. 4 Select Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode in Gateway Enter the gateway for the access point. Enabled only when DHCP is [Off]. DNS Auto Obtains DNS address automatically. When set to On, the address of the DNS server is obtained automatically. Primary DNS Server Enter the primary DNS server for the access point. Enabled only when DNS Auto is [Off]. Secondary DNS Server Enter the secondary DNS server for the access point. Enabled only when DNS Auto is [Off]. Submit Applies the wireless LAN settings. Connecting to an access point in station mode without using WPS 1 Connect the camcorder and device using access point mode (page 62). Station mode screen. Configure settings to match the settings of the access point connection. For details about access point settings, refer to the instruction manual for the access point. The specified settings are applied. the setup menu. 5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Wi-Fi Station], then press the knob. This step connects the camcorder to the access point in station mode. Proceed to step 9 in “Connecting to an access point using WPS” (page 64) to access the camcorder from the device. Wired LAN Settings Use this screen to make settings for connecting the camcorder to a wired LAN. Checking wireless LAN settings Use the Wireless LAN >Status tab to monitor the wireless LAN status. The displayed settings will vary depending on the wireless LAN mode of the camcorder. Item Description DHCP Enables/disables DHCP. When set to [On], an IP address is automatically assigned to the camcorder. To enter the camcorder IP address manually, set to [Off]. IP Address Enter the IP address of the camcorder. Enabled when DHCP is [Off]. Subnet mask Enter the subnet mask of the camcorder. Enabled when DHCP is [Off]. Gateway Enter the gateway for the access point. Enabled when DHCP is [Off]. Access point mode 000 80 5. Network Configuration: Configuring from the Web Menu Item Description DNS Auto Obtains DNS address automatically. When set to On, the address of the DNS server is obtained automatically. Primary DNS Server Enter the primary DNS server of the router. Enabled when DNS Auto is [Off]. Secondary DNS Server Enter the secondary DNS server of the router. Enabled when DNS Auto is [Off]. Web/Cam Remote Enables/disables access to the camcorder web menu and Wi-Fi remote control. When set to On, access is permitted. Submit Sets the wired LAN settings. [Note] To prevent unauthorized access from the Internet, it is recommended that Web/Cam Remote be set to On only when the wired LAN network is not connected to the Internet. When connecting to the Internet, check that the network connection is a secure network before use. Checking wired LAN settings Use the Wired LAN >Status tab to monitor the wired LAN status. Transfer (Upload) Settings You can register and set servers for transferring proxy files or original files recorded on the camcorder. Auto transfer ON/OFF If [Auto upload] is [On] and an Internet connection exists, proxy files are automatically transferred to the default server specified on the Upload Settings tab when recording ends. “Sony Ci,” “NCM: RX Server,” “Server Settings1,” “Server Settings2,” and “Server Settings3” are registered as transfer destination servers. The default value is “Sony Ci.” “Sony Ci” is the Media Cloud Services provided by Sony. You can transfer files to the “Sony Ci” cloud service. [Notes] ˎˎ The service may not be available in some regions. ˎˎ A subscription is required in order to use the “Sony Ci” cloud service. For details, visit www.SonyMCS.com/ wireless. For details about the Sony Ci privacy policy, visit the following sites. –– Terms of service https://www.sonymcs.com/terms/ –– Usage policy https://www.sonymcs.com/use/ –– Privacy policy https://www.sonymcs.com/privacy/ ˎˎ The name of the transfer destination folder is specified in [Destination Directory]. If not specified, a folder name with the current date is used. To change the setting, see “To change registered server settings” (page 81). Use the following procedure to register with “Sony Ci.” For details about registering, visit www.SonyMCS. com/wireless. To register a destination server 1 Check that “Sony Ci” is displayed on the You can select “Server Settings1,” “Server Settings2,” or “Server Settings3” (registered in Upload Server) as the destination server. Select the server settings, tap Edit, and configure the server information on the displayed screen (below). 2 Enter a user name in User, and a password in After specifying settings, tap [OK] to apply the settings. Tapping [Cancel] discards the settings. [Upload Settings] tab, then click [Edit]. The “Sony Ci” setup screen appears. Password. The entered characters are visible when Show Password is set to On. Load Certification: Load button Write the “Ci_certification.pem” Ci certificate to be loaded to the root directory of an SD card beforehand. For details about Ci certificates, contact a Sony professional sales representative. 3 Tap [Link]. A completion message appears after a short while. [Link] associates the user with the camcorder. An Internet connection is required to execute [Link]. 4 Tap [OK]. After registering with “Sony Ci,” [Unlink] appears on the Settings screen. Tapping [Unlink] releases the user account to enable other user accounts to link with the camcorder. Item Description Default Server Set to [On] to set the default file destination server. (Displayed at the top of the server list for file transfers.) Display Name Enter the name of the server to display in the list. Service Displays the type of server. FTP: FTP server Host Name Enter the address of the server. [Note] If a port number other than the default number of 21 is used, append a colon and the port number at the end of the address (for example, “:123”). User Enter the user name. Password Enter the password. Show Password When set to On, entered characters are displayed. PASV Mode Enable/disable PASV mode. 000 81 5. Network Configuration: Configuring from the Web Menu Item Description Destination Directory Specify the destination directory. [Note] If an invalid character is entered in the directory name, the directory is not created and files are transferred to the top level of the default transfer destination directory. Using Secure Protocol Set whether to use secure FTP. Load Certification Load an intermediate CA certificate. Displayed when Using Secure Protocol is set to On. Monitoring File Transfers (Job List) You can monitor file transfer status, manage files in the transfer file list, and start/stop file transfers. The camcorder supports the FTP resume function (for continuing file transfer if transfer stops). Item Description Total Progress status of the transfer of all files Status Progress status of the file being transferred Remain time Predicted remaining transfer time Transfer data rate Transfer rate [Note] To stop/restart file transfer or delete a file from the transfer list To change registered server settings 1 Select a file. 2 Tap on the top right of the screen. Communication using FTP is not encrypted. The use of FTPS is recommended. Select the server whose settings you want to change on the Upload Settings screen, then tap [Edit]. Change the setting on the displayed configuration screen. For details about items, see “To register a destination server”. Symptom Solution “Invalid certification The certificate being loaded is file.” appears. invalid. Check the certificate. “Certification file Check that the file name of not found.” appears. the certificate file is correct. [Notes] ˎˎ Communication using FTP is not encrypted. The use of FTPS is recommended. ˎˎ An intermediate CA certificate containing a root certificate is required. ˎˎ The certificate to be loaded must be in PEM format, and should be written to the root directory of the SD card with “certification.pem” file name. Loading Certificates Troubleshooting Select a menu item. ˎˎAbort selected: Stop file transfer. ˎˎDelete from list: Delete the file from the transfer list. ˎˎStart selected: Start file transfer. ˎˎSelect All: Select all files in the list. ˎˎClear completed: Delete all files that have been transferred from the list. 000 82 5. Network Configuration Supported Network Functions and Operating Limitations Network Functions and Network Connection Settings Limitations on Simultaneous Use of Network Functions The supported network functions and corresponding network connection settings (Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode, Modem, and Wired LAN settings) are shown below. To enable the network functions, set Maintenance >Network >Setting in the setup menu to On. The following limitations apply to the simultaneous use of network functions. Network function Maintenance >Network >Wi-Fi Mode Maintenance >Network >Modem Maintenance >Network >Wired LAN in the setup menu On Enable Wi-Fi Access Point Wi-Fi Station Proxy recording 1) (page 55) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Proxy playback (page 77) Yes 2) Yes 2) No No No Yes 2) No File transfer (page 69) No Yes 2) No Yes 2) No Yes 2) No Streaming transmission (page 73) No Yes No Yes No Yes No Monitoring (page 77) Yes 2) Yes 2) No No No Yes 2) No Network client mode (page 74) No Yes No Yes No Yes No Camcorder remote control (page 75) Yes 2) Yes 2) No No No Yes 2) No Off Off Disable 1) Proxy recording is enabled when Operation >Proxy Recording Mode >Setting in the setup menu is set to On. 2) Supports camcorder and network-connected device functions. Wireless LAN connection Wired LAN connection Operation None Disabled Network function stopped USB wireless LAN module Disabled USB wireless LAN module operating 3G/4G/LTE USB modem Disabled 3G/4G/LTE USB modem operating None Enabled Wired LAN operating USB wireless LAN module Enabled USB wireless LAN module and wired LAN operating1) 1) Streaming and file transfer operate using wired LAN. The USB wireless LAN module is reserved for Wi-Fi remote control operation. [Note] Wired LAN connection is not possible when the USB extension adaptor of the CBK-NA1R Ethernet Adaptor, supplied with the CBK-NA1 (option), is attached to the USB wireless LAN module on the camcorder. 000 83 6. Clip Operations Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen Thumbnail Screen Cursor (yellow) 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 OK S 9 The thumbnail screen appears if you press the THUMBNAIL button in E-E or playback mode. Thumbnail screens display lists of the index pictures of clips stored on SxS memory cards as thumbnails. You can select any clip (page 84) on the thumbnail screen and start playback of that clip (page 84). You can also add a clip flag to any clip on the thumbnail screen to filter clips according to the flags. You can also switch to the Essence Mark thumbnail screen from the thumbnail screen and add essence marks (for example, shot marks) to any frame in the clip. 10 11 To hide the thumbnail screen, press the THUMBNAIL button. 1. Thumbnail (index picture) When a clip is recorded, its first frame is automatically displayed as the index picture. You can change the index picture to any frame (page 88). 2. Selected media icon/media status A mark is displayed if the media is protected. If two SxS memory cards are inserted in the camcorder, you can switch between them using the SLOT SELECT button. 3. Clip number / total number of clips 12 13 4. Battery / Voltage status 5. Playback disabled indicator 6. Clip status Displays the clips status using an icon. Icon Meaning S, OK, NG, KP icons Essence mark or clip flag attached to a clip Lock icon Clip is locked (protected) 7. Clip select checkbox Place a check mark in the checkbox to select a clip (thumbnail). 8. Thumbnail information Displays thumbnail information. The displayed information varies according to the Customize View setting (page 89). 9. Clip name / title Displays the name or title of the selected clip. 10. Recording video format 11. Special recording information Displays the recording mode if the clip was recorded using a special recording mode (Slow & Quick Motion). For Slow & Quick Motion clips, the [Recording frame rate/Playback frame rate] are displayed on the right. 000 84 6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen 12. Clip duration 13. Creation date Selecting Clips It plays all clips sequentially starting from the selected clip. When playback of the last clip finishes, the camcorder switches to the camera image or external input state. Press the THUMBNAIL button to return to the thumbnail screen. [Notes] To select a clip thumbnail, do one of the following to move the yellow cursor to the thumbnail that you want to select. ˎˎPress the , , , buttons. ˎˎTurn the MENU knob. ˎˎPress the PREV or NEXT button. Selecting the First Thumbnail Press and hold the F REV button, and press the PREV button. ˎˎ Not all clips may be played back sequentially if the clips on the SxS memory cards were recorded with a mixture of different recording formats. ˎˎ Clips with an playback disabled icon (page 83) displayed on the thumbnail screen are not played. The corresponding clips are skipped and sequential playback continues. ˎˎ There may be momentary picture breakup or still image display at the boundary between clips. During this time, the play controls and the THUMBNAIL button cannot be operated. ˎˎ When you select a clip in the thumbnail screen and begin playback, there may be momentary picture breakup at the start of the clip. To view the start of the clip without breakup, put the camcorder into playback mode, pause, use the PREV button to return to the start of the clip, and start play again. Selecting the Last Thumbnail Pausing Playback Press and hold the F FWD button, and press the NEXT button. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button. The PLAY/PAUSE indicator flashes while play is paused. Press the button again to return to play mode. Playing Clips Sequentially Starting from the Selected Clip 1 Select the thumbnail of the clip that you want to play first. 2 Press the PLAY/PAUSE button. Playback begins from the start of the selected clip. Playing at High Speed Press the F FWD button (page 8) or the F REV button (page 7). To return to normal playback, press the PLAY/ PAUSE button. Returning to the Start of the Current Clip Press the PREV button. ˎˎDuring playback, this jumps to the start of the current clip and starts playback. ˎˎDuring F FWD, this jumps to the start of the current clip and pauses playback. ˎˎDuring F REV or pause, this jumps to the start of the current clip and displays a still image. ˎˎEach subsequent press of the button moves to the previous clip. Jumping to the Last Clip Simultaneously press the F FWD and NEXT buttons. This jumps to the last frame of the last clip recorded on the SxS memory card. Adding a Shot Mark during Playback You can add shot marks to clips during playback by using the same method used during recording (page 51). [Note] Playing from the Start of the First Clip Shot marks cannot be recorded when the SxS memory card is write protected. Simultaneously press the PREV and F REV buttons. This jumps to the start of the first clip on the SxS memory card. Stopping Playback Jumping to the Start of the Next Clip Press the NEXT button. ˎˎDuring playback, this jumps to the start of the next clip and starts playback. ˎˎDuring F FWD, this jumps to the start of the next clip and pauses playback. During playback of the last clip, this jumps to the end of the clip and pauses playback. ˎˎDuring F REV or pause, this jumps to the start of the next clip and displays a still image. ˎˎEach subsequent press of the button moves to the next clip. Press the STOP button: Playback stops, and the camcorder enters E-E mode. Press the THUMBNAIL button: Playback stops and the thumbnail screen (page 83) appears in the viewfinder. Play also stops if you eject the memory card. In this case, the camera picture appears in the viewfinder. Basic Thumbnail Menu Operations The Thumbnail menu is used to protect/delete clips, check properties, add/delete clip flags and essence marks to frames in a clip, and other tasks. 000 85 6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button. The thumbnail screen appears. 2 Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON, or press the MENU button. The menu screen appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Thumbnail], then press the knob. You can also press the or button to select [Thumbnail], and press the SET button. Protecting Clips You can protect a specified clip or all clips to protect the clips from being deleted. is added to the thumbnails of protected clips. Clips can be protected on the thumbnail screen or the filtered clip thumbnail screen (page 87). [Note] To select a menu item/sub-item, do one of the following. ˎˎTurn the MENU knob to select an item or subitem, then press the knob. ˎˎPress the arrow buttons (, , , ) to select an item or sub-item, then press the SET button. A selection list or a clip properties screen appears (page 87) according to the selected item or sub-item. To return to the previous screen, push the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE position. [Notes] ˎˎ When an SxS memory card is write protected, it is not possible to copy, delete, change index pictures, or add and delete clip flags marks and shot marks. ˎˎ Some items cannot be selected, depending on the state when the menu was displayed. For details about the thumbnail screen structure, see “Thumbnail Menu” (page 89). press the knob. A confirmation screen appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. All clips are protected, and a completion message appears. This function is not available when the file system is set to FAT. 4 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message. Protecting a specific clip Unlocking all clips 1 Select Thumbnail >Lock/Unlock Clip >Select 1 Select Thumbnail >Lock/Unlock Clip >Unlock 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then Clip in the setup menu. To hide the Thumbnail menu, press the MENU button again. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. The clip selection screen appears. All Clips in the setup menu. press the knob. A confirmation screen appears. the MENU knob to select [Execute], then 3 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip to protect, 3 Turn press the knob. then press the knob. A check mark is attached to the selected clip. All clips are unlocked, and a completion message appears. 4 Simultaneously press the SET button and SHIFT 4 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message. button. A confirmation screen appears. 5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. The clip is protected, and a completion message appears. 6 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message. Protecting all clips 1 Select Thumbnail >Lock/Unlock Clip >Lock All Clips in the setup menu. Copying Clips You can copy clips to another SxS memory card. Clips are copied to destination SxS memory cards using the same names as the original clips. [Notes] ˎˎIf a clip with the same name already exists at the copy destination SxS memory card, a one-digit number in parentheses is added to the original name. The number in parentheses is the smallest number that does not exist at the copy destination. Example: ABCD0002ABCD0002(1) ABCD0002(1)ABCD0002(2) ABCD0005(3)ABCD0005(4) ˎˎIf the parenthetical numbers (1) to (999) already exist at the copy destination, because a clip has been copied more than 1000 times, it is not possible to copy any more clips under that name. ˎˎA message appears if there is not enough free space on the copy destination SxS memory card. Exchange the card for one with more free space. ˎˎWhen multiple clips are recorded on the source SxS memory card, it may not be possible to copy all clips even when the source and destination memory cards have the same capacity, depending on the memory characteristics and usage of the memory cards. Copying a specific clip 1 Select Thumbnail >Copy Clip >Select Clip in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. The clip selection screen appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip to copy, then press the knob. A check mark is attached to the selected clip. 4 Simultaneously press the SET button and SHIFT button. A confirmation screen appears. 5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. The clip is copied, and a completion message appears. 6 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message. 000 86 6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen Copying all clips You can copy all clips stored on the same SxS memory card at the same time to another SxS memory card. 5 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. The clip is deleted, and a completion message appears. 1 Select Thumbnail >Copy Clip >All Clips in the 6 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then The clips below the deleted clip on the thumbnail screen move up one position. setup menu. press the knob. A confirmation screen appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. All clips are copied, and a completion message appears. 4 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message. Deleting Clips You can delete clips from SxS memory cards. Clips can be deleted on the thumbnail screen or the filtered clip thumbnail screen (page 87). 1 Select Thumbnail >Delete Clip >Select Clip in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. The clip selection screen appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip to delete, then press the knob. A check mark is attached to the selected clip. 4 Simultaneously press the SET button and SHIFT button. A confirmation screen appears. Deleting all clips You can delete all clips stored on the same SxS memory card at the same time. [Notes] ˎˎ Deleted clips cannot be restored. ˎˎ If the media or clip is protected, this function is disabled. 1 Select Thumbnail >Delete Clip >All Clips in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. A confirmation screen appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. All clips are deleted, and a completion message appears. 4 Press the MENU knob to dismiss the message. Transferring Clips Clips (original files) recorded on SxS memory cards and proxy files recorded on SD cards can be uploaded to a server using Thumbnail >Transfer Clip and Transfer Clip(Proxy), respectively, in the setup menu. For the Thumbnail >Transfer Clip procedure, see “Transferring Original Files using the Thumbnail Screen” (page 71). For the Thumbnail >Transfer Clip(Proxy) procedure, see “Transferring Proxy Files using the Thumbnail Screen” (page 69). 000 87 6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip flag, then Displaying Clip Properties The clip properties screen for the selected clip appears when you select Thumbnail >Display Clip Properties in the setup menu. 1 4 OK S Setting Filter clip flag press the knob. OK OK Setting Added clip flag NG NG Add OK OK KEEP KP Add NG NG None (Clips are not filtered) Add KEEP KP The clip screen appears showing the clips filtered by the selected clip flag. This screen is referred to as the filtered clip screen. The clip flag is added to the thumbnail of the selected clip. 2 5 You can also use an assignable switch assigned with the clip flag function to add clip flags (page 124). 3 6 7 Deleting a Clip Flag 1. Current clip image Displays the index picture and status of the selected clip. 2. Timecode display TC Index: Timecode of the displayed image Start: Timecode of the recording start point End: Timecode of the recording end point Duration: Duration between start and end points 3. Creation date and modified date Press the RESET/RETURN button: Returns to the Thumbnail menu screen. Press the THUMBNAIL button: Sets the camcorder to E-E mode and displays the camera picture. Press the PLAY/PAUSE button: Starts playback of the selected clip. 6. Special recording information 7. Recording device name To hide the clip properties screen, do one of the following. you want to delete a clip flag, then select Thumbnail >Set Clip Flag >Delete Clip Flag in the setup menu. The clip flag is deleted. Adding/Deleting Essence Marks in Clips You can add (and delete) essence marks (shot marks, recording start marks) to any frame in a clip. You add/delete essence marks on the essence mark thumbnail screen. [Note] Adding Clip Flags to Clips 4. Clip name 5. Recording format Video Codec: Video codec Size: Picture size FPS: Frame rate Audio Codec: Audio codec Ch/Bit: Audio recording channel/Number of bits for audio recording 1 Select the thumbnail for the clip from which To cancel filtering, do one of the following. ˎˎPress the RESET/RETURN button. ˎˎSelect Thumbnail >Thumbnail View >All in the setup menu. Filtering the Clips Displayed using the Filtered Clip Screen You can add clip flags (OK, NG or KP marks) to clips to filter the display of clips based on the clip flags. You can perform this operation on the thumbnail screen or the filtered clip thumbnail screen (page 87). [Note] [Note] 1 Select Thumbnail >Filter Clips in the setup This function is not available when the file system is set to FAT. 1 Select the thumbnail for the clip to which you want to add the clip flag, then select Thumbnail >Set Clip Flag in the setup menu. This function is not available when the file system is set to FAT. menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a clip flag used to filter clips, then press the knob. This function is not available when the file system is set to FAT. Adding a shot mark 1 Select Thumbnail > Thumbnail View > Essence Mark Thumbnail in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [All], and then press the knob. 3 Select the thumbnail for the frame to which you want to add the essence mark on the essence mark thumbnail screen, then select Thumbnail >Set Shot Mark in the setup menu. 000 88 6. Clip Operations: Clip Operations on the Thumbnail Screen 4 Turn the MENU knob to select one of the following, then press the knob. Setting Operation Add Shot Mark1 Adds Shot Mark 1 Add Shot Mark2 Adds Shot Mark 2 The shot mark is added to the selected frame. [Note] This function is not available when the file system is set to FAT. 1 Select Thumbnail >Thumbnail View >Essence Mark Thumbnail in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select an essence mark used to filter frames, then press the knob. Deleting a shot mark 1 Select Thumbnail > Thumbnail View > Essence Mark Thumbnail in the setup menu. 2 Select the type of shot mark to delete. 3 Select the thumbnail for the frame from which you want to delete a shot mark on the essence mark thumbnail screen, then select Thumbnail >Set Shot Mark in the setup menu. 4 Turn the MENU knob to select one of the following, then press the knob. Setting Operation Delete Shot Mark1 Deletes Shot Mark 1 Delete Shot Mark2 Deletes Shot Mark 2 The shot mark is deleted from the selected frame. Filtering Clips (Frames) using the Essence Mark Thumbnail Screen The essence mark thumbnail screen displays only those frames in a clip where an essence mark has been recorded in thumbnail view. Display the thumbnail screen, then either press the ESSENCE MARK button (page 9) or use the following procedure to display the essence mark thumbnail screen. Setting Description All All frames with added essence marks Rec Start Frames with a recording start mark and the first frame of clips that do not have a recording start mark Shot Mark0 to Shot Mark9 Frames with each shot mark The essence mark thumbnail screen appears filtered by the selected essence mark. If a clip is recorded using planning metadata that defines names for shot mark 0 to shot mark 9, the selection options in the list are displayed by the defined names. Changing the Index Picture of a Clip You can set the frame selected on the essence mark thumbnail screen as the index picture for the clip. Select the thumbnail of the frame you want to set as the index picture for the clip, then select Thumbnail >Set Index Picture in the setup menu. 000 89 6. Clip Operations Thumbnail Menu Default values are shown underlined and in bold text. Item Sub-item setting Description Display Clip Properties – Displays clip properties (page 87). Set Index Picture – Sets/changes the index picture of a clip (page 88). Thumbnail View Changes the thumbnail screen displayed. Displays the essence mark thumbnail screen Essence Mark Thumbnail All/Rec Start/Shot Mark1/Shot with clips filtered by essence mark (page 88). Mark2/Shot Mark3/Shot Mark4/ Shot Mark5/Shot Mark6/Shot Mark7/Shot Mark8/Shot Mark9/ Shot Mark0 Clip Thumbnail Displays the thumbnail screen (clip thumbnail screen) (page 83). Add Shot Mark1 Adds Shot Mark 1 to a frame (page 87). Delete Shot Mark1 Deletes Shot Mark 1 (page 88). Add Shot Mark2 Adds Shot Mark 2 to a frame (page 87). Delete Shot Mark2 Deletes Shot Mark 2 (page 88). Add OK Adds an OK flag to a clip (page 87). Add NG Adds an NG flag to a clip (page 87). Add KEEP Adds a KP (Keep) flag to a clip (page 87). Delete Clip Flag Deletes a clip flag (page 87). Select Clip Selects the clip to protect (page 85). Lock All Clips Protects all clips on the media (page 85). Unlock All Clips Unlocks all clips on the media (page 85). Copy Clip Copies clips. Select Clip Selects the clip to copy (page 85). All Clips Copies all clips on the media (page 86). Delete Clip Deletes clips. Select Clip Selects the clip to delete (page 86). All Clips Deletes all clips on the media (page 86). Transfer Clip Registers original files to transfer in the job list. Select Clip Selects the original file to transfer (page 71). All Clips Selects all the original files in media to transfer (page 71). Transfer Clip(Proxy) Registers proxy files to transfer in the job list. Select Clip Selects the proxy file to transfer corresponding to the selected original file (page 69). All Clips Selects all the proxy files in media to transfer corresponding to the original files (page 70). Set Shot Mark Adds/deletes shot marks. Set Clip Flag Adds/deletes clip flags. Lock/Unlock Clip Protects/unlocks a clip. Item Sub-item setting Description Filter Clips Filters the display of clips by clip flag. OK Filters the display of clips by OK flags (page 87). NG Filters the display of clips by NG flags (page 87). KEEP Filters the display of clips by KP (Keep) flags (page 87). None Thumbnail Caption Date Time/Time Code/ Duration/Sequential Number Clips are not filtered (page 87). Selects the information displayed beneath clip thumbnails. Date Time: Displays the date and time. Time Code: Displays the timecode. Duration: Displays the duration of the clip. Sequential Number: Displays a sequential number for each clip. Customize View 000 90 7. Menu Display and Settings Setup Menu Organization On this camcorder, settings for shooting and playback are made in the setup menu, which appears in the viewfinder. The setup menu can also be displayed on an external video monitor (page 138). Menu Structure User menu Menu used to arrange items from the setup menu in any chosen order (page 94). Operation menu Menu used to make settings related to shooting (excluding settings related to picture quality). Paint menu Menu used to make settings related to picture quality. Thumbnail menu Menu used to make settings related to clip thumbnails (page 89). [Note] The Thumbnail menu can be used only when a thumbnail screen (page 83) is displayed. It is disabled when the thumbnail screen is not displayed. Maintenance menu Menu used to make settings related to camcorder maintenance and system management. File menu Menu used to make perform operations on files. Menu Items Operation menu Item Description Time Zone Time settings 103 Clip Clip settings 104 Update Media Update media management information 104 GPS Location information (GPS) settings 104 Page Item Description Format System settings 97 Base Setting Dynamic range mode settings 97 Planning Metadata Planning metadata settings 104 HDR Setting Displays HD recording format and output system during HDR operation 97 USB Copy to USB media settings 104 Media format settings 98 Flashband correction settings 105 Format Media Flash Band Reduce Input/Output Input/output signal settings 98 Super Impose Superimposition settings 98 LCD LCD monitor settings 98 Rec Function Special recording mode settings 99 Page Paint menu Item Description Switch Status Correction functions and test signal on/off settings 106 HDR Paint Setting HDR settings 106 White Color temperature settings 106 Black Black level settings 106 Flare Flare correction settings 106 Page Proxy Recording Proxy data settings Mode 99 Assignable Switch Assign functions to assignable switches 99 VF Setting Viewfinder settings 100 Marker Marker settings 100 Gain Switch Gain value settings 101 Gamma(HDR) HDR gamma display 107 Auto Iris Auto iris settings 101 Gamma 107 Zebra Zebra pattern settings 101 Gamma correction settings Display On/Off Viewfinder display item settings 101 Black Gamma Black gamma correction settings 107 “!” LED Viewfinder “!” settings 102 Knee Knee correction settings 108 White Setting White balance settings 103 White Clip White clip settings 108 Offset White Offset white settings 103 Detail(HD) Detail settings 108 Shutter Shutter settings 103 Detail(SD) Detail settings 108 Slow Shutter Slow shutter settings 103 Aperture Aperture correction settings 108 000 91 7. Menu Display and Settings: Setup Menu Organization Item Description Item Description Skin Detail Skin detail correction settings 109 Auto Shading Auto black shading correction settings 116 Matrix Matrix correction settings 109 APR APR settings 116 Multi Matrix Multi matrix correction settings 109 Setup for Mobile App 116 V Modulation V modulation shading correction settings 109 Connection settings using the network setup assist tool Access Authentication Access authentication settings 116 Low Key Saturation Low key saturation correction settings 110 Network Network connection settings 117 Saturation Mode Saturation correction settings 110 Network Client Mode Network client mode settings 118 Noise Suppression Noise suppression settings 110 File Transfer Wi-Fi transfer settings 119 Streaming Streaming settings 119 Clock Set Internal clock settings 120 Language Display language settings 120 Hours Meter Digital time counter settings 120 Network Reset Network reset 120 Page Maintenance menu Page Item Description White Shading White shading correction settings 111 Black Shading Black shading correction settings 111 Fan Control Fan control settings 120 Battery settings 111 Viewfinder display settings 120 Battery VF Display Setting DC Voltage Alarm External DC source voltage alarm settings 111 Option Software option settings 120 Audio Audio settings 111 Version Version settings 121 WRR Setting Wireless tuner settings 113 Time Code Timecode settings 114 Essence Mark Essence mark settings 114 Camera Config Camcorder operation settings 114 Preset White Preset white settings White Filter DCC Adjust Flicker Reduce Genlock Page File menu Item Description User File User file settings 122 115 All File ALL file settings 122 Filter settings 115 Scene File Scene file settings 122 DCC settings 115 Reference File Reference file settings 122 Flicker correction settings 116 Lens File Lens file settings 123 Genlock settings 116 User Gamma Gamma file settings 123 Page 000 92 7. Menu Display and Settings Basic Setup Menu Operations Displaying the Setup Menu Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON, or press the MENU button. The camcorder enters menu mode and the menu list appears on the screen. ˎˎThe menu item selection area displays a maximum of seven lines. You can scroll through menus with more than seven lines by moving the cursor up and down. 4 Turn the MENU knob, or press the or button, to move the cursor to the sub-item that you want to set, and then confirm by pressing the MENU knob or the SET button. The settings of the selected sub-item appear, and the cursor moves to the currently selected value. Entering Text When you select an item, such as a file name, which requires character entry, the character entry screen appears. 1 The following example shows the cursor positioned at the Operation menu Menu list Displayed when there are further menu items below. Menu item selection area ˎˎIf the selected item has sub-items, they appear on the right. ˎˎIf there are no sub-items, the current setting appears on the right. ˎˎSelect [Back] to return to the previous level. Menu item selection area [Note] The setup menu cannot be used when the camcorder is in focus magnification mode. Exit focus magnification mode by pressing the assignable switch to which the Focus Mag function has been assigned. 3 Turn the MENU knob, or press the or button, to move the cursor to the menu item that you want to set, and then confirm by pressing the MENU knob or the SET button. The sub-items area appears to the right of the menu item selection area, and the cursor moves to the first sub-item. Making Menu Settings 1 Turn the MENU knob, or press the or button, to move the cursor to the desired menu. A list of selectable menu items appears in the menu item selection area to the right of the menu list. 2 Press the MENU knob or the SET button. The menu item selection screen appears. You can also display the menu item selection screen by pressing the button. Settings area ˎˎDisplays sub-items and their current settings ˎˎTo return to the previous level, select [Back], press the button, or push the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE position. Settings area ˎˎThe settings area displays a maximum of nine lines. You can scroll through menus with more than nine sub-items by moving the cursor up and down. ˎˎFor sub-items with a large settings range (for example, –99 to +99), the settings area is not displayed. The current setting is highlighted to indicate that the value can be changed. 2 3 1 Press the MENU knob to select the type of character to enter, then press the MENU knob or SET button. ABC: Uppercase alphabetic characters abc: Lowercase alphabetic characters 123: Numeric characters !#$: Special characters 5 Turn the MENU knob, or press the or 2 Select a character from the selected character If an item requires confirmation before execution, selecting the item in step 3 hides the menu and a confirmation message appears. Follow the instructions in the message to execute or cancel the operation. 3 When finished, select [Done] and press the button, to select the value to set, and then confirm by pressing the MENU knob or the SET button. The setting is changed, and the display is updated to show the new setting. If you select [Execute] for an executable item, the corresponding function is executed. type, then press the knob. The cursor moves to the next field. Space: Enters a space character at the cursor position. /: Moves the position of the cursor. BS: Deletes the character on the left of the cursor (backspace). dial. The character string is confirmed and the character entry screen disappears. 000 93 7. Menu Display and Settings: Basic Setup Menu Operations Canceling Changes to Settings 1 Push the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE position. Exiting the Menu 1 Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF or press the MENU button. The normal camera picture reappears. Locking/Unlocking the Menu 4 Enter an arbitrary passcode number. The valid input range is 0000 to 9999. The default value is 0000. Enter a number and press the MENU knob to move the cursor to the next digit. When all digits have been entered, move the cursor to [Set]. 5 With [Set] selected, press the MENU knob. The entry is applied. A confirmation message appears. Subsequently, only the User menu is displayed. [Notes] ˎˎ If the menu is locked without registering the following setup menu items in the User menu, assigning the menu function to an assignable switch is not possible. ˎˎ If some of the following setup menu items are assigned to an assignable switch when the menu is locked, the setting for the functions assigned to assignable switches are forcibly set to Off when the menu is locked. Setup menu Functions assignable to assignable switches Operation >Rec Function >Picture Cache Rec Picture Cache Rec Operation >Rec Function >Clip Continuous Rec Clip Continuous Rec Operation >Rec Function >Slow & Quick Motion Slow & Quick Motion Operation >VF Setting >Color Mode VF Mode Menu with Lock in the setup menu. Operation >Display On/Off >Video Signal Monitor Video Signal Monitor [Notes] Operation >Display On/Off >Lens Info Lens Info Operation >Auto Iris >Mode Spotlight Operation >Marker >Setting Marker Maintenance >Audio >Front MIC Select Front MIC Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Setting Network Client Mode You can lock the setup menu so that only the User menu is displayed. Locking the menu 1 Press and hold the MENU knob and press the MENU ON/OFF switch down to display the setup menu. 2 Display Maintenance >Camera Config >User ˎˎ When you press and hold the MENU knob and press the MENU ON/OFF switch down, Camera Config >User Menu Only changes to User Menu with Lock. ˎˎ If you press the MENU ON/OFF switch down without pressing the MENU knob or you press the MENU button to display the menu, Camera Config >User Menu with Lock is not displayed. 3 Select “On,” then press the MENU knob. The viewfinder screen display switches to the passcode number input screen. Backlight Maintenance >File Transfer >Auto Upload(Proxy) Auto Upload(Proxy) Unlocking the menu 1 Press and hold the MENU knob and press the MENU ON/OFF switch down to display the setup menu. 2 Display User >Camera Config >User Menu with Lock in the setup menu. [Notes] ˎˎ When you press and hold the MENU knob and press the MENU ON/OFF switch down, Camera Config >User Menu Only changes to User Menu with Lock. ˎˎ If you press the MENU ON/OFF switch down without pressing the MENU knob or you press the MENU button to display the menu, Camera Config >User Menu with Lock is not displayed. 3 Select “Off,” then press the MENU knob. The viewfinder screen display switches to the passcode number input screen. 4 Enter the passcode number used to lock the menu. The valid input range is 0000 to 9999. Enter a number and press the MENU knob to move the cursor to the next digit. When all digits have been entered, move the cursor to [Set]. 5 With [Set] selected, press the MENU knob. The entry is applied. If the entered passcode number matches the passcode number used to lock the menu, a confirmation message appears and the display of all menus is enabled. [Notes] ˎˎ If the entered passcode number does not match the passcode number used to lock the menu, the menu is not unlocked. ˎˎ It is recommended that you leave a record of the passcode nearby, just in case it is forgotten. If you do forget the passcode number, contact your Sony service representative. 000 94 7. Menu Display and Settings Editing the User Menu You can edit the User menu, such as adding items, deleting items, and rearranging items, to make the User menu more useful using Edit User Menu. You can select items in the Operation menu, Paint menu, Maintenance menu, and some items in the File menu, and add them to the User menu. Up to 20 items can be registered in the User menu. There are six items registered in the User menu by factory default, one of which must always be present, allowing you to add up to 19 new items. [Note] Editing is unavailable when the menu is locked. Adding Items and Sub-Items 1 Turn the MENU knob to select Edit User Menu >Add Item, then press the knob. The items that can be added are displayed. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item to edit, then press the knob. The edit function list appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select Edit Sub Item in the edit function list, then press the knob. The item is deleted. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item, then press the knob. A screen for selecting sub-items to add appears. Moving Items The Edit Sub Item screen appears. Displaying the Edit User Menu Screen You edit the User menu on the Edit User Menu screen. 1 Turn the MENU knob to select User >Edit User Menu, then press the knob. 1 Display the Edit User Menu screen. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item to move, then press the knob. The edit function list appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select a sub-item, then press the knob. Place a check mark in the All checkbox to add all sub-items. Place a check mark in the individual checkboxes to specify which sub-items to add. All sub-items are checked when the screen is first opened (function to display all sub-items). Remove the check marks for the sub-items you do not want to display in the User menu. the knob. The item/sub-item(s) are added. Editing is completed. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select Move in the edit function list, then press the knob. the MENU knob to select [OK], then press 4 Turn the MENU knob to select [OK], then press 4 Turn the knob. The Edit User Menu screen appears. [Note] The same item or sub-item cannot be registered twice. Also, the name of the item or sub-item cannot be changed. Editing Sub-Items You can specify the sub-items to display. 1 Display the Edit User Menu screen. The item to move is highlighted, and a triangle mark and line indicate the destination position. Deleting Items 1 Display the Edit User Menu screen. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select an item to edit, then press the knob. The edit function list appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select Delete in the edit function list, then press the knob. Triangle mark and line indicating move destination 000 95 7. Menu Display and Settings: Editing the User Menu 4 Turn the MENU knob to move the triangle and line to the desired destination, then press the knob. The item is moved. Restoring the User Menu to Factory Default State 1 Turn the MENU knob to select Edit User Menu >Customize Reset, then press the knob. The Customize Reset screen appears. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Reset], then press the knob. A confirmation screen appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. The User menu is restored to the factory default state. 000 96 7. Menu Display and Settings User Menu (Factory Default Configuration) The User menu consists of the following items when it is in the factory default state. ˎˎFormat Media (page 98) ˎˎRec Function (page 99) ˎˎInput/Output (page 98) ˎˎClip (page 104) ˎˎAssignable Switch1) (page 99) ˎˎCamera Config2) (page 114) 1) Excluding sub-item 0 2) Contains only User Menu Only as sub-item For details about editing the User menu, see “Editing the User Menu” (page 94). 000 97 7. Menu Display and Settings Operation Menu Default values are shown underlined and in bold text. Operation >Format Sets the system frequency, file system, recording format, and recording aspect ratio. Operation >Format Sets the system frequency, file system, recording format, and recording aspect ratio. Item Setting Description Rec Format HD422 50 1080P HD422 50 720P HQ 1920×1080P When the file system is UDF and the system frequency is 29.97, 25, or 23.98. [Note] HQ 1920×1080i HQ 1440×1080i HQ 1280×720P SP 1440×1080i When the file system is FAT and the system frequency is 59.94 or 50. HQ 1920×1080P When the file system is FAT and the system frequency is 29.97, 25, or 23.98. Aspect Ratio (SD) 16:9/4:3 Selects the SD mode aspect ratio. Audio Length 24bit/16bit Selects the audio bit rate for recording in IMX format. Item Setting Description Frequency 59.94/50/29.97/25/23.98 Selects the system frequency (execute by selecting Execute). Switching the system frequency also switches the Rec Format setting to the value configured previously at that frequency. File System exFAT/UDF/FAT Switches the file system (execute by selecting Execute). Rec Format Settings vary according to the system frequency setting. Selects the recording format (execute by selecting Execute). XAVC-I 1920×1080P XAVC-I 1920×1080i XAVC-I 1280×720P XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i XAVC-L 50 1280×720P XAVC-L 35 1080P XAVC-L 35 1080i XAVC-L 25 1080i HD422 50 1080i HD422 50 720P HQ 1920×1080i HQ 1440×1080i HQ 1280×720P MPEG IMX 50 DVCAM When the file system is exFAT and the system frequency is 59.94 or 50. XAVC-I 1920×1080P XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P XAVC-L 35 1080P HD422 50 1080P HD422 50 720P HQ 1920×1080P When the file system is exFAT and the system frequency is 29.97, 25, or 23.98. HD422 50 1080i HD422 50 720P HQ 1920×1080i HQ 1440×1080i HQ 1280×720P MPEG IMX 50 DVCAM When the file system is UDF and the system frequency is 59.94 or 50. Operation >Base Setting Sets the dynamic range for imaging. [Note] Displayed only when using CBKZ-SLHL1 HDR LICENSE (option). Item Setting Description Shooting Mode SDR/HDR SDR: Sets conventional standard dynamic range mode. HDR: Sets High Dynamic Range mode. Operation >HDR Setting Displays the HD recording format and output system during HDR operation. [Note] Displayed only when using CBKZ-SLHL1 HDR LICENSE (option). Item Setting Description HD Rec/Out HDR(HLG)/SDR Displays HDR(HLG) when Operation >Base Setting >Shooting Mode is set to HDR. Displays SDR when set to SDR. Color Space BT.2020/BT.709 Displays BT.2020 when Operation >Base Setting >Color Space is set to HDR. Displays BT.709 when set to SDR. 000 98 7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu Operation >Format Media Formats the media. Operation >Input/Output Sets input/output signals. Item Setting Description Item Setting Description Media(A) Execute/Cancel Initializes the SxS memory card in slot A (execute by selecting Execute). Wide ID Through/Auto Media(B) Execute/Cancel Initializes the SxS memory card in slot B (execute by selecting Execute). SD Card(Utility) Execute/Cancel Initializes the SD card in the UTILITY SD card slot (execute by selecting Execute). SD Card(Proxy) Execute/Cancel Initializes the SD card in the PROXY SD card slot (execute by selecting Execute). Selects whether to add a wide ID signal to the SD output signal. Through: Outputs without adding a wide ID signal. Auto: Adds and outputs a wide ID signal to the video signal when the wide ID signal is set to Squeeze. Wide Mode(Ext.) Auto/16:9 When the input signal is SD, sets the method that determines wide screen information. Auto: Records with 16:9 aspect ratio when the wide screen information of the input signal is Squeeze. Otherwise, records with 4:3 aspect ratio. 16:9: Records with 16:9 aspect ratio. Operation >Input/Output Sets input/output signals. Item Setting Description Output Format Settings vary according to the system frequency setting. Selects the output format (execute by selecting Execute). Settings vary according to the recording format setting (page 36). Camera/External Selects the camera picture (Camera) or SDI IN connector input signal for the video input source. Source Select SDI Out1 Output On/Off Turns the output signal from the SDI OUT1 connector on/off. SDI Out2 Output On/Off Turns the output signal from the SDI OUT2 connector on/off. HDMI Output On/Off Turns the output signal from the HDMI connector on/off. SDI Out2/HDMI Super Off/On Turns character information (superimposed) from the SDI OUT2 and HDMI connectors on/off. Video Out Super Off/On Turns character information (superimposed) from the VIDEO OUT connector on/off. Down Converter Edge Crop/Letter Box/Squeeze Selects the signal conversion mode for output of SD signals. Edge Crop: Crops the edges of the 16:9 picture for output as a 4:3 picture. Letter Box: Masks the top and bottom of the 4:3 picture and displays a 16:9 picture in the center of the screen. Squeeze: Squeezes the 16:9 picture horizontally for output as a 4:3 picture. Operation >Super Impose Sets character information/markers to be superimposed. Item Setting Description Super(VF Display) On/Off Super(Menu) On/Off When Input/Output >SDI Out2/HDMI Super or Input/Output >Video Out Super is set to On, this turns superimposition of character information on the output from the SDI OUT connector or VIDEO OUT connector on/off, respectively. Super(Marker) On/Off When Input/Output >SDI Out2/HDMI Super or Input/Output >Video Out Super is set to On, this turns superimposition of markers on the output from the SDI OUT connector or VIDEO OUT connector on/off, respectively. Operation >LCD Sets the LCD monitor. Item Setting Description LCD Color –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the color depth of the LCD monitor. LCD Marker&Zebra On/Off Turns the marker and zebra pattern display on the LCD monitor on/off. 000 99 7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu Operation >Rec Function Sets the special recording mode. Operation >Rec Function Sets the special recording mode. Item Setting Description Item Setting Description Slow & Quick Motion On/Off Turns Slow & Quick Motion on/off. (When set to On, the settings for other special recording modes are set to Off.) Interval Time When Interval Rec is set to On, this sets the interval for Interval Rec shooting. Frame Rate Settings vary according to the recording format setting. When Slow & Quick Motion is On, selects the frame rate for Slow & Quick Motion shooting. 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/ 20/30/40/50 (sec) 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/15/ 20/30/40/50/ (min) 1/2/3/4/6/12/24 (hour) 1 to 60 When the file system is exFAT, and the recording format is XAVC Intra or XAVC Long. Pre-Lighting Off/2sec/5sec/10sec 1 to 50 When the file system is UDF, and the recording format is MPEG HD 422 50M (1280×720), 50P/25P. Sets the number of seconds that the video light is turned on prior to the start of Interval Rec shooting. To not turn the video light on, select Off. 1 to 30 When the file system is exFAT or UDF, and the recording format is MPEG HD 422 50M (1920×1080), 29.97P/23.98P. Simul Rec On/Off Turns simultaneous recording to slots A and B on/ off. 1 to 25 When the file system is exFAT or UDF, and the recording format is MPEG HD 422 50M (1920×1080), 25P. Clip Continuous Rec On/Off Turns Clip Continuous Rec mode on/off. (When set to On, the settings for other special recording modes are set to Off.) Picture Cache Rec On/Off Turns Picture Cache Rec mode on/off. (When set to On, the settings for other special recording modes are set to Off.) Cache Rec Time Settings vary according to the recording format setting. Sets the Picture Cache Rec time, when Picture Cache Rec is set to On. For details, see “Picture Cache Rec Mode Settings” (page 165) in the Appendix. Interval Rec Number of Frames On/Off Turns Interval Rec mode on/off. (When set to On, the settings for other special recording modes are set to Off.) The available settings vary depending on the Format >Frequency setting. When Interval Rec is set to On, this sets the number of frames to shoot in one Interval Rec take. 2frames/6frames/12frames When the recording format frame rate is 50P or 59.94P. 1frame/3frames/6frames/ 9frames When the recording format frame rate is 23.98P, 25P, 29.97P, 50i, or 59.94i. Operation >Proxy Recording Mode Sets proxy recording. Item Setting Description Setting On/Off Turns proxy recording on/off. Size HD Auto(9Mbps)/ HD Auto(6Mbps)/ 1280×720(9Mbps)/ 1280×720(6Mbps)/ 640×360(3Mbps)/ 480×270(1Mbps)/ 480×270(0.5Mbps) Selects the size of the proxy recording format. Frame Rate 23.98fps/25fps/29.97fps/50fps/ 59.94fps Selects the frame rate of the proxy recording format. Bit Rate 9Mbps/6Mbps/3Mbps/ 1Mbps/0.5Mbps Selects the bit rate of the proxy recording format. Audio Channel CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 Selects the audio channel to record to proxy data. Operation >Assignable Switch Assigns functions to assignable switches. For details about assigning functions, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches” (page 124). Item Setting Description <0> page 124 Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 0 switch. <1> page 125 Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 1 switch. <2> page 124 Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 2 switch. <3> page 125 Assigns a function to the ASSIGN. 3 switch. <4> page 125 Assigns a function to the ASSIGNABLE 4 switch. <5> page 125 Assigns a function to the ASSIGNABLE 5 switch. 100 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu Operation >Assignable Switch Assigns functions to assignable switches. Operation >Marker Sets the marker display in the viewfinder. For details about assigning functions, see “Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches” (page 124). Item Setting Description Lens RET page 126 Assigns a function to RET button on the lens. Online page 125 Assigns a function to the ONLINE button. Zoom Speed 0 to 20 to 99 When Zoom has been assigned to the ASSIGNABLE 4 or 5 switch, this sets the zoom speed. Operation >VF Setting Sets the viewfinder screen. Item Setting Description Setting On/Off Turns the display of all markers on/off. [Note] When Marker is assigned to the ASSIGN. 2 switch, this setting is disabled. Color White/Yellow/Cyan/Green/ Magenta/Red/Blue Selects the marker display color. Center Marker 1/2/3/4/Off When the center marker is displayed, selects the type. Select Off if you do not want to display the marker. Item Setting Description Safety Zone On/Off Turns the safety zone indicator on/off. Color –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the color depth of the viewfinder image. Safety Area 80%/90%/92.5%/95% Selects the safety zone range. Color Mode Color/B&W Selects the viewfinder display mode (when using CBK-VF02). Color: Color B&W: Black & white Aspect Marker Line/Mask/Off Peaking Type Normal/Color Selects the type of peaking (when using CBKVF02). Normal: Normal peaking Color: Color peaking When an aspect marker is to be displayed, selects the display method. Select Off if you do not want to display the marker. Line: Show as white lines. Mask: Displays a lower video signal level for areas outside the marker area. Aspect Select 15:9/14:9/13:9/4:3/1.66:1/ 1.85:1/2.35:1/2.4:1 Selects the aspect ratio of the marker. Aspect Mask 0% to 12% to 15% When the Aspect Marker setting is Mask, this sets the video signal level of areas outside the marker area as a percentage value relative to the video signal level of areas inside the marker area. Aspect Safety Zone On/Off Turns the aspect safety zone marker on/off. Aspect Safety Area 80%/90%/92.5%/95% Selects the size of the aspect safety zone marker (as a percentage of total screen size). 100% Marker On/Off Turns the 100% safety zone marker indicator on/ off. User Box On/Off Turns the box cursor display on/off. User Box Width 40 to 500 to 999 Sets the box cursor width (distance from the center to the left and right edges). User Box Height 70 to 500 to 999 Sets the box cursor height (distance from the center to the top and bottom edges). User Box H Position –479 to 0 to 479 Sets the horizontal position of the box cursor center. User Box V Position –464 to 0 to 464 Sets the vertical position of the box cursor center. Peaking Frequency Normal/High When Peaking Type is set to Normal, this selects Normal or High peaking frequency (when using CBK-VF02). Peaking Color B&W/Red/Yellow/Blue Selects the peaking color when Peaking Type is set to Color (when using CBK-VF02). B&W: Black & white Red: Red Yellow: Yellow Blue: Blue VF Detail Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the detail level (set on the camcorder) of the viewfinder (when using HDVF-20A). 101 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu Operation >Gain Switch Sets the gain value switch settings. Operation >Auto Iris Sets the auto iris. Item Setting Description Item Setting Description Gain<L> –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/ 18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB Selects the gain value for the L position of the GAIN switch. Iris APL Ratio –99 to ±0 to +99 Gain<M> –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/ 18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB Selects the gain value for the M position of the GAIN switch. If the Mode setting for Auto Iris is set to Standard, sets the mix ratio of peak to mean auto iris detection value. Iris Var Width 40 to 500 to 999 Gain<H> –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/ 18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB Selects the gain value for the H position of the GAIN switch. Sets the width of the window when Iris Window is set to Var. Iris Var Height 70 to 500 to 999 Gain <Turbo> –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/ 18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB Selects the gain value when the Turbo Gain function is assigned to an assignable switch. Sets the height of the window when Iris Window is set to Var. Iris Var H Position –479 to 0 to 479 Shockless Gain On/Off Turns shockless gain (function that switches the gain smoothly when the gain is switched) on/off. Sets the horizontal position of the window when Iris Window is set to Var. Iris Var V Position –464 to 0 to 464 Sets the vertical position of the window when Iris Window is set to Var. Operation >Zebra Sets the zebra display for video displayed in the viewfinder. Operation >Auto Iris Sets the auto iris. Item Setting Description Iris Override On/Off Turns iris override (setting opens or closes the iris more than normal) on/off. Mode Backlight/Standard/Spotlight Selects the control mode of the auto iris. Backlight: Backlight mode (mode for reduced darkening of a subject when the subject is backlit) Standard: Standard mode (cannot be selected when using optional remote control connection) Spotlight: Spotlight mode (mode for reduced blown out highlights when subject is lit by spotlighting) Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the convergence target level (larger values increase brightness.) Speed –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the control speed (speed of response to changes in the video). (Larger values specify quicker reaction times.) Clip High light On/Off Turns the function that ignores brightest areas to provide a flatter reaction to high luminance on/ off. Detect Window 1/2/3/4/5/6/Var Selects the type of auto iris detection window. Var: Variable Detect Window Indication On/Off Turns the function that displays the auto iris detection window frame using a marker on/off. [Note] The gamma display assist effect is not applied. Item Setting Description Zebra Select 1/2/Both Selects the zebra pattern type (Zebra 1, Zebra 2, Both). Zebra1 Level 0% to 70% to 107% Sets the Zebra 1 display level. Zebra1 Aperture Level 1% to 10% to 20% Sets the Zebra 1 aperture level. Zebra2 Level 1% to 100% to 109% Sets the Zebra 2 display level. Operation >Display On/Off Selects the items to display in the viewfinder. Item Setting Description Video Level Warning On/Off Turns the warnings that appear when the video level is too bright or too dark on/off. Shutter Setting On/Off Turns the shutter mode and shutter speed indicators on/off. ND Filter Position On/Off Turns the ND filter setting indicator on/off. Gain Setting On/Off Turns the gain setting indicator on/off. Rec/Play Status On/Off Turns the recording and playback indicators on/ off. Color Temp. On/Off Turns the color temperature indicator on/off. Frame Rate/Interval On/Off Turns the special recording mode indicator on/ off. 102 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu Operation >Display On/Off Selects the items to display in the viewfinder. Operation >Display On/Off Selects the items to display in the viewfinder. Item Setting Description Item Setting Battery Remain Auto/Voltage/Off Sets the mode of the remaining battery capacity and input voltage indicators. Auto: Displays the remaining capacity, according to the battery type. Voltage: Displays the input voltage, regardless of the battery type. Off: No display. Video Signal Monitor Off/Waveform/Vector/Histogram Turns the output video signal status indicator on/ off, and selects the type of video signal to display (page 18). Timecode On/Off Turns the display of time data (timecode, user bits, counter, duration) on/off. Audio Level Meter On/Off Turns the display of the audio level meter on/off. Media Status On/Off Turns the media status indicator on/off. SD Card(Utility) On/Off Turns the SD card (Utility) indicator on/off. Focus Position Meter/Feet/Off Turns the lens focus position indicator on/off and selects the display units. Iris Position On/Off Turns the lens iris position indicator on/off. Zoom Position On/Off Turns the lens zoom position indicator on/off. Extender On/Off Turns the lens and extender indicator on/off. ALAC On/Off Turns the lens aberration correction indicator on/ off. AE Mode On/Off Turns AE mode and the AE level setting indicator on/off. Focus Mode On/Off Turns the focus mode indicator on/off. White Balance Mode On/Off Turns the white balance mode indicator on/off. CC5600K On/Off Turns the CC5600K indicator on/off. Rec Format On/Off Turns the recording format indicator on/off. Gamma On/Off Turns the selected gamma type indicator on/off. Timecode Lock On/Off Turns the timecode indicator on/off. Network Condition On/Off Turns the network connection status indicator on/ off. Proxy Status On/Off Turns the proxy status indicator on/off. NW Client Mode Status On/Off Turns the network client mode indicator on/off. Streaming Status On/Off Turns streaming transmission on/off. GPS On/Off Turns the GPS reception status indicator on/off. Description [Note] Not displayed in the following circumstances. When Operation >Input/Output >SDI Out1 Select and SDI Out2 Select in the setup menu are both set to Off. When Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the setup menu is set to 720×480P or 720×576P. Clip Name On/Off Turns the clip name display on/off. Focus Assist Indicator On/Off Turns the focus assist indicator on/off. Focus Area Marker On/Off Turns the focus area marker indicator on/off. Lens Info Meter/Feet/Off Selects whether to display depth of field and the units to display. WRR RF Level On/Off Turns the wireless tuner reception status indicator on/off. Clip Number On/Off Turns the clip information display on/off. Operation >"!"LED Sets the “!” indicator in the viewfinder. (Enabled when using HDVF-20A). Item Setting Description Gain <!> On/Off Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off when the gain is set to other than 0 dB. Shutter <!> On/Off Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off when the SHUTTER switch is set to ON. White Preset <!> On/Off Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST. ATW Run <!> On/Off Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off when ATW is used. Extender <!> On/Off Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off when the digital extender function or lens extender is used. Filter <!> On/Off Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off when the ND filter is set to other than 1. Iris Override <!> On/Off Turns the function to light the ! indicator on/off when the auto iris override is not set to Standard. 103 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu Operation >White Setting Makes settings related to white balance adjustment. Operation >Offset White Makes settings related to white balance offset values. Item Setting Description Item Setting Description White Switch<B> Memory/ATW Sets the operating mode selected by the B position of the WHITE BAL switch. Memory: Auto white balance ATW: Auto tracing white balance Warm Cool Balance<A> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a more precise color temperature, for use when a satisfactory image cannot be obtained with the Warm Cool <A> setting. Offset White <B> On/Off Shockless White Off/1/2/3 Selects the transition time when the WHITE BAL switch setting is changed (1 is fastest). When this is set to On, the offset adjusted here is added to the white balance of channel B. Warm Cool <B> ATW Speed 1/2/3/4/5 Selects the ATW (auto tracing white) transition speed (1 is fastest). ATW Mode Natural/Pure Sets the ATW (Auto tracing white balance) mode. Natural:Automatically adjusts ATW to obtain a natural ambiance according to the lighting of the scene. Pure:Automatically adjusts the ATW to obtain a result closer to primary colors without residual bluish or reddish colors. Approximate color temperature display (Approx. 1600K to 3200K to 16000K) When Offset White<B> is set to On, this specifies the offset (as a color temperature) to add to the white balance in memory A. (Note that the error increases for higher offset color temperatures. Adjust while viewing the actual image.) Warm Cool Balance<B> –99 to ±0 to +99 Specifies a more precise color temperature, for use when a satisfactory image cannot be obtained with the Warm Cool <B> setting. AWB Fixed Area Filter White Memory On/Off On/Off Runs AWB (auto white balance) for the center of the screen. Sets the white balance memory area for each FILTER knob position number when White Balance is set to Preset or ATW. ˎˎ When Electrical CC is assigned to an assignable switch, this sets independent white balance memory areas for Electrical CC A, B, C, and D settings. ˎˎ When Electrical CC is not assigned to an assignable switch, this sets white balance memory areas for each FILTER knob position number. Operation >Offset White Makes settings related to white balance offset values. Item Setting Description Offset White<A> On/Off Selects whether to add (On) or not to add (Off) an offset value to the white balance in memory A. Warm Cool <A> Approximate color temperature display (Approx. 1600K to 3200K to 16000K) When Offset White<A> is set to On, this specifies the offset (as a color temperature) to add to the white balance in memory A. (Note that the error increases for higher offset color temperatures. Adjust while viewing the actual image.) Operation >Shutter Sets the shutter operating mode. Item Setting Description Mode Speed/Angle Selects the operating mode of the electronic shutter. Speed: Sets the shutter speed as a time (units: seconds). Angle: Sets the shutter speed as an angle (units: degrees). Operation >Slow Shutter Sets the slow shutter. Item Setting Description Setting On/Off Turns the slow shutter function on/off. Number of Frames 2/3/4/5/6/7/8/16 Sets the number of accumulated frames for the slow shutter function. Item Setting Description Time Zone UTC +14:00 to UTC Greenwich to UTC –12:00 Selects the difference in time from UTC (Greenwich Mean Time) in units of 30 minutes. Operation >Time Zone Sets the time zone. 104 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu Operation >Clip Makes settings relating to clip names and management. Operation >Planning Metadata Makes settings relating to planning metadata operations. [Note] Do not assign clip names that begin with the “.” (period) symbol. Clips with names in which the first character is “.” cannot be viewed in the application software on a computer. Item Setting Description Clip Naming Title/Plan Selects the clip naming format. Title: Name specified by Title Prefix. Plan: Name specified in planning metadata (if no name is specified in planning metadata, the name specified by Title Prefix is used.) Title Prefix Text input Sets the title part (4 to 46 alphanumeric characters) of clip titles using a character string entry screen (page 92). Number Set Settings vary according to the Clip Naming setting. Sets the numeric portion of the clip name. When Clip Naming is set to Title: 0001 to 9999 When Clip Naming is set to Plan and a planning metadata file is loaded: 00001 to 99999 Operation >Update Media Updates the media’s management file. [Note] This function is not available when the file system is set to FAT. Item Setting Description Media(A) Execute/Cancel Updates the management information of the SxS memory card in slot A (execute by selecting Execute). Media(B) Execute/Cancel Updates the management information of the SxS memory card in slot B (execute by selecting Execute). Operation >GPS Turns location information (GPS) on/off. Item Setting Description GPS On/Off Turns the GPS function on/off. Item Setting Description Load from Media(A) Execute/Cancel Loads planning metadata from the SxS memory card in slot A. Execute to display a list of planning metadata files stored on the SxS memory card in slot A. Select a file to display the properties screen. [Note] This item is not displayed when the file system is set to FAT. Load from Media(B) Execute/Cancel Loads planning metadata from the SxS memory card in slot B. Execute to display a list of planning metadata files stored on the SxS memory card in slot B. Select a file to display the properties screen. [Note] This item is not displayed when the file system is set to FAT. Properties Execute/Cancel Displays the planning metadata content loaded in the camcorder (execute by selecting Execute). Clear Memory Execute/Cancel Clears the planning metadata loaded in the camcorder (execute by selecting Execute). Clip Name Disp Title1(ASCII)/Title2(UTF-8) Selects the display format if the clip name is specified in planning metadata (page 57). Sort by Date/Time (0-9)/ Date/Time (9-0) Date/Time (0-9): Sort the file list in ascending order in the Date/Time column (oldest creation date at the top). Date/Time (9-0): Sort the file list in descending order in the Date/Time column (newest creation date at the top). Operation >USB Makes settings related to copying clips from the recording media inserted in an SxS card slot of the camcorder to USB media. Item Setting Description Select Folder Selects a folder on the USB media. Creates a new folder on the USB media. View Clip List Displays a list of clips on the USB media. Rename Folder Renames a folder on the USB media. Error Check On/Off Selects whether to perform error checking when copying clips from the recording media inserted in an SxS card slot of the camcorder to USB media. 105 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Operation Menu Operation >USB Makes settings related to copying clips from the recording media inserted in an SxS card slot of the camcorder to USB media. Item Setting Description Format USB Execute/Cancel Formats the USB media (execute by selecting Execute). Copy to USB Media(A) to USB/ Media(B) to USB/ Media(A)(B) to USB Selects the target slot when copying all clips from an SxS card slot. Media(A) to USB: Copy all clips from the recording media inserted in slot A. Media(B) to USB: Copy all clips from the recording media inserted in slot B. Media(A)(B) to USB: Copy all clips from the recording media inserted in slot A and slot B. Media Remain (Free space: numeric display and bar display) Displays the remaining free space on the USB media. Operation >Flash Band Reduce Corrects the flashband phenomena. [Note] This item is disabled (grayed out) during recording and when Slow&Quick is set to On. Item Setting Description Setting On/Off Turns the flashband reduction function on/off. [Notes] ˎˎ Momentary noise may occur due to discontinuous video and audio when switching Flash Band Reduce on/off. ˎˎ Even when Flash Band Reduce is set to On, the function does not operate if the SHUTTER switch is set to ON. ˎˎ The setting returns to the default value when power is switched off. 106 000 7. Menu Display and Settings Paint Menu Default values are shown underlined and in bold text. Paint >Switch Status Turns various correction functions and the test signal on/off. Item Setting Description Color Temp <A> 1500K to 3200K to 50000K Displays the white balance color temperature saved in memory A. Color Temp Balance <A> –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance gain value saved in memory A (linked to R gain and B gain). R Gain <A> –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance R gain value saved in memory A. B Gain <A> –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance B gain value saved in memory A. If set to Off, it is reset to On when power is next turned on. Color Temp <B> 1500K to 3200K to 50000K Displays the white balance color temperature saved in memory B. Color Temp Balance <B> –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance gain values saved in memory B (linked R gain and B gain). R Gain <B> –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance R gain value saved in memory B. B Gain <B> –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance B gain value saved in memory B. Item Setting Description Gamma On/Off Turns the gamma function on/off. Black Gamma On/Off Turns the black gamma function on/off. Matrix On/Off Turns the matrix function on/off. Knee On/Off Turns the knee function on/off. White Clip On/Off Turns the white clip function on/off. [Note] Detail On/Off Turns the detail function on/off. Aperture On/Off Turns the aperture function on/off. Flare On/Off Turns the flare correction function on/off. Test Saw On/Off Turns the test signal on/off. Paint >HDR Paint Setting Sets HDR settings when Shooting Mode is set to HDR. Paint >Black Sets the black level (image level without lighting). You can achieve a desired look by adjusting the black level for deeper or shallower blacks. [Note] Displayed only when using CBKZ-SLHL1 HDR LICENSE (option). Item Setting Description HLG Look Natural/Mild/Live Sets the HLG type in HDR mode. Natural: Characteristic conforming to ITU-R BT.2100(HLG) Mild: Characteristic conforming to ITU-R BT.2100(HLG) that delivers milder overall picture quality than Live Look. Live: Characteristic conforming to ITU-R BT.2100(HLG) that delivers improved HDR performance. HDR Black Offset –95 to ±0 to +103 Paint >White Sets the color temperature, and adjusts white balance manually. Sets the HDR black offset relative to the SDR setting (Master Black) in HDR mode. Item Setting Description Master Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the master black level. R Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the R black level. B Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the B black level. Paint >Flare Makes settings related to flare correction. Flare is a phenomenon where the video level increases across the entire image due to the effects of bright regions in the image, increasing the brightness of darker regions and reducing contrast. It is caused by reflected light inside the lens. Item Setting Description Setting On/Off Turns the flare correction function on/off. Master Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the master flare correction level. HDR Knee On/Off Turns the HDR signal knee correction function on/ off when in HDR mode. HDR Knee Point –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the knee point for HDR signals when HDR Knee is set to On. R Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the R flare correction level. G Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the G flare correction level. B Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the B flare correction level. HDR Knee Slope –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the knee slope for HDR signals when HDR Knee is set to On. HDR Black Compression On/Off Turns the function to compress the Black level of the HDR video to match the SDR video on/off. 107 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Paint Menu Paint >Gamma(HDR) Displays HDR gamma settings. Paint >Gamma Makes settings related to gamma correction. Gamma correction allows you to adjust the contrast of the image to significantly alter the impression of an image. [Note] Displayed only when using CBKZ-SLHL1 HDR LICENSE (option). Item Setting Description Item Setting Description Gamma Select HLG(Natural) HLG(Mild) --- HDR gamma settings (display only) Gamma Select Settings vary according to the Gamma Category setting. Selects the gamma table used for gamma correction. When Gamma Category is STD STD1 DVW: DVW camcorder equivalent STD2 x4.5: ×4.5 gain STD3 x3.5: ×3.5 gain STD4 240M: SMPTE-240M equivalent STD5 R709: ITU-R709 equivalent STD6 x5.0: ×5.0 gain Paint >Gamma Makes settings related to gamma correction. Gamma correction allows you to adjust the contrast of the image to significantly alter the impression of an image. Item Setting Description Setting On/Off Turns the gamma correction function on/off. Step Gamma 0.35 to 0.45 to 0.90 (0.05 steps) Sets a gamma correction value in 0.05 steps. Master Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the master gamma level. R Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the R gamma level. G Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the G gamma level. B Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the B gamma level. Gamma Category STD/HG/User Selects the gamma category. STD: Standard gamma curve for video signals HG: Gamma curve that imitates gradation and color reproduction of shooting with film User: User-defined gamma curve created using CvpFileEditorTM V4.2 When Gamma Category is HG HG1 3250G36: Compresses 325% video input to 100% video output. HG2 4600G30: Compresses 460% video input to 100% video output. HG3 3259G40: Compresses 325% video input to 109% video output. HG4 4609G33: Compresses 460% video input to 109% video output. When Gamma Category is User User 1: Gamma table registered in User1 User 2: Gamma table registered in User2 User 3: Gamma table registered in User3 User 4: Gamma table registered in User4 User 5: Gamma table registered in User5 Paint >Black Gamma Makes settings related to black gamma correction. Black gamma correction allows you to reproduce gradations and colors in black or near-black (dark) parts of the picture. Item Setting Description Setting On/Off Turns the black gamma correction function on/ off. [Note] To enable the black gamma function, set Saturation Mode to Low Key. Range Low/L.Mid/H.Mid Selects the effective range of the black gamma correction. Low: 0 to 3.6% L.Mid: 0 to 7.2% H.Mid: 0 to 14.4% Master Black Gamma –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the master black gamma level. 108 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Paint Menu Paint >Knee Makes settings related to knee correction. Knee correction is processing that prevents blown out highlights by compressing the bright parts of the image in response to the upper limit for the dynamic range of the recorded/output image. The signal level where knee processing begins is called the “knee point,” and the slope of knee compression is called the “knee slope.” Item Setting Description Paint >Detail(HD)/Detail(SD) Makes settings related to detail adjustments in HD mode and SD mode. Detail adjustment processing improves the clarity of images by adding a detail signal to the outline of the subject. Item Setting Description Knee Aperture On/Off Turns the knee aperture correction function on/ off. Setting On/Off Turns the knee correction function on/off. Knee Aperture Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the knee aperture level. Point 75% to 95% to 109% Sets the knee point when the DCC function is off. Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Slope –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the knee slope when the DCC function is off. Sets the detail limiter for both the white-side and black-side directions. Knee Saturation On/Off Turns the knee saturation function on/off. White Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white-side detail limiter. [Note] Black Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the black-side detail limiter. V Black Limit –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the black-side V detail limiter. V Detail Creation NAM/Y/G/G+R Selects the source signal used to generate the V detail signal. NAM: V detail signal created from the R signal, V detail signal created from the G signal, or V detail signal created from the B signal, whichever signal has the highest level Y: Y signal G: G signal G+R: Mixed signal comprising the G signal and R signal in a 1:1 ratio Cross Color Suppress (SD mode) –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the cross color suppression level of the detail. To enable the knee saturation function, set Saturation Mode to Knee. Knee Saturation Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the knee saturation level. Paint >White Clip Makes settings related to white clip adjustment. White clip processing limits the maximum level of video output signals. The maximum video output signal value is called the “white clip level.” Item Setting Description Setting On/Off Turns the white clip adjustment function on/off. Level 90.0% to 109.0% The default setting varies according to the system frequency setting. Sets the white clip level. The default setting is 108.0% when the system frequency is 59.94, 29.97, 24, or 23.98. The setting is 105.0% when the system frequency is 50.25. Paint >Detail(HD)/Detail(SD) Makes settings related to detail adjustments in HD mode and SD mode. Detail adjustment processing improves the clarity of images by adding a detail signal to the outline of the subject. Item Setting Description Setting On/Off Turns the detail adjustment function on/off. Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the detail level. H/V Ratio –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the mix ratio between the H detail level and the V detail level. Crispening –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the crispening level. Level Depend On/Off Turns the level dependence adjustment function on/off. Level Depend Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the level dependence level. Frequency –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the center frequency of the H detail signal (larger values give finer detail). [Note] This setting is disabled if the detail adjustment function is Off, and when Operation Format Frequency in the setup menu is set to 50 or 25. Paint >Aperture Makes settings related to aperture correction. Aperture correction processing improves resolution by adding high-frequency aperture signals to the video signal, which corrects deterioration due to high-frequency characteristics. Item Setting Description Setting On/Off Turns the aperture correction function on/off. Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the aperture level. 109 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Paint Menu Paint >Skin Detail Makes settings related to skin detail correction. Skin detail correction processing increases or decreases the detail level of a specified color range, for the purpose of obtaining attractive reproduction of skin tones. Item Setting Description Setting On/Off Turns the skin detail correction function on/off. Area Detection Execute/Cancel Displays a color detection screen for detecting colors for skin detail correction (execute by selecting Execute). Area Indication On/Off Turns the display of a zebra pattern in areas targeted for skin detail correction on/off. Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the skin detail level. Saturation –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the saturation of the color targeted for skin detail correction. Hue 0 to 359 Sets the hue of the color targeted for skin detail correction. Width 0 to 40 to 90 Sets the range for the hue of the color targeted for skin detail correction. Paint >Matrix Makes settings related to matrix correction. Adjusts the hue and vividness of the image using matrix correction. You can select a matrix to achieve a specific purpose from a parameter set predefined in “Preset Matrix.” You can also define arbitrary parameters yourself in a “User Matrix.” The “Adaptive Matrix” function adjusts the matrix to control color reproduction. Item Setting Description Paint >Matrix Makes settings related to matrix correction. Adjusts the hue and vividness of the image using matrix correction. You can select a matrix to achieve a specific purpose from a parameter set predefined in “Preset Matrix.” You can also define arbitrary parameters yourself in a “User Matrix.” The “Adaptive Matrix” function adjusts the matrix to control color reproduction. Item Setting Description User Matrix G-R –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a user-defined G-R user matrix. User Matrix G-B –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a user-defined G-B user matrix. User Matrix B-R –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a user-defined B-R user matrix. User Matrix B-G –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets a user-defined B-G user matrix. Paint >Multi Matrix Makes settings related to multi matrix correction. Multi-matrix correction sets the saturation using a 16-axis hue space. Item Setting Description Setting On/Off Turns the multi matrix correction function on/off. Area Indication On/Off Turns the display of a zebra pattern in the color area targeted for multi matrix correction on/off. Color Detection Execute/Cancel Displays a color detection screen for detecting colors for multi matrix correction (execute by selecting Execute). Reset Execute/Cancel Sets all hue and saturation on each axis to default values (execute by selecting Execute). Axis B/B+/MG–/MG/MG+/R/R+/YL–/ YL/YL+/G–/G/G+/CY/CY+/B– Sets the color targeted for multi matrix correction (16-axis mode) Hue –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the hue of the color targeted for multi matrix correction for each 16-axis mode. –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the saturation of the color targeted for multi matrix correction for each 16-axis mode. Setting On/Off Turns the matrix correction function on/off. Adaptive Matrix On/Off Turns the adaptive matrix function on/off. Preset Matrix On/Off Turns the preset matrix function on/off. Saturation Preset Select 1: SMPTE240M 2: ITU-709 3: SMPTE Wide 4: NTSC 5: EBU 6: PAL Selects a preset matrix. 1: SMPTE240M: SMPTE-240M equivalent 2: ITU-709: ITU-709 equivalent 3: SMPTE Wide: SMPTE WIDE equivalent 4: NTSC: NTSC equivalent 5: EBU: EBU equivalent 6: PAL: PAL equivalent Paint >V Modulation Makes settings related to V modulation shading correction. V modulation shading corrects the vertical slope of the sensitivity arising from the relationship between the lens and prism. Item Setting Description On/Off Turns the V modulation shading correction function on/off. User Matrix On/Off Turns the user matrix correction function on/off. Setting Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the saturation of the color of the entire image. Master V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the master V modulation level. Phase –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the color tone (phase) of the entire image. R V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the V modulation level of the R signal. Sets a user-defined R-G user matrix. G V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the V modulation level of the G signal. Sets a user-defined R-B user matrix. B V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the V modulation level of the B signal. User Matrix R-G User Matrix R-B –99 to ±0 to +99 –99 to ±0 to +99 110 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Paint Menu Paint >Low Key Saturation Makes settings related to low key saturation correction. Corrects the saturation of colors in dark parts of the image. Item Setting Description Setting On/Off Turns the low key saturation correction function on/off. [Note] To enable the low key saturation function, set Saturation Mode to Low Key. Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the saturation of colors in low luminance areas. Range Low/L.Mid/H.Mid Selects the luminance level for which low key saturation is enabled. Paint >Saturation Mode Makes settings related to saturation correction. Item Setting Description Saturation Mode Knee/Low Key Selects whether the saturation function operates at high levels (Knee) or low levels (Low Key). Knee Saturation On/Off Turns the knee saturation function on/off. Black Gamma On/Off Turns the black gamma correction function on/ off. Low Key Saturation On/Off Turns the low key saturation function on/off. Paint >Noise Suppression Makes settings related to noise suppression (noise compression). This allows you to effectively suppress noise components while preserving fine edge components of the subject. Item Setting Description Setting On/Off Turns the noise suppression function on/off. Level Low/Mid/High Selects the noise suppression level. 111 000 7. Menu Display and Settings Maintenance Menu Default values are shown underlined and in bold text. Maintenance >White Shading Makes settings related to white shading correction. White shading is required for each different lens to correct luminance and color irregularities in bright areas arising from lens characteristics. Item Setting Description Channel Select Red/Green/Blue Selects the target for white shading correction. White H Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the SAW white shading correction value for the horizontal direction. White H Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the parabola white shading correction value for the horizontal direction. White V Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the SAW white shading correction value for the vertical direction. White V Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the parabola white shading correction value for the vertical direction. White Saw/Para On/Off Turns the white shading SAW/parabola correction function on/off. Maintenance >Black Shading Makes settings related to black shading correction. Item Setting Description Channel Select Red/Green/Blue Selects the target for black shading correction. Black H Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the SAW black shading correction value for the horizontal direction. Black H Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the parabola black shading correction value for the horizontal direction. Black V Saw –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the SAW black shading correction value for the vertical direction. Black V Para –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the parabola black shading correction value for the vertical direction. Black Saw/Para On/Off Turns the black shading SAW/parabola correction function on/off. Master Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the master black level. Master Gain (TMP) –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/ 18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB Sets a temporary master gain value. Maintenance >Battery Makes settings related to batteries. Item Setting Description Near End:Info Battery 5%/10%/15%...95%/100% Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery Near End” warning when using a BP-FLX75/ GL65A/GL95A/GL95B battery pack. End:Info Battery 0%/1%/2%/3%/4%/5% Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery End” warning when using a BP-FLX75/GL65A/ GL95A/GL95B battery pack. Near End:Sony Battery 11.5V to 17V (0.1V steps) Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery Near End” warning when using a BP-L60S/L80S battery pack. End:Sony Battery 11.0V to 12.5V (0.1V steps) Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery End” warning when using a BP-L60S/L80S battery pack. Near End:Other Battery 11.5V to 11.8V to 17.0V (0.1V steps) Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery Near End” warning when using a non-Sony battery pack. End:Other Battery 11.0V to 14.0V (0.1V steps) Detected Battery Sony Info Battery/ Displays the result of automatic battery pack type Sony Battery/Other Battery/DC IN detection. Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery End” warning when using a non-Sony battery pack. Maintenance >DC Voltage Alarm Sets alarms relating to external DC supply voltage. Item Setting Description DC Low Voltage1 11.5V to 17V (0.1V steps) Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery Near End” warning when using an external power source connected to the DC IN connector. DC Low Voltage2 11.0V to 14.0V (0.1V steps) Sets the threshold value for displaying the “Battery End” warning when using an external power source connected to the DC IN connector. Maintenance >Audio Makes settings related to audio. Item Setting Description Front MIC Select Mono/Stereo Selects whether the front microphone is monaural (Mono) or stereo (Stereo). Rear XLR Auto On/Off Turns the automatic detection function on/off for detecting cable connections on the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors on the rear panel. 112 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu Maintenance >Audio Makes settings related to audio. Maintenance >Audio Makes settings related to audio. Item Setting Description Item Setting Description Front MIC CH1 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/ –40dB/–30dB Selects the reference level of the front microphone for channel 1. Output Limiter On/Off Turns the audio output limiter on/off. Front MIC CH2 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/ –40dB/–30dB Selects the reference level of the front microphone for channel 2. CH1 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 1 wind noise reduction filter on/off. Rear MIC CH1 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/ –40dB/–30dB Selects the reference input level when the AUDIO IN CH1 switch is set to MIC. CH2 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 2 wind noise reduction filter on/off. Rear MIC CH2 Ref –70dB/–60dB/–50dB/ –40dB/–30dB Selects the reference input level when the AUDIO IN CH2 switch is set to MIC. CH3 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 3 wind noise reduction filter on/off. Line Input Ref +4dB/0dB/–3dB/EBUL Selects the reference input level when the AUDIO IN CH1 and AUDIO IN CH2 switches are set to LINE. CH4 Wind Filter On/Off Turns the channel 4 wind noise reduction filter on/off. 1kHz Tone on Color Bars On/Off/Auto Sets whether to output (On) or not output (Off) a 1 kHz test signal in color bar mode. Auto: Outputs a test signal only when the AUDIO SELECT CH1 switch is set to AUTO. MIC CH1 Level Side1/Front/Front+Side1 Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level when recording input audio from the front microphone on channel 1. Side1: LEVEL knob (left) on the side panel Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel Front+Side1: LEVEL knob (left) and MIC LEVEL knob (linked control) MIC CH2 Level Side2/Front/Front+Side2 Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level when recording input audio from the front microphone on channel 2. Side2: LEVEL knob (right) on the side panel Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel Front+Side2: LEVEL knob (right) and MIC LEVEL knob (linked control) Rear1/WRR Level Side1/Front/Front+Side1 Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level of a wireless microphone or a device connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1 connector on the rear panel. Side1: LEVEL knob (left) on the side panel Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel Front+Side1: LEVEL knob (left) and MIC LEVEL knob (linked control) Min Alarm Volume Off/Set Selects the volume when the ALARM knob is turned all the way down. Off: Inaudible Set: Audible Speaker Attenuate Off/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB Selects the volume from the monitor speakers (does not affect earphone volume). Headphone Out Mono/Stereo Selects whether the earphones are monaural (Mono) or stereo (Stereo). Reference Level –20dB/–18dB/–16dB/ –12dB/EBUL Sets the reference input level. It also sets the output level of the 1 kHz test signal. Reference Out +4dB/0dB/–3dB/EBUL Sets the output level relative to the reference input level. CH1&2 AGC Mode Mono/Stereo Automatically adjusts the input level of analog audio signals recorded on channels 1 and 2, and selects whether to make the adjustments separately for each channel (Mono) or in stereo mode (Stereo). CH3&4 AGC Mode Mono/Stereo Automatically adjusts the input level of analog audio signals recorded on channels 3 and 4, and selects whether to make the adjustments separately for each channel (Mono) or in stereo mode (Stereo). AGC Spec –6dB/–9dB/–12dB/ –15dB/–17dB Selects the AGC characteristic (saturation level). Limiter Mode Off/–6dB/–9dB/–12dB/ –15dB/–17dB Selects the limiter characteristic (saturation level) for large input signals when adjusting the audio input level manually. Select Off if not using the limiter. 113 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu Maintenance >Audio Makes settings related to audio. Maintenance >WRR Setting Makes settings related to the wireless tuner. Item Setting Description Item Setting Description Rear2/WRR Level Side2/Front/Front+Side2 Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level of a wireless microphone or a device connected to the AUDIO IN CH-2 connector on the rear panel. Side2: LEVEL knob (right) on the side panel Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel Front+Side2: LEVEL knob (right) and MIC LEVEL knob (linked control) TX Input Level ---/Mic/Line Displays whether the input level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH Select is set to microphone (Mic) or line (Line). TX ATT Level --- Sets the ATT level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH Select. (The setting range varies depending on the transmitter.) TX LCF Frequency --- Sets the low cut filter frequency of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH Select. (The setting range varies depending on the transmitter.) TX System Delay Auto/0.0ms to 8.0ms Sets the amount of audio delay. Auto: Automatically corrects for the amount of delay so that the delay in the audio from the wireless tuner is zero. 0.0ms to 8.0ms: Sets the amount of estimated wireless system delay, for cases in which several wireless systems are being used via a device such as an audio mixer. TX RF Power High (Power value) mW/Mid (Power value) mW/Low (Power value) mW Sets the RF power level of the transmitter communicating on the channel selected by WRR CH Select. (The setting range varies depending on the transmitter.) TX Power Save Active/Sleep Sets the power saving mode of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH Select. Active: Set the transmitter to startup mode. Sleep: Set the transmitter to power saving mode. TX-Cam Power Sync Off/On Sets whether the transmitter power-save state is also switched in sync with the POWER switch of the camcorder. Audio CH3 Level Audio CH4 Level Side3/Front/Front+Side3 Side4/Front/Front+Side4 Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level recorded on channel 3. Side3: LEVEL knob on the side panel Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel Front+Side3: LEVEL knob and MIC LEVEL knob (linked control) Selects the knob for adjusting the audio level recorded on channel 4. Side4: LEVEL knob on the side panel Front: MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel Front+Side4: LEVEL knob and MIC LEVEL knob (linked control) Maintenance >WRR Setting Makes settings related to the wireless tuner. Item Setting Description WRR Valid CH Sel All/CH1 Selects whether to enable channels 1 and 2 of the wireless tuner (All) or channel 1 only (CH1). WRR CH Select TX1/TX2 Selects the reception channel for display in the menu. TX1: Displays channel 1. TX2: Displays channel 2. WRR Delay Comp On/Off Selects whether to enable (On) or disable (Off) the delay compensation function for wireless input audio. (When On is selected, all E-E output audio is delayed by about 8 ms.) TX --- Displays the name of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH Select. TX Audio Peak ---/Peak Displays whether the AF level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH Select are over peak. 114 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu Maintenance >Time Code Makes settings related to timecode. Maintenance >Camera Config Makes settings related to various camcorder operations. Item Setting Description Item Setting Description TC Out Auto/Generator Selects the timecode output. Auto: Outputs the timecode generator value during recording, and the timecode reader value during playback. Generator: Outputs the timecode generator value during recording and playback. HD SDI Remote I/F Off/Characters/ Green Tally/Red Tally DF/NDF DF/NDF Selects drop-frame mode (DF) or non-drop-frame mode (NDF). LTC UBIT Fix/Time Sets the data recorded in LTC user bits. Fix: Records user-specified data. Time: Records the current time. Counter Display Counter/Duration Select the method used to reset the counter value displayed on the viewfinder screen. Counter: Continue to increment until the RESET button is pressed. Duration: Reset each time that recording is started. Sets whether to enable the recording control function for an external device connected to the SDI OUT 1/2 connector (HD SDI output) of the camcorder. If enabled, it selects the indicator used to display the recording state of the external device. Off: Recording control function is disabled. Chara: Displayed using the external device control indicator on the status display in the viewfinder. G-Tally: Displayed using the TALLY indicator (green tally) in the viewfinder. R-Tally: Displayed using the REC indicator (recording red tally) in the viewfinder. Color Bars Select ARIB/100%/75%/SMPTE Selects the color bar type. User Menu Only On/Off Selects whether to display the User menu only (On) or display the menu list (Off) when the camcorder is displaying the menu. User Menu with Lock On/Off Selects whether to lock the menu display, showing the User menu only. On: Enter an arbitrary passcode number to lock the menu display. (Only the User menu is displayed.) Off: Enter the passcode number entered when “On” was selected to unlock the menu display. (When unlocked, the normal menu list is displayed.) Maintenance >Essence Mark Makes settings related to essence marks. Item Setting Description Find Mode Clip/Rec Start Sets the operation when the NEXT/PREV button is pressed. Rec Start: Moves to the next or the previous recording start mark, respectively. Clip: Moves to the start of the next clip when the NEXT button is pressed. Moves to the start of the current clip when the PREV button is pressed (or moves to the start of the previous clip if the PREV button is pressed at the start of the clip). [Note] In normal menu display operation, this item is not displayed. For details about menu display operation, see page 93. RM Common Memory On/Off Selects whether to share (On) or not share (Off) settings between when using a remote control unit connection and when the camcorder is operated locally. 115 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu Maintenance >Camera Config Makes settings related to various camcorder operations. Maintenance >White Filter Makes settings related to filters. Item Setting Description Item Setting Description RM Rec Start RM/Camera/PARA Selects which of the recording start/stop buttons are enabled when a remote control unit is connected. RM: Remote control unit Camera: Camcorder PARA: Both ND Filter C.Temp On/Off Turns the function that assigns electrical CC filters to ND filters on/off. ND FLT C.Temp<1> 3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K Selects the color temperature when electrical CC filters are assigned to ND filters (filter 1). ND FLT C.Temp<2-4> 3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K Selects the color temperature when electrical CC filters are assigned to ND filters (filters 2 to 4). Electrical CC<A> 3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K Selects the color temperature when the electrical CC filter switching function is assigned to an assignable switch. Electrical CC<B> 3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K Selects the color temperature when the electrical CC filter switching function is assigned to an assignable switch. Electrical CC<C> 3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K/ --- Selects the color temperature when the electrical CC filter switching function is assigned to an assignable switch. Select “----” if not using C. Electrical CC<D> 3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K/ --- Selects the color temperature when the electrical CC filter switching function is assigned to an assignable switch. Select “----” if not using D. SET Key on Thumbnail Pause/Play Selects the operation when the MENU knob is pressed with only one thumbnail selected. ALAC Auto/Off Sets whether to execute ALAC (Auto Lens Aberration Correction) automatically. Auto: Execute ALAC automatically when an ALAC-compatible lens is attached and ALAC is enabled. Off: Do not execute. [Note] Depending on the aberration correction lens, the aberration correction function may not be activated immediately (“ALAC” does not appear on the viewfinder screen) after turning the power on, even when this setting is set to Auto. If this occurs, turn the lens zoom ring and focus ring to the end stop and back, and check whether the “ALAC” indicator appears on the viewfinder screen. Contact a Sony service representative for information about aberration correction lenses. Maintenance >DCC Adjust Makes settings related to DCC (dynamic contrast control). Item Setting Description DCC Function Select DCC/Fix Selects the setting method for the knee point when the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to CAM with DCC on. DCC: Automatically adjusts the knee point to match the luminance of the subject. Fix: Sets the knee point to a fixed value. DCC D Range 400%/450%/500%/550%/ 600% Sets the dynamic range when the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to CAM with DCC on. DCC Point –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the DCC minimum knee point. DCC Gain –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the gain relative to the DCC detected value. DCC Delay Time –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the DCC control speed (speed of response to changes in the video). DCC Peak Filter –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the response sensitivity relative to the peaks in DCC detected values. Maintenance >Preset White Makes settings related to white balance preset values. Item Setting Description Color Temp <P> 1500K to 3200K to 50000K Sets the white balance preset value. Color Temp Balance<P> –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the fine color temperature settings, for use when a satisfactory image cannot be obtained using Color Temp <P>. R Gain <P> –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the R gain preset value. B Gain <P> –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the B gain preset value. AWB Enable <P> On/Off Turns execution of the AWB (auto white balance) function on/off when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST. 116 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu Maintenance >Flicker Reduce Makes settings related to the flicker correction function. You can correct the flicker created when shooting a subject under lighting where the brightness varies periodically, such as fluorescent lighting, due to the relationship between the frequency and the recording frame rate. Item Setting Description Mode Auto/On/Off Sets the operation of the flicker correction function. On: Always operating. Auto: Operates when flicker is detected. Off: Does not operate. Frequency 60Hz/50Hz Synchronizes with the power supply frequency of lighting causing flicker. The factory setting is 60Hz when System Frequency is set to 59.94, 29.97, or 23.98. The factory setting is 50Hz when System Frequency is set to 50 or 25. Maintenance >Genlock Makes settings related to genlock. Item Setting Description Genlock On/Off Turns the genlock function on/off. Reference Internal/External(HD)/ External(SD)/SDI IN/CA Displays the type of reference signal used by the camcorder. Maintenance >APR Makes settings related to automatic pixel noise reduction. Item Setting Description APR Execute/Cancel Executes the automatic pixel noise reduction function to suppress white flecks in SLS mode (execute by selecting Execute). Reset Execute/Cancel Deletes white flecks data that were added by execution of the APR and automatic black balance adjustment functions (execute by selecting Execute). Maintenance >Setup for Mobile App Configures connection settings using the network setup assist tool. Item Setting Setup Starts configuring connection settings using the network setup assist tool. Maintenance >Access Authentication Makes settings related to access authentication. Item Setting User Name (Displays the current user name.) Sets the user name (arbitrary name for access authentication). Set to “admin” by factory default. Password ******* Maintenance >Auto Shading Executes auto black shading correction. Item Setting Description Auto Black Shading Execute/Cancel Executes auto black shading correction (execute by selecting Execute). Reset Black Shading Execute/Cancel Clears the black shading correction value (execute by selecting Execute). Master Gain (TMP) –3dB/0dB/3dB/6dB/9dB/12dB/ 18dB/24dB/30dB/36dB/42dB Sets a temporary master gain value. (The value is the same as the value selected with the GAIN switch.) Description Description Sets the password for access authentication. Valid passwords must be 8 characters or longer, and contain at least one alphanumeric character and at least one numeric character. The entered password is displayed using asterisks. The entered characters are visible while the SHIFT key is pressed. [Note] The password setting is reset when updating the firmware of the unit from a version prior to 5.0 to version 5.0 or later, or a version prior to 6.1 to version 6.1 or later. In this case, set the password again. Generate Password Show Settings Execute/Cancel Automatically generates a password for access authentication. Displays the user name and password for access authentication. 117 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu Maintenance >Network Makes settings related to network connections. Maintenance >Network Makes settings related to network connections. Item Setting Description Item Setting Description Wi-Fi Station Detail Settings Password (password of access point) Enter the password of the access point of the destination to which to connect in Wi-Fi Station mode. The entered password is displayed using asterisks. The entered characters are visible while the SHIFT key is pressed. The following characters are valid. Alphabetic (upper case): A to Z Alphabetic (lower case): a to z Numeric: 0 to 9 Symbols: !"#$%&'*+,/:;<=>?[\]^`{|}~ DHCP (On/Off) Sets DHCP in Wi-Fi Station mode. When set to On, an IP address is automatically assigned to the camcorder. To enter the camcorder IP address manually, set to Off. IP Address (DHCP/On: obtain automatically, DHCP/Off: 192.168.1.50) Enter the IP address of the camcorder. Enabled only when DHCP is Off. Subnet Mask (DHCP/On: obtain automatically, DHCP/Off: 255.255.255.0) Enter the subnet mask of the camcorder. Enabled only when DHCP is Off. Setting On/Off Turns the network function on/off. Wi-Fi Mode Wi-Fi Access Point/ Wi-Fi Station/Off Sets the operating mode for wireless LAN connections. NFC Execute/Cancel Initiates a one-touch connection using NFC (execute by selecting Execute). WPS Execute/Cancel Starts Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) (execute by selecting Execute). Channel Auto(5GHz)/Auto/CH1/CH2/ CH3/CH4/CH5/CH6/CH7/CH8/ CH9/CH10/CH11 Sets the wireless LAN channel. SSID & Password (SSID display) (Password display) Displays the SSID and password. SSID (SSID display) Displays the SSID of the access point of the destination to which to connect in Wi-Fi Station mode. Wi-Fi Station Remote On/Off Enables/disables operation from a Wi-Fi remote control, web menu, and the “Content Browser Mobile” application when connected to a network using Wi-Fi Station mode. Wi-Fi Station Detail Settings Scan Networks (Execute/Cancel) Starts auto detection of network destinations for connection (execute by selecting Execute). Gateway (DHCP/On: obtain Enter the gateway for the access point. automatically, DHCP/Off: 0.0.0.0) Enabled only when DHCP is Off. SSID (SSID of access point) Enter the SSID of the access point of the destination to which to connect in Wi-Fi Station mode. The following characters are valid. Alphabetic (upper case): A to Z Alphabetic (lower case): a to z Numeric: 0 to 9 Symbols: !"#$%&'*+,/:;<=>?[\]^`{|}~ DNS Auto (On/Off) Enables/disables automatic DNS. When set to On, the address of the DNS server is obtained automatically. Primary DNS Server (DNS Auto/ On: obtain automatically, DNS Auto/Off: 0.0.0.0) Enter the primary DNS server for the router. Enabled only when DNS Auto is Off. Secondary DNS Server (DNS Auto/On: obtain automatically, DNS Auto/Off: 0.0.0.0) Enter the secondary DNS server for the router. Enabled only when DNS Auto is Off. [Note] “Auto(5GHz)” may not be displayed, depending on the wireless LAN module used. Device Name (Wi-Fi) Displays the name of network device attached to the USB wireless LAN module connector IP Address (Wi-Fi) Displays the IP address when connected to a wireless LAN. Subnet Mask (Wi-Fi) Displays the subnet mask when connected to a wireless LAN. MAC Address (Wi-Fi) Displays the MAC address of the USB Wireless LAN Module attached to the camcorder. 118 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu Maintenance >Network Makes settings related to network connections. Maintenance >Network Makes settings related to network connections. Item Setting Description Item Setting Description Regenerate Password Execute/Cancel Regenerates a password (execute by selecting Execute). Wired LAN Detail Settings DHCP (On/Off) Modem On/Off Enables/disables the network connection using a 3G/4G modem or USB tethering. Modem Remote On/Off Enables/disables the web UI, Wi-Fi remote control, and CBM remote control when a modem is connected. Enables/disables DHCP. When set to On, an IP address is automatically assigned to the camcorder. To enter the camcorder IP address manually, set to Off. IP Address (DHCP/On: obtain automatically, DHCP/Off: 192.168.2.50) Enter the IP address of the camcorder. Enabled only when DHCP is Off. Subnet Mask (DHCP/On: obtain automatically, DHCP/Off: 255.255.255.0) Enter the subnet mask of the camcorder. Enabled only when DHCP is Off. [Note] The functions are disabled regardless of this setting when a 3G/4G modem is connected. Public Key Creation Execute/Cancel Generates a public key/private key. Gateway (DHCP/On: obtain Enter the gateway for the access point. automatically, DHCP/Off: 0.0.0.0) Enabled only when DHCP is Off. [Note] The generated public key/private key will be deleted when Maintenance >Network Reset is executed. Public Key Clear Execute/Cancel Create Key Date DNS Auto (On/Off) Enables/disables automatic DNS. When set to On, the address of the DNS server is obtained automatically. Primary DNS Server (DNS Auto/ On: obtain automatically, DNS Auto/Off: 0.0.0.0) Enter the primary DNS server for the router. Enabled only when DNS Auto is Off. Secondary DNS Server (DNS Auto/On: obtain automatically, DNS Auto/Off: 0.0.0.0) Enter the secondary DNS server for the router. Enabled only when DNS Auto is Off. Clears a public key/private key. Displays the creation date of the public key/ private key. Wired LAN Enable/Disable Enables/disables wired LAN connection. Wired LAN Remote On/Off If connected to a network using a LAN cable, operation from a Wi-Fi remote control, web menu, and “Content Browser Mobile” is enabled. Maintenance >Network Client Mode Makes settings related to network client mode for connection with C3 Portal or Sony Network RX Station. [Note] Network client mode cannot be set if values are not entered for all items. Item Setting Description Setting On/Off Turns network client mode on/off. [Note] When set to On, the firmware version cannot be updated. Preset Select Preset 1/Preset 2/Preset 3 Selects preset settings (Preset 1/Preset 2/Preset 3) comprising network client mode connection settings configured beforehand. 119 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu Maintenance >Network Client Mode Makes settings related to network client mode for connection with C3 Portal or Sony Network RX Station. Maintenance >File Transfer Makes settings related to network transfer of data on SxS memory cards in the camcorder. Item Setting Description Remote File Transfer Enable/Disable Sets whether to enable/disable switching to transfer mode to transfer original files recorded on the camcorder by remote operation over a network. Enable: Enable switching to transfer mode by remote operation over a network. It is not necessary to execute a transfer using Maintenance >File Transfer. Disable: Disable switching to transfer mode by remote operation over a network. It is necessary to execute a transfer using Maintenance >File Transfer. Auto Upload (Proxy) Off/On Turns proxy file auto transfer on/off. Default Upload Server Selects the destination server for uploading Sony Ci/NCM RX Server/Server Settings1/Server Settings2/Server original files and proxy files. For Server Settings1 to 3, the name of the servers Settings3 entered in Display Name on the Upload Settings page of the web menu are displayed. For details, see “To register a destination server” (page 80). Enables/disables ALL file operations when connected with a CCM. Always: Enable ALL file operations all the time. Onetime: Enable ALL file operations one time. Off: Disable ALL file operations. Clear Completed Jobs Execute/Cancel Clears the transfer completed jobs from the job list. Clear All Jobs Execute/Cancel Clears all jobs registered in the job list. Maintenance >Streaming Makes settings related to streaming. [Note] Network client mode cannot be set if values are not entered for all items. Item Setting Description Preset 1 (Preset name display) Enter the preset name. CCM Address Sets the address of the CCM to connect. Host name or IP address CCM Port (1 to 65535 (8443)) Sets the port number of the CCM to connect User Name Sets the user name for authentication of the CCM to connect. Password Sets the password of the CCM to connect. The entered password is displayed using asterisks. The entered characters are visible while the SHIFT key is pressed. NCM with Proxy (Enable/Disable) Enable: Enable proxy recording when connected with a CCM. Disable: Disable proxy recording when connected with a CCM. Camera Control (Enable/Disable) Enables/disables camera control operation when connected with a CCM. Camera Setting (Always/ Onetime/Off) Preset 2 Same as Preset 1 Same as Preset 1 Preset 3 Same as Preset 1 Same as Preset 1 Maintenance >File Transfer Makes settings related to network transfer of data on SxS memory cards in the camcorder. Item Setting Description File Transfer Execute/Cancel Switches to transfer mode (execute by selecting Execute). View Job List Displays the transfer job list. Item Setting Description Setting On/Off Turns streaming transmission on/off. [Notes] ˎˎ This setting is set to Off when you turn the power on again. ˎˎ When set to On, the monitoring function of Content Browser Mobile is not available. Preset Select Preset 1/Preset 2/Preset 3 Selects a streaming preset. The settings are common to Preset 1/Preset 2/ Preset 3. See below for descriptions for the settings in a preset. 120 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu Maintenance >Streaming Makes settings related to streaming. Maintenance >Language Selects the display language for messages. Item Setting Description Item Setting Size HD Auto/ 1280×720/ 640×360/ 480×270/ 320×180 Sets the size of video for streaming. When “HD Auto” is selected, the size is set to 1920×1080 or 1280×720, according to the setting of the recording format recorded on the SxS memory card or the format of the clip to be played back. Select English/ Espanol/Русский Item Setting Description 9Mbps/ 6Mbps/ 3Mbps/ 2Mbps/ 1Mbps/ 0.5Mbps/ 0.3Mbps(Mono L)/ 0.3Mbps(Mono R)/ 0.2Mbps(Mono L)/ 0.2Mbps(Mono R) Sets the bit rate of video for streaming. The selectable bit rate varies depending on the Size setting. Hours (System) xxxxH (xxxx hours) Displays the cumulative hours of use (cannot be reset). Hours (Reset) xxxxH (xxxx hours) Displays the cumulative hours of use (can be reset). Reset Execute/Cancel Resets the Hours (Reset) display to 0 (execute by selecting Execute). Bit Rate Type MPEG-2 TS/UDP/ MPEG-2 TS/RTP Selects the type of video for streaming. Destination Address Character string (0.0.0.0) Enter the address of the transmission destination server for streaming data. Destination Port 1 to 65545 (1234) Enter the port number of the transmission destination server used for streaming. Audio Channel CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 Selects the audio channel for the streaming output. Maintenance >Clock Set Sets the internal clock. / Selects the display language for messages. Maintenance >Hours Meter Makes settings related to the digital hours meter. [Notes] ˎˎ Audio/video data is transmitted as-is via the Internet. Accordingly, the data may potentially be exposed to other parties. Always check that the transmission destination can receive the streaming data. ˎˎ The data may be sent to an unintended party if the address or other settings are configured incorrectly. ˎˎ Not all frames may be played, depending on the status of the network. ˎˎ The picture quality may deteriorate in scenes with excessive motion. ˎˎ Not all frames may be played when the stream is set to a large size with a small bit rate. To reduce this, select a smaller size for the Size setting. Description Maintenance >Network Reset Returns network-related settings to their factory default state. Item Setting Description Reset Execute/Cancel Resets network related settings (execute by selecting Execute). [Note] The public key/private key generated using Maintenance >Network >Public Key Creation will be deleted when this item is executed. Maintenance >Fan Control Sets the fan control mode. Item Setting Description Setting Auto/Minimum/Off in Rec Selects the fan control mode. Maintenance >VF Display Setting Makes settings related to the viewfinder display. Item Setting Description Chara/Marker Brightness 5/4/3/2/1 Sets the brightness of character strings, icons, and markers superimposed in the viewfinder image. Item Setting Description Date Mode YYMMDD/MMDDYY/DDMMYY Selects the display format for dates. 12H/24H 12H/24H Selects the clock display format. Maintenance >Option Performs checks and actions on software options. Date Displays the date setting screen. Item Setting Description Time Displays the time setting screen. Type 1 (Option model name) Displays the model name of the first installed option. Type 2 (Option model name) Displays the model name of the second installed option. 121 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Maintenance Menu Maintenance >Option Performs checks and actions on software options. Item Setting Description Type 3 (Option model name) Displays the model name of the third installed option. Install Option Execute/Cancel Displays the screen for installing options (execute by selecting Execute). Maintenance >Version Displays the version of the camcorder, and updates the camcorder. Item Setting Number Version Up Description Displays the software version of the camcorder (Vx.xx). Execute/Cancel Updates the software version of the camcorder, using a card in the UTILITY SD card slot (execute by selecting Execute). The following SD cards are supported. ˎˎ SDHC memory cards (Speed Class: 4 or higher, non-UHS, Capacity: 4 GB to 32 GB) [Note] Cannot be selected when the version updater SD card is not inserted or when Network Client Mode >Setting in the Maintenance menu is set to On. Net-Func Version Number Displays the firmware version of the wireless LAN connection function of the camcorder (Vx.xx). [Note] Not displayed when Proxy Recording Mode >Setting in the Operation menu is set to Off and Network >Setting in the Maintenance menu is set to Off. Net-Func Ver.Up Execute/Cancel Updates the software for the wireless LAN connection function of the camcorder, using a card in the PROXY SD card slot (execute by selecting Execute). The following SD cards are supported. ˎˎ SDHC memory cards (Speed Class: 4 or higher, non-UHS, Capacity: 4 GB to 32 GB) ˎˎ SDXC memory cards (Speed Class: 4 or higher, non-UHS, Capacity: 64 GB to 256 GB) [Note] Cannot be selected when Network Client Mode >Setting in the Maintenance menu is set to On. 122 000 7. Menu Display and Settings File Menu Default values are shown underlined and in bold text. File >All File Makes settings related to ALL file operations. File >User File Makes settings relating to user file operations. Item Setting Description Load SD Card Displays a screen for loading user file settings from an SD card. Save SD Card Displays a screen for saving user file settings onto an SD card. File ID Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID of user files. Recall User Preset Execute/Cancel Description 3Sec Clear Preset On/Off Turns the function that clears the currents settings and presets of each item on/off, when the MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch is pushed up and held for three seconds in the CANCEL/PRST position. File >Scene File Makes settings related to scene file operations. Item Recall Internal Memory Displays a screen for recalling scene files from internal memory. Store Internal Memory Displays a screen for storing scene files in internal memory. Load SD Card Displays a screen for loading scene files from an SD card. Save SD Card Displays a screen for saving scene files onto an SD card. File ID Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID of scene files. Execute/Cancel Stores the value of menu items registered in the User menu items as the preset values (execute by selecting [Execute]). Clear User Preset Execute/Cancel Returns the current settings and preset values of menu items registered in the User menu to the factory default values (execute by selecting [Execute]). Load Customize Data On/Off Sets whether to load User menu customized information when [Load SD Card] is executed. Load White Data On/Off Sets whether to load white balance information when [Load SD Card] is executed. File >All File Makes settings related to ALL file operations. Setting Setting Returns the value of menu items registered in the User menu to the preset values (execute by selecting [Execute]). Store User Preset Item Item Description Load SD Card Displays a screen for loading All File settings from an SD card. Save SD Card Displays a screen for saving All File settings onto an SD card. File ID Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID of All Files. Scene White Data Setting On/Off Description Sets whether to reflect the while balance data of scene files when recalling scene files. File >Reference File Makes settings related to reference file operations. Item Setting Description Store Reference Execute/Cancel Stores the current settings of reference file target menu items as the preset values (execute by selecting [Execute]). Clear Reference Execute/Cancel Returns the current settings and preset values of reference file target menu items to the factory default values (execute by selecting [Execute]). Load Reference(SD Card) Execute/Cancel Loads reference file settings from and SD card and sets the preset values (execute by selecting [Execute]). Execute/Cancel Stores the preset values of reference file target menu items to an SD card (execute by selecting [Execute]). All Preset Execute/Cancel Returns all items to their preset values (execute by selecting Execute). Store All Preset Execute/Cancel Stores the current settings of all items as the preset values (execute by selecting [Execute]). Save Reference(SD Card) Clear All Preset Execute/Cancel Returns the current settings and presets of All File menu items to their factory default values (execute by selecting Execute). File ID Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID of reference files. 123 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: File Menu File >Lens File Makes settings related to lens file operations. File >Lens File Makes settings related to lens file operations. Item Setting Description Item Setting Description Display Mode Model Name/Lens ID Selects the items to display in the list box that appears when saving or loading a file. Shading Ch Select Red/Green/Blue Selects the target for white shading correction. Shading H SAW –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the SAW white shading correction value in the horizontal direction in the lens file. Shading H PARA –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the parabola white shading correction value in the horizontal direction in the lens file. Shading V SAW –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the SAW white shading correction value in the vertical direction in the lens file. Shading V PARA –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the parabola white shading correction value in the vertical direction in the lens file. Recall Internal Memory Displays a screen for recalling lens files from internal memory. Store Internal Memory Displays a screen for storing lens files in internal memory. Load SD Card Displays a screen for loading lens files from an SD card. Save SD Card Displays a screen for saving lens files onto an SD card. File ID Displays a screen for displaying/editing the file ID of lens files. File Source Displays the number of the selected file. Clear Lens Offset Execute/Cancel Clears the lens file (execute by selecting Execute). Lens Auto Recall Off/On(Lens Name)/ On(Serial Number) Sets whether to automatically recall a lens file when a lens that supports serial communication is attached. Lens Serial Number Displays the serial number of the attached lens (lenses that support serial communication only). Lens Name Displays the model name of the attached lens (lenses that support serial communication only). Lens Manufacturer Displays the name of the manufacturer of the attached lens (lenses that support serial communication only). Master V Modulation –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the SAW shading correction value in the vertical direction in the lens file. Lens Center H –40 to ±0 to +40 Sets the horizontal position of the center marker in the lens file. Lens Center V –40 to ±0 to +40 Sets the vertical position of the center marker in the lens file. R Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the R flare level in the lens file. G Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the G flare level in the lens file. B Flare –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the B flare level in the lens file. White Offset R –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance offset R channel correction value for the lens in the lens file. White Offset B –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance offset B channel correction value for the lens in the lens file. File >User Gamma Makes settings related to user gamma. Item Setting Description Current Settings Displays a list screen of the current user gamma file settings (file names). Load SD Card Displays a screen for loading User Gamma settings from an SD card. Reset 1/2/3/4/5/All Resets the settings in the selected user gamma file (execute by selecting Execute). Select All to reset all user gamma files. 124 000 7. Menu Display and Settings Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches Using the Assignable Switch item of the Operation menu, you can assign user-specified functions to the ASSIGN. 0 to 3 switches, the ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 switches, the ONLINE button, and the RET button on the lens. The following tables lists the functions that are assigned when the camcorder is shipped from the factory. Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 2 Switch Switch or button Function Assignable Switch setting ASSIGN. 0 switch No assignment Off ASSIGN. 1 switch No assignment Off Immediately after you assign a function to the ASSIGN. 2 switch or you switch the recording format, the setting of the switch at that point may not match the camcorder’s internal state. After assigning a function, switch the ASSIGN. 2 switch or power the camcorder off and on again. ASSIGN. 2 switch No assignment Off ASSIGN. 3 switch No assignment Off ASSIGNABLE 4 switch No assignment Off ASSIGNABLE 5 switch No assignment Off RET button Rec Review (if playback is allowed) Lens RET ONLINE button Auto transfer proxy clip Network Client Mode Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 0 Switch Assignable Switch setting Function State when camcorder is next powered on Off No assignment — Marker Turns the display of all markers on/off. Setting retained ATW Hold Holds the white balance setting in the ATW (auto-tracking white balance) mode — Picture Cache Rec Turns Picture Cache Rec mode on/off. Setting retained Focus Magnifier Turns the focus magnification function on/off. Setting not retained Zebra Turns zebra display on/off. Setting not retained Shot Mark1 Writes Shot Mark1. — Shot Mark2 Writes Shot Mark2. — Clip Flag OK Adds/Clears an OK mark to/from the clip being recorded or played. Setting not retained Clip Flag NG Adds/Clears an NG mark to/from the clip being recorded or played. Setting not retained Clip Flag Keep Adds/Clears a KP (Keep) mark to/from the clip being recorded or played. Setting not retained Flash Band Reduce 1) Turns the flashband correction function on/off. Setting not retained 1) Even when Flash Band Reduce is set to On, the function does not operate if the SHUTTER switch is set to ON. [Note] Assignable Switch setting Function Off No assignment Front Mic Switches between stereo and monaural when a stereo microphone is connected. Marker Turns the display of all markers on/off. Picture Cache Rec 1) Turns Picture Cache Rec mode on/off. Zebra Turns zebra display on/off. Clip Continuous Rec Turns Clip Continuous Rec mode on/off. Rec Source Switches the signals to be recorded between the camera picture and external input. (If the camcorder is currently recording or playing, the switch takes effect after recording or playback ends.) Digital Extender ×2 Turns the screen magnification (×2) function on/off. Digital Extender ×3 Turns the screen magnification (×3) function on/off. Digital Extender ×4 Turns the screen magnification (×4) function on/off. TX Power Save Switches the wireless transmitter power saving mode. 1) When Picture Cache Rec is assigned, Operation >Rec Function is disabled (grayed out) and cannot be set. 125 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches Functions That Can Be Assigned to the ASSIGN. 1 and 3 Switches, the ASSIGNABLE 4 and 5 Switches, and the ONLINE Button Assignable Switch setting Function State when camcorder is next powered on Zoom Tele/Wide — Assignable Switch setting Function State when camcorder is next powered on When a lens that supports serial communication is installed, assigns the Zoom Tele function to ASSIGNABLE 4, and assigns the Zoom Wide function to ASSIGNABLE 5 (displayed only when <4> and <5> are set). Off No assignment — [Note] Front Mic Switches between stereo (On) and monaural (Off) Setting retained when a stereo microphone is connected. Marker Turns the display of all markers on/off. Setting retained Last Clip Delete Deletes the last recorded clip. — ATW Turns ATW (auto tracing white balance) mode on/ Setting not retained off. When a lens that supports serial communication is installed, assigns the Zoom Wide function to ASSIGNABLE 4, and assigns the Zoom Tele function to ASSIGNABLE 5 (displayed only when <4> and <5> are set). ATW Hold Hold the white balance setting in the ATW mode. — [Note] Turbo Gain Executes Turbo Gain according to the setting of Operation >Gain Switch >Gain <Turbo>. Setting not retained Rec Review Executes recording review. — Rec Starts or stops recording. — NFC Executes the NFC function. — Network Client Mode Turns network client mode on/off. Setting retained Streaming Turns streaming transmission on/off. Setting not retained Auto Upload(Proxy) Turns proxy file auto transfer on/off. Setting retained Picture Cache Rec Turns Picture Cache Rec mode on/off. Setting retained Spotlight Turns the spotlight function in auto iris mode on/ off. Setting retained Backlight Turns the backlight function in auto iris mode on/ Setting retained off. VF Mode Switches the viewfinder screen between B&W (On) and color (Off). Setting retained Video Signal Monitor Switches the video signal monitor display function. Setting retained Lens Info Switches the depth of field indication between off, displayed in meters, and displayed in feet. Setting retained Do not modify the assignment during independent proxy recording. Zoom Wide/Tele — Do not modify the assignment during independent proxy recording. Manual Focus Assist Turns the manual focus assist function on/off. Focus Magnifier Turns the focus magnification function on/off. Setting retained Setting not retained Zebra Turns zebra display on/off. Setting not retained Lens RET Displays return video signal. When a camera extension unit is not connected: Rec Review (if playback is allowed) — Return Video Displays the return 1 video signal. — Return Video2 Displays the return 2 video signal. — Return Video3 Displays the return 3 video signal. — Return Video4 Displays the return 4 video signal. — Shot Mark1 Writes Shot Mark1. — Shot Mark2 Writes Shot Mark2. — Clip Flag OK Adds/Clears an OK mark to/from the clip being recorded or played. Setting not retained Clip Flag NG Adds/Clears an NG mark to/from the clip being recorded or played. Setting not retained Clip Flag Keep Adds/Clears a KP (Keep) mark to/from the clip being recorded or played. Setting not retained Color Temp SW 3200K Adjusts white balance using 3200K preset value. Setting retained Color Temp SW 4300K Adjusts white balance using 4300K preset value. Setting retained Color Temp SW 5600K Adjusts white balance using 5600K preset value. Setting retained Color Temp SW 6300K Adjusts white balance using 6300K preset value. Setting retained 126 000 7. Menu Display and Settings: Assigning Functions to Assignable Switches Assignable Switch setting Function State when camcorder is next powered on Electrical CC Function that switches the electrical CC filter (3200K/4300K/5600K/6300K) applied to white balance adjustment values. Sequence with each press of the switch/button: 3200K4300K5600K6300K Can be changed using menu settings (Electrical CC<A><B><C><D>). Setting retained [Note] This function is not available when Maintenance >White Filter >ND Filter C.Temp in the setup menu is set to On. If you set ND Filter C.Temp to On after assigning the function, the assignable switch ceases to function. Functions That Can Be Assigned to the RET Button on the Lens Assignable Switch setting Function State when camcorder is next powered on Off No assignment — Lens RET Displays return video signal. When a camera extension unit is not connected: Rec Review (if playback is allowed) — Return Video Displays return video signal. — Rec Review Executes recording review. — Shot Mark1 Writes Shot Mark1. — Shot Mark2 Writes Shot Mark2. – Clip Flag OK Adds/Clears an OK mark to/from the clip being recorded or played. Setting not retained Clip Flag NG Adds/Clears an NG mark to/from the clip being recorded or played. Setting not retained Clip Flag Keep Adds/Clears a KP (Keep) mark to/from the clip being recorded or played. Setting not retained CC5600K Applies a 5600K electrical CC filter to white balance adjustment values. Setting retained Clip Continuous Rec Turns Clip Continuous Rec mode on/off. Setting not retained Slow & Quick Motion Turns Slow & Quick Motion on/off. Setting retained Slot Select When recording media is loaded in both card slots A and B, selects the card you want to use. — Digital Extender ×2 Turns the screen magnification (×2) function on/ off. Setting not retained Focus Magnifier Turns the focus magnification function on/off. Setting not retained Digital Extender ×3 Turns the screen magnification (×3) function on/ off. Setting not retained Digital Extender ×2 Turns the screen magnification (×2) function on/ off. Setting not retained Digital Extender ×4 Turns the screen magnification (×4) function on/ off. Setting not retained Digital Extender ×3 Turns the screen magnification (×3) function on/ off. Setting not retained Digital Extender ×2×3×4 Setting not retained Switches the magnification of the screen magnification function. Each press of the switch or button switches in the order Off×2×3×4Off. Digital Extender ×4 Turns the screen magnification (×4) function on/ off. Setting not retained Digital Extender ×2×3×4 TX Power Save Switches the wireless transmitter power saving mode. Setting not retained Setting not retained Switches the magnification of the screen magnification function. Each press of the switch or button switches in the order Off×2×3×4Off. Flash Band Reduce Turns the flashband correction function on/off. Setting not retained Proxy Rec Start/Stop Starts/stops proxy recording. Setting not retained Gamma Display Assist Adjusts the display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder to the appropriate contrast for HLG. Setting not retained [Note] Even when Flash Band Reduce is set to On, the function does not operate if the SHUTTER switch is set to ON. Proxy Recording Mode Turns the proxy data recording function on/off. Setting retained Proxy Rec Start/Stop Starts/stops proxy recording. Setting not retained Gamma Display Assist Adjusts the display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder to the appropriate contrast for HLG. Setting not retained [Note] Not available in SDR mode or during playback. [Note] Not available in SDR mode or during playback. 127 000 8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data User Configuration Data You can save setup menu settings in the camcorder’s internal memory and on SD cards. This allows you to quickly recall an appropriate set of menu settings for the current situation. To save setup data on an SD card, insert a writable SD card (page 33) into the UTILITY SD card slot before proceeding. For details about the settings saved in each file, see “Items Saved in User Data” (page 154). Inserting an SD card (for saving configuration data) 1 Open the switch cover. 2 Insert the SD card (for saving configuration data) in the UTILITY SD card slot. 3 Close the switch cover. Ejecting an SD card (for saving configuration data) 1 Open the switch cover. 2 Press the SD card in slightly, then remove the card. [Notes] ˎˎ If the camcorder is turned off or the SD card is removed while the SD is being accessed, the integrity of data on the card cannot be guaranteed. All data recorded on the card may be discarded. Always make sure the ACCESS indicator is off before turning off the camcorder or removing the SD card. ˎˎ Take caution to prevent the SD card from flying out when inserting/ejecting the card. The following user data is supported. User Files Reference Files User files save the setting items and data of the customizable User menu. You can save up to 64 files on an SD card. By loading this file into the camcorder memory, you can customize the setup of the User menu. Reference files save the scene file standard settings (when File ID is Standard). You can save one file in the camcorder’s internal memory and one file on an SD card. ALL Files ALL files save the configuration data of all menus. You can save up to 64 files on an SD card. [Note] Device specific data (shading, output levels, and other data that requires adjustment for the specific device) is not saved. Scene Files Scene files save adjustments to Paint menu items for the purpose of shooting a particular scene. You can save up to five files in the camcorder’s internal memory and up to 64 files on an SD card. Scene files allow you to save the following types of data. ˎˎValues set in the Paint menu ˎˎShutter speeds set in standard mode or ECS mode ˎˎWhite balance data The data that is saved and loaded depends on the setting of File >Scene File >Scene White Data in the setup menu. Scene files can be stored in internal memory on the camcorder or on an SD card. Scene files can also be loaded into the camcorder. Lens Files You can set the following data for correcting for the lens characteristics, and save the data as a lens file. You can save up to 32 lens files in the camcorder’s internal memory and up to 64 lens files on an SD card. Configuration data Sub-items V modulation shading correction values M V Modulation Center marker position Lens Center H Lens Center V Flare level R Flare G Flare B Flare White balance correction value White Offset R White Offset B White shading correction value Shading Ch Select Shading H SAW Shading H PARA Shading V SAW Shading V PARA Gamma Files You can save up to five user-defined gamma table data files (User Gamma Data File) in internal memory. 000 128 8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data User Files Saving a User File Loading a User File 1 Select File > User File >Save SD Card in the 1 Select File >User File >Load SD Card in the setup menu. A screen for selecting a user file save destination appears. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination, then press the knob. You can save files in rows with a File ID of “No File.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID name will overwrite the selected file. The File ID is generated automatically, but you can modify it. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the confirmation message screen, then press the knob. Changing the File ID 1 Select File >User File >File ID in the setup menu. A screen for editing the File ID appears. 2 Select characters and enter the File ID. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then press the knob. The File ID is updated. setup menu. A user file list screen appears. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load, then press the knob. A confirmation screen appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. [Note] The camcorder will reboot automatically after loading configuration data. 000 129 8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data ALL Files Saving Configuration Data as an ALL File 1 Select File >All File >Save SD Card in the setup menu. A screen for selecting an ALL file save destination appears. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination, then press the knob. You can save files in rows with a File ID of “No File.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID name will overwrite the selected file. The File ID is generated automatically, but you can modify it. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the confirmation message screen, then press the knob. [Note] The current values and preset values are stored in an ALL file. 2 Select characters and enter the File ID. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then press the knob. The File ID is updated. Loading Configuration Data An ALL file list screen appears. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load, then press the knob. A confirmation screen appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. [Notes] One of the following error messages may appear during execution of the save, or as soon as you select [Execute]. In this case, the file is not saved. Error message Problem If an error message appears File Access NG No recordable Insert recordable media is inserted. media. Solution Changing the File ID 1 Select File >All File >File ID in the setup menu. A screen for editing the File ID appears. Resetting Current Settings and Preset Values to Factory Default Settings In this document, initial setup menu settings configured/saved by the user are referred to as “preset values.” Even after loading files to set up the camcorder, and overwriting original files with new settings, you can reset the contents of the files by recovering the preset values. 1 Select File >All File >Clear All Preset in the 1 Select File >All File >Load SD Card in the setup 1 Select File >All File >All Preset in the setup menu. ˎˎ When you load a file from an SD card, the current values and preset values saved in the camcorder’s internal memory are overwritten. ˎˎ Do not load a file on a device that is an older version than the device from which the file was saved. Doing so could cause a malfunction. ˎˎ The camcorder will reboot automatically after loading configuration data. If an error message appears Restoring All Current Settings to Preset Values menu. A confirmation screen appears. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. Saving All Current Settings as Preset Values 1 Select File >All File >Store All Preset in the setup menu. A confirmation screen appears. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. One of the following error messages may appear during execution of the load, or as soon as you select [Execute]. In this case, the file is not loaded. Error message Problem Solution File Access NG Insert the media There is no that contains the readable media The specified file file you want. does not exist on the media [Note] The camcorder will reboot automatically after executing. setup menu. A confirmation screen appears. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. [Note] The camcorder will reboot automatically after executing. 000 130 8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data Scene Files Saving a Scene File in Internal Memory 1 Select File >Scene File >Store Internal Memory in the setup menu. A scene file list screen appears. If the File ID is set to “Standard” destination, preconfigured standard settings are saved. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination, then press the knob. The scene file is saved, overwriting any existing file, in the selected destination. Changing the File ID 1 Select File >Scene File >File ID in the setup menu. A screen for editing the File ID appears. 2 Select characters and enter the File ID. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then press the knob. The File ID is updated. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the Loading a Scene File from Internal confirmation message screen, then press the knob. Memory 1 Select File >Scene File >Recall Internal Memory Saving a Scene File on an SD Card in the setup menu. A scene file list screen appears. 1 Select File >Scene File >Save SD Card in the 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load, 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination, 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then setup menu. A scene file save destination screen appears. then press the knob. You can save files in rows with a File ID of “No File.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID name will overwrite the selected file. The File ID is generated automatically, but you can modify it. then press the knob. A confirmation screen appears. press the knob. Load a Scene File from an SD Card File >Scene File >Load SD Card in the 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the 1 Select setup menu. confirmation message screen, then press the knob. A scene file list screen appears. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load, then press the knob. A confirmation screen appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. 000 131 8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data Reference Files Saving Current Settings as Preset Values Loading a Reference File from an SD Card 1 Select File >Reference File >Store Reference in 1 Select File >Reference File >Load Reference(SD the setup menu. A confirmation screen appears. Card) in the setup menu. A confirmation screen appears. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then Saving Current Settings as Preset Values on an SD Card Resetting Current Settings and Preset Values to Factory Default Settings press the knob. press the knob. 1 Select File >Reference File >Save Reference(SD 1 Select File >Reference File >Clear Reference in Card) in the setup menu. A confirmation screen appears. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. Changing the File ID 1 Select File >Reference File >File ID in the setup menu. A screen for editing the File ID appears. 2 Select characters and enter the File ID. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then press the knob. The File ID is updated. the setup menu. A confirmation screen appears. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. 000 132 8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data Lens Files Saving a Lens File in Internal Memory Changing the File ID 1 Select File >Lens File >Store Internal Memory 1 Select File >Lens File >File ID in the setup in the setup menu. A lens file list screen appears. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination, then press the knob. You can save files in rows with File ID of “No offset.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID name will overwrite the selected file. The File ID is generated automatically, but you can modify it. menu. A screen for editing the File ID appears. 2 Select characters and enter the File ID. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Done], then press the knob. The File ID is updated. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the Loading a Lens File from Internal confirmation message screen, then press the knob. Saving a Lens File on an SD Card Memory 1 Select File >Lens File >Recall Internal Memory in the setup menu. A lens file list screen appears. 1 Select File >Lens File >Save SD Card in the 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load, 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a destination, 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then setup menu. A lens file save destination screen appears. then press the knob. You can save files in rows with a File ID of “No File.” Selecting a row with a specified File ID name will overwrite the selected file. The File ID is generated automatically, but you can modify it. then press the knob. A confirmation screen appears. press the knob. Loading a Lens File from an SD Card 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute] on the 1 Select File >Lens File >Load SD Card in the confirmation message screen, then press the knob. setup menu. A lens file list screen appears. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load, then press the knob. A confirmation screen appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. Loading a Lens File Automatically When you are using a lens that supports serial communication, you can set up the camcorder by automatically loading the lens file that corresponds to the lens settings (Lens Auto Recall function). To use the Lens Auto Recall function, set File >Lens File >Lens Auto Recall in the setup menu to one of the following. Off: Do not use the Lens Auto Recall function. On (Lens Name): Load the lens file that corresponds to the lens model name. On (Serial Number): Load the lens file that corresponds to the lens model name and serial number (when the lens supports communication of the serial number). If the lens does not support communication of the serial number, even when set to On (Serial Number), load the lens file that corresponds to the lens model name. 000 133 8. Saving and Loading User Configuration Data Gamma Files Checking the Current Gamma File Settings (File Names) Using User Gamma Files Created Using CvpFileEditorTM V4.3 Select File >User Gamma >Current Settings in the setup menu to display a list of the currently configured user gamma files. Save created user gamma files to be loaded in the “PRIVATE/SONY/PRO/CAMERA/HD_CAM” directory of the SD card. Loading a User Gamma File from an SD Card Resetting a User Gamma File to Initial State 1 Select File >User Gamma >Load SD Card in the 1 Select File >User Gamma >Reset in the setup setup menu. A user gamma file list screen appears. menu. A gamma file number reset screen appears. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select a file to load, 2 Turn the MENU knob to select the number of then press the knob. A confirmation screen appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. the gamma file to reset (1 to 5). To reset all gamma files, select [All]. A confirmation screen appears. 3 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. 134 000 9. Connecting External Devices Connecting a Remote Control Unit When an RM-B170 Remote Control Unit, RCP‑1001/1501 Remote Control Panel, or other control unit is connected, some camcorder functions can be controlled from that unit. You can also operate the menu and monitor the picture on a monitor screen connected to the MONITOR connector on the RM-B170. Releasing Remote Control Mode Turn off the camcorder and disconnect the remote control unit. The switch settings on the camcorder become enabled. Connecting a Remote Control Unit Connecting a Monitor to an RM-B170 Using a remote control cable, connect between the REMOTE connector (8-pin) of the camcorder and the camera connector of the remote control unit. When you turn on the camcorder after making the connection, the camcorder enters remote control mode, enabling menu operations and shooting operations. The MONITOR connector (BNC type) of the RMB170 outputs the same signal as the output from the VIDEO OUT connector. To connect a monitor to the MONITOR connector on the RM-B170, set the VIDEO OUT connector of the camcorder to Composite signal, and use the black cable supplied with the RM-B170. [Notes] ˎˎ Remote control operation is not supported if USB connection to the camcorder is enabled. ˎˎ If a USB connection to the camcorder is enabled during remote control, remote control mode is released. ˎˎ Do not connect or disconnect the remote control unit when the camcorder is on. ˎˎ A remote control cable is not supplied with the RCP1001/1501 Remote Control Panel. The following switches of the camcorder are disabled when a remote control unit is connected. ˎˎGAIN switch ˎˎWHITE BAL switch ˎˎAUTO W/B BAL switch ˎˎSHUTTER switch ˎˎOUTPUT/DCC switch ˎˎASSIGN. 1/3 switches, ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches, and the ONLINE button to which the Turbo Gain or ATW function has been assigned Image Quality Adjustment when an RM-B170 is Connected When the RM-B170 is connected, the parameters for camera image quality adjustment items (paint data) are set to the parameters that were specified the last time that the RM-B170 was connected. Function of Recording Start/Stop Buttons when an RM-B170 is Connected Set the function of the buttons using Maintenance >Camera Config >RM Rec Start in the setup menu. The functions of the buttons for the RM Rec Start settings are given below. Button Camcorder setup menu RM Rec Start setting RM Camera PARA Camcorder REC START button Disabled Enabled Enabled Lens VTR button Disabled Enabled Enabled ASSIGN. 1/3 switches, ASSIGNABLE 4/5 switches, and ONLINE button assigned with recording start/ stop function Disabled Enabled Enabled RM-B170 MEDIA START button Enabled Main data block RM-B170 Remote control data block Camcorder non-volatile memory Disabled Enabled Data Structure of Image Quality Adjustment Data The non-volatile memory of the camcorder used for storing camera image quality adjustment data (paint data) consists of the two regions shown below: a “main data block” that is used when a remote control unit is not connected, and a “remote control data block” that is used when a remote control unit is connected. Paint adjustment data is automatically selected and output to the camera section depending on whether or not a remote control unit, such as the RM-B170, is connected. Camera unit hardware RM-B170 connected RM-B170 not connected When a remote control unit is connected, the “remote control data block” is selected as the current paint data block, and the paint adjustment parameters that were in effect the last time the remote control unit was used are loaded. However, when the settings of absolute value controls1) and absolute value switches2) are set on the remote control unit, the settings on the remote control unit override the settings on the camcorder. When the remote control unit is disconnected from the camcorder, the “main data block” is reenabled, and the camcorder returns to the settings that were in effect before the remote control unit was connected. 1) Absolute value controls: Data corresponding to the angular position of the control is output. Controls for which data corresponding to the amount of rotation is output are called relative value controls. 2) Absolute value switches: Switches (or knobs), such as toggle switches or slide switches (except most momentary switches) whose positions must coincide with their functions are called absolute value switches. When Maintenance >Camera Config >RM Common Memory in the setup menu is set to [On], you can use settings of the paint adjustment 000 135 9. Connecting External Devices: Connecting a Remote Control Unit data stored in the main data block even if a remote control unit is connected. In this case, the settings stored in the main data block will be updated when you change the settings on the remote control unit. Thus, the settings of the paint data made with the remote control unit will be retained even after the remote control unit is removed. However, if the switch position on the remote control unit differs from the one on the camcorder, the switch position on the camcorder takes precedence. Also, it is possible to keep the settings that are in effect before you connect the remote control unit. In this case, you must set the control knobs to relative value mode on the remote control unit. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with the remote control unit. Operating the Menu from the RM‑B170 1 Press the CHARACTER button on the RM-B170, turning it on, then press the MENU button. The menu is displayed on the monitor connected to the MONITOR connector of the RM-B170. 2 Select and set menu items using the adjustment knob and CANCEL/ENTER button. 3 When finished, set the MENU button to OFF to exit the menu. 000 136 9. Connecting External Devices: Connecting a Remote Control Unit Major Functions Supported on the RCP-1001/1501, RM-B170 Table legend Signal support is indicated by the following. Yes: Available –: Not available Item Sub-item Settings Function RCP-1001 RCP-1501 Panel Active Panel Active On/Off Turns panel operation on/off. Yes Yes RM-B170 Yes Bars Bars On/Off Turns color bar output on/off. Yes Yes Yes Call Call On/Off Calls camcorder from RCP/RM. Yes Yes Yes 1) Standard Standard On/Off Turns standard mode on/off. Yes Yes Yes 1) Yes ND Filter ND Filter 1/2/3/4 Displays the selected ND filter. Yes Yes CC Filter CC Filter A/B/C/D Displays the selected CC filter. – – – Gain Step Gain –6/–3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/ 36/42dB Master gain setting Yes Yes Yes White Balance AWB Start/Stop Starts auto white balance. During execution, this stops auto white balance. Yes Yes Yes White Memory A/B/PRESET Switches the white balance preset memory. Yes Yes Yes ATW On/Off Turns ATW on/off. Yes 1) Yes Yes 1) 5600K On/Off Turns electrical color temperature conversion on/off. Yes Yes Yes 1) Black ABB Start/Stop Starts black balance auto adjustment. During execution, this stops black balance. Yes Yes Yes Knee Point 75% to 90% to 109% Sets the knee point. – Yes Yes 1) Detail Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the HD detail level. Yes Yes Yes Shutter Shutter Setting On/Off Turns the shutter on/off. – Yes Yes Iris Shutter Speed – Sets the shutter speed. – Yes Yes ECS Setting On/Off Turns ECS mode on/off. – Yes Yes ECS Frequency – Sets the ECS mode frequency. – Yes Yes SLS Setting On/Off Turns SLS mode on/off. – Yes Yes SLS Speed – Sets the SLS mode speed (number of frames) – Yes Yes Iris Mode Auto/Manual Sets the iris mode. Yes Yes Yes Iris Level –99 to ±0 to +99 Adjusts the auto iris target level. Yes Yes Yes Close On/Off Turns iris control closing on/off. Yes Yes – 000 137 9. Connecting External Devices: Connecting a Remote Control Unit Item Sub-item Settings Function Switch Status Gamma On/Off Turns the gamma correction function on/off. Black Gamma On/Off Turns the black gamma correction function on/off. Matrix On/Off Turns the matrix function on/off. Knee On/Off White Clip White Black Camcorder Menu Media Shot Mark RCP-1001 RCP-1501 RM-B170 – Yes Yes 1) Yes Yes 1) – Yes Yes 2) Turns the knee correction function on/off. – Yes Yes 1) On/Off Turns the white clip adjustment function on/off. – Yes Yes 2) Detail On/Off Turns the detail adjustment function on/off. – Yes Yes Flare On/Off Turns the flare correction function on/off. – Yes Yes 1) Test Saw On/Off Turns the test signal on/off. – Yes Yes 1) Yes 1) R Gain –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance R gain value. Yes Yes Yes B Gain –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the white balance B gain value. Yes Yes Yes Master Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the master black level. Yes Yes Yes R Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the R channel black level. Yes Yes Yes B Black –99 to ±0 to +99 Sets the B channel black level. Yes Yes Yes Menu On/Off Displays the camcorder menu. Cancel/Preset Cancel/Preset Select/Set Select(Up/Down)/Set Rec Start/Stop Starts/stops recording. – – Yes – – Yes – – Yes – – Yes Play Play/Pause Starts playback. – – Yes FREV – Fast reverse playback – – Yes FFWD – Fast forward playback – – Yes STOP – Stops playback. – – Yes Rec Review – Starts recording review. – – Yes PREV – Jumps to the start of the current clip. – – Yes NEXT – Jumps to the start of the next clip. – – Yes Shot Mark1 – Sets shot mark 1. – – Yes Shot Mark2 – Sets shot mark 2. – – Yes 1) ZOOM – – Zoom operation (with compatible lens) – – Yes 1) FOCUS – – Focus operation (with compatible lens) – – Yes 1) 1) Operation supported when the function is assigned to an assignable switch on the RCP/RM. 2) Camcorder menu operation supported from the RM. 000 138 9. Connecting External Devices Connecting an External Monitor Select the output signal and use an appropriate cable for the monitor to be connected. of that external device to match the analog composite signal setting for the VIDEO OUT connector. To input camcorder output audio to an external device such as a monitor, VTR, or other recording device, connect the audio output of the AUDIO OUT connector to the audio input of that external device. For connection, use a BNC cable (not supplied). BNC cable (not supplied) HDMI OUT Connector (Type A Connector) BNC cable (not supplied) Regardless of whether the signal is HD or SD, the same status information and menus can be displayed on the external monitor as those on the viewfinder screen. >SDI Out1 Output/SDI Out2 Output in the setup menu (page 98). For connection, use a BNC cable (not supplied). [Note] The SD signal down-converted output is enabled when Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the setup menu is set to 720×486i or 720×576i. SDI OUT Connector (BNC) The SDI OUT connector can be used to connect a device that supports SDI. The device type can be a monitor, switcher, VTR, or other recording device. The output signal from this connector can be turned on and off using Operation >Input/Output VIDEO OUT Connector The VIDEO OUT connector can be used to connect a device that supports analog composite signals. The device type can be a monitor, VTR, or other recording device. The output signal changes in conjunction with the setting of Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the setup menu. To input the VIDEO OUT connector output signal to an external analog composite device, it may be necessary to change the input signal setting You can turn the output signal from the camcorder on/off using Operation >Input/Output >HDMI Output in the setup menu. The output signal format is set using Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the setup menu. Use a commercially available HDMI cable for connection. 000 139 9. Connecting External Devices Managing/Editing Clips with a Computer The clips recorded on SxS memory cards with this camcorder can be controlled on a computer or edited using optional nonlinear editing software. You can copy clips on SxS memory cards to portable storage or other USB media if portable media/USB media is connected to the external device connection connector. USB Connection with a Computer When you connect the camcorder to a computer using a USB cable (not supplied), the memory card in the slot is recognized as an extended drive by the computer. When two memory cards are mounted in the camcorder, they are recognized as two independent extended drives by the computer. To start USB connection When you connect a computer to the PC connector with a USB cable (not supplied), the message “Connect USB Now?” is displayed to prompt you to confirm that you wish to enable the USB connection. If you select “Cancel” or push the MENU CANCEL/ PRST/ESCAPE switch down to the ESCAPE position, or if you disconnect the USB cable, the message “Connect USB Now?” disappears. If you select “Execute” and press the MENU knob, the USB connection is enabled and the camcorder is recognized as an extension drive. If the USB connection is enabled during recording/ playback operation, the operation is stopped and the message “USB Connecting” appears on the viewfinder screen. At this time, the output signal from the VIDEO OUT connector and SDI OUT 1/2 connectors changes to a black signal. [Notes] USB cable (not supplied) ˎˎ The camcorder cannot be operated for recording, playback, and so on while the message “USB Connecting” is displayed. ˎˎ When the computer accesses the media loaded in the camcorder, do not try to carry out the following operations. –– Operating the camcorder (turning the power on/off, switching the operating mode, etc.) –– Removing or loading a media from an active slot (being accessed from the computer) –– Removing or connecting the USB cable Releasing the USB connection [Notes] ˎˎ Turn the camcorder on and wait until the image and information are displayed on the screen, then connect the USB cable to the camcorder. ˎˎ When connecting the USB cable to the computer, be careful to check the form and direction of the USB connector. ˎˎ The camcorder does not work on the bus power from the computer. To release the USB connection, follow the same procedure as that for removing a device from the computer. To enable the USB connection again, first disconnect the USB cable and then reconnect it. The message “Connect USB Now?” appears again. To remove an SxS memory card On Windows 1 Click on the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon on the task bar of the computer. 2 Select “Safely remove SxS Memory Card Drive(X:)” from the displayed menu. 3 Check that the “Safe To Remove Hardware” Store the clips to be edited on the HDD of your computer in advance, using the supplied application software. Some editing software may not operate properly. Be sure to confirm before use that it conforms to the recording formats used with this camcorder. Connecting Portable Storage/USB Media message appears, then remove the card. On Macintosh Drag the SxS memory card icon on the desktop to the Trash. If the SxS memory card icon is displayed in the Finder, click on the eject icon. To use the application software To copy clips to the local disk of your computer, the dedicated application software must be downloaded and installed on your computer. For details about downloading software, see “Software Downloads” (page 172). Although the data regarding recorded materials are stored over multiple files and folders, you can easily handle the clips without considering such data and directory structure by using the dedicated application software. [Note] If you perform operations on clips, such as copying the clips on the SxS memory card using Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Macintosh), the subsidiary data contained by the clips may not be maintained. To use a nonlinear editing system In a nonlinear editing system, editing software (option) that supports the formats recorded by the camcorder is required. When portable storage, USB HDD, or similar media is connected to the external device connection connector, you can copy clips from the recording media inserted in an SxS card slot of the camcorder to USB media. 1 Specify the destination folder for copying clips in Operation >USB >Select Folder in the setup menu. You can also select [New] on the screen to create a new folder. [Note] If a folder is not specified, a folder is automatically created with a folder name the same as the creation date of the first clip to be copied, and clips are copied to that folder. 2 Select Operation >USB >Copy to USB in the setup menu. 3 Select the slot in which the target recording media is inserted. Media(A) to USB: Copy all clips from the recording media inserted in slot A. Media(B) to USB: Copy all clips from the recording media inserted in slot B. Media(A)(B) to USB: Copy all clips from the recording media inserted in slot A and slot B. 000 140 9. Connecting External Devices: Managing/Editing Clips with a Computer [Note] When a copy destination folder is specified in step 1 and Media(A)(B) to USB is selected, slot A clips are copied to the specified destination folder. Slot B clips are copied to a folder that is automatically created with a folder name the same as the creation date of the first clip. 4 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. All clips on the target recording media are copied to the USB media. [Note] If a clip with the same file name as the clip to copy already exists in the destination folder, the clip is not copied. Displaying a list of clips on portable storage/USB media Checking for copy read errors State You can check for read errors after writing clips by setting Operation >USB >Error Check in the setup menu to On. Terminate the previous During clip recording, operation. playback, thumbnail display, proxy recording, streaming, proxy transfer, or live transfer mode Formatting portable storage/USB media You can format portable storage/USB media in exFAT format using Operation >USB >Format USB in the setup menu. 1 Select Operation >USB >Format USB in the setup menu. 2 Turn the MENU knob to select [Execute], then press the knob. Initialization (formatting) begins. You can display a list of the clips on portable storage/USB media using Operation >USB >View Clip List in the setup menu. 3 When the formatting is completed, a message Renaming a folder on portable storage/USB media Checking free space on portable storage/USB media You can rename a folder using Operation >USB >Rename Folder in the setup menu. 1 Select Operation >USB >Rename Folder in the The free space on portable storage/USB media is displayed in the Media Remain row on the screen displayed when Operation >USB in the setup menu is selected. 2 Select the folder to rename, and press the SET About power supply to portable storage/USB media setup menu. button. A file name input screen appears. 3 Enter a folder name, and select [Done] on the screen. The folder is renamed. appears on the screen. Select [OK]. Power is supplied to portable storage/USB media from the external device connector automatically when performing an operation in Operation >USB in the setup menu. However, power supply is not started under the following conditions, even when performing an operation in Operation >USB in the setup menu. To start the supply of power, perform the solution shown in the table. Solution Network Client Mode is On Set Network Client Mode to Off. Camera adaptor is connected Unmount the camera adaptor connection. [Notes] ˎˎ Clips on portable storage or other USB media cannot be copied to recording media inserted in an SxS card slot. ˎˎ Clips cannot be recorded while power is supplied to the external device connector. To start recording clips, terminate the Operation >USB operation in the setup menu. 000 141 9. Connecting External Devices Configuring a Shooting and Recording System You can mount a CA-FB70/TX70 HD Camera Adaptor to the camcorder and connect a Camera Control Unit (CCU). This allows you to configure a shooting and recording system consisting of multiple camcorders with camera extension units connected to a remote control unit. Tally and Call Indicators For more information about the CA-FB70 and CA-TX70, refer to their respective operation manuals. Data received from system [Notes] ˎˎ When using the camcorder in this system, do not connect a video light to the camcorder. ˎˎ Supported only for XAVC and MPEG HD recording. ˎˎ Not supported for proxy recording and wireless LAN connection function. The tally and call indicators for a system are as follows. Tally Green Tally CA call HDVF LED indicators Non-CA call Text display on viewfinder screen REC/ GREEN TALLY LED TALLY LED CALL OFF OFF OFF OFF Not lit Not lit No display No display No display OFF OFF OFF ON Lit Not lit No display CALL OFF OFF ON OFF Not lit Not lit No display No display CALL OFF OFF ON ON Lit Not lit OFF ON OFF OFF Not lit Lit No display No display OFF ON OFF ON Lit Lit CALL OFF ON ON OFF Not lit Lit No display CALL OFF ON ON ON Lit Lit CALL ON OFF OFF OFF Lit Not lit No display No display No display CALL ON OFF OFF ON Not lit Not lit No display No display CALL ON OFF ON OFF Lit Not lit ON OFF ON ON Not lit Not lit No display No display CALL ON ON OFF OFF Lit Lit No display CALL No display ON ON OFF ON Not lit Lit No display CALL ON ON ON OFF Lit Lit CALL ON ON ON ON Not lit Lit No display CALL [Note] Alarm indications using the tally indicator in the warning display are not displayed while a CA-FB70/TX70 Camera Adaptor is connected. 000 142 9. Connecting External Devices: Configuring a Shooting and Recording System Supported Formats and Limitations of Shooting/Recording Systems The supported formats and operation limitations of a shooting/recording system comprising the camcorder, camera adaptor, and camera control unit are shown in the following table. Operation menu Format Frequency Input/Output Rec Format System format of camera adaptor / camera control unit Output Format Camcorder limitation Format Frequency XAVC-I 1920×1080P 1920×1080i 1920×1080 59.94i 50 Return video display No 1920×1080i 1920×1080 50i Yes 1280×720P 1280×720 50P Yes 1920×1080PsF 1920×1080 25PsF a) 1920×1080 50i Yes 1280×720P 1280×720 50P No XAVC-L 35 1080i XAVC-L 25 1080i 1920×1080i 1920×1080 59.94i HD422 50 1080i Yes HQ 1920×1080i HQ 1440×1080i SP 1440×1080i XAVC-L 25 1080i XAVC-I 1280×720P HD422 50 1080i XAVC-L 50 1280×720P HQ 1920×1080i HD422 50 720P HQ 1440×1080i HQ 1280×720P SP 1440×1080i 1280×720P 1280×720 59.94P Yes 25 XAVC-I 1920×1080P XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P XAVC-L 50 1280×720P XAVC-L 35 1080P HD422 50 720P HD422 50 1080P HQ 1280×720P 1920×1080PsF XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P 1920×1080 29.97PsF a) 1920×1080 59.94i HQ 1920×1080P Yes HD422 50 720P XAVC-L 35 1080P a) A PsF setting is recommended when a CA-TX70 Camera Adaptor is connected. HD422 50 1080P [Note] In a shooting/recording system, special recording functions, such as wireless LAN connection function or Slow & Quick Motion, cannot be used simultaneously. HQ 1920×1080P 23.98 No HD422 50 720P 1280×720P 1280×720 59.94P No XAVC-I 1920×1080P 1920×1080i (2-3PD) 1920×1080 59.94i No 1280×720P (2-3PD) 1280×720 59.94P No XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P XAVC-L 35 1080P HD422 50 1080P HQ 1920×1080P HD422 50 720P Return video display XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i XAVC-L 35 1080i XAVC-I 1920×1080P XAVC-I 1920×1080P XAVC-I 1920×1080i XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i 29.97 1920×1080 50i Output Format XAVC-L 35 1080P XAVC-L 35 1080P XAVC-I 1280×720P 1920×1080i Input/Output Rec Format XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P XAVC-L 50 1920×1080P XAVC-I 1920×1080i Camcorder limitation SDI SDI 59.94 System format of camera adaptor / camera control unit Operation menu 000 143 9. Connecting External Devices Recording External Input Signals You can record SDI signals from devices connected to the SDI IN connector of the camcorder. HD/SD To output and record input signals instead of the camera picture, set Operation >Input/Output >Source Select in the setup menu to [External]. Operation >Format >Rec Format in the setup menu Operation >Format >Frequency Supported external input signal in the setup menu formats HD HD422 50 720P 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i HD 1280×720 59.94P 50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i HD 1280×720 50P 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i HD 1280×720 59.94P 50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i HD 1280×720 50P 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i HD 1280×720 59.94P 50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i HD 1280×720 50P 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i HD 1280×720 59.94P 50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i HD 1280×720 50P 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i HD 1280×720 59.94P 50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i HD 1280×720 50P 59.94 SD 486 59.94i 50 SD 576 50i 59.94 SD 486 59.94i 50 SD 576 50i [Notes] ˎˎ External input signals cannot be recorded in Slow & Quick Motion mode. When a special recording mode, such as Slow & Quick Motion mode, is selected, the recording mode is canceled when you set Operation >Input/Output >Source Select in the setup menu to [External]. ˎˎ Execution of automatic adjustment functions, such as automatic black balance, and operations, such as playback, Rec Review, and thumbnail display, will end when Operation >Input/Output >Source Select in the setup menu is set to [External]. The camcorder enters stop mode and then the camera picture switches to external input. ˎˎ Recording may stop if the input signal is disturbed while recording external input. Recording automatically resumes when the input signal returns to normal. ˎˎ Not supported for proxy recording and wireless LAN connection function. HQ 1920×1080i HQ 1440×1080i SP 1440×1080i Supported External Input Signal Formats and Camcorder Recording Formats HD/SD Operation >Format >Rec Format in the setup menu Operation >Format >Frequency Supported external input signal in the setup menu formats HD XAVC-I 1920×1080i 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i HD 1280×720 59.94P 50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i HD 1280×720 50P 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i HD 1280×720 59.94P XAVC-I 1280×720P XAVC-L 50 1920×1080i XAVC-L 50 1280×720P HD422 50 1080i 50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i HD 1280×720 50P 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i HD 1280×720 59.94P 50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i HD 1280×720 50P 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i HD 1280×720 59.94P 50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i HD 1280×720 50P 59.94 HD 1920×1080 29.97PsF/59.94i HD 1280×720 59.94P 50 HD 1920×1080 25PsF/50i HD 1280×720 50P HQ 1280×720P SD MPEG IMX 50 DVCAM 144 000 10. Maintenance and Inspection Maintenance Cleaning the Viewfinder Note about the Battery Terminals Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and mirror inside the viewfinder barrel. Clean the lens and protecting filter with a commercially available lens cleaner. The battery terminal of this unit (the connector for battery packs and AC adaptors) is a consumable part. Power may not be supplied to the unit properly if the pins of the battery terminal are bent or deformed by shock or vibrations, or if they become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use. Periodic inspections are recommended to keep the unit working properly and to prolong its usable lifetime. Contact a Sony service or sales representative for more information about inspections. [Note] Never use organic solvents such as thinners. Exchanging the Battery of the Internal Clock The camcorder’s internal clock is powered by a lithium battery. If the message “BackUp Battery End” appears in the viewfinder, this battery must be exchanged. Contact a Sony service representative. 000 145 10. Maintenance and Inspection Error/Warning System If a warning, caution, or operating condition that requires confirmation occurs on the camcorder, a message is displayed in the viewfinder, the corresponding indicators start flashing, and a warning sound is emitted. You can adjust the volume of the warning sound using the ALARM knob. If the ALARM knob is set to minimum, the warning sound will not be audible. Error Display The camcorder will stop operation when the following kind of display occurs. Error message Warning sound WARNING indicator Tally/REC indicator Cause and Solution E + error code Continuous – High-speed flashing Indicates an abnormality in the camcorder. Turn off the camcorder, and check for any problem with connected devices, cables, or media. (If the camcorder does not turn off when the POWER switch is set to OFF, remove the battery or disconnect the AC supply.) If the error persists when the camcorder is turned on again, contact your Sony service representative. Warning Display Follow the instructions provided if the following display occurs. Warning message Warning sound WARNING indicator Tally/REC indicator Cause and Solution Media Near Full Intermittent Flashing Flashing The remaining capacity on the SxS memory card is getting low. Replace at the earliest convenience. Media Full Continuous On High-speed flashing Clips could not be recorded, copied, or split because there is no remaining capacity on the SxS memory card. Replace immediately. Battery Near End Intermittent Flashing Flashing The remaining capacity of the battery pack is getting low. Recharge at the earliest convenience. (The battery indicator flashes in the viewfinder.) Battery End Continuous On High-speed flashing The battery pack is dead. Recording is disabled. Connect a power source to DC IN and allow the battery pack to recharge without attempting to operate the camcorder. (The battery indicator flashes in the viewfinder.) Temperature High Intermittent Flashing Flashing The internal temperature is high. Turn off the camcorder and allow it to cool down before operating it again. Voltage Low Intermittent Flashing Flashing The DC IN voltage is low (level 1). Check the power source. Insufficient Voltage Continuous On High-speed flashing The DC IN voltage is too low (level 2). Recording is disabled. Connect a different power source. (The battery indicator flashes in the viewfinder.) 000 146 10. Maintenance and Inspection: Error/Warning System Warning message Warning sound WARNING indicator Tally/REC indicator Cause and Solution Clips Full Continuous On High-speed flashing The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on an SxS memory card has been reached. Recording or copying more clips is not possible. Replace immediately. Last Clip Recording Intermittent Flashing Flashing The clip currently recording is the last clip that can be recorded, as the maximum number of clips has been reached. Prepare a new SxS memory card. Clips Near Full Intermittent Flashing Flashing The number of additional clips that can be recorded on the SxS memory card is getting low. Replace at the earliest convenience. Media(Proxy) Full Continuous On High-speed flashing Proxy data cannot be recorded because there is no remaining free space on the proxy data SD card. Replace immediately. Clips(Proxy) Full Continuous On High-speed flashing The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on the proxy data SD card has been reached. Recording more clips is not possible. Replace immediately. Media(Proxy) Near Full Intermittent Flashing Flashing The remaining free space on the proxy data SD card is getting low. Replace at the earliest convenience. Last Clip(Proxy) Rec Intermittent Flashing Flashing The proxy data currently recording is the last clip that can be recorded, as the maximum number of clips has been reached. Prepare a new proxy data SD card. Clips(Proxy) Near Full Intermittent Flashing Flashing The number of additional clips that can be recorded on the proxy data SD card is getting low. Replace at the earliest convenience. Media(A)1) Full Continuous On High-speed flashing When using the Simul Rec function Media(A)1) Clips Full Continuous On High-speed flashing When using the Simul Rec function Media(A)1) Near Full Intermittent Flashing Flashing When using the Simul Rec function Media(A) Last Clip Rec Intermittent Flashing Flashing When using the Simul Rec function 1) 1) “(B)” is displayed for cards in slot B. 000 147 10. Maintenance and Inspection: Error/Warning System Caution and Operation Confirmation Display The following caution and operation messages may appear in the center of the screen. Follow the instructions provided to resolve the issue. Display indication Cause and Solution Battery Error Please Change Battery An error was detected in the battery pack. Replace with a normal battery pack. Backup Battery End Please Change The remaining capacity of the backup battery is insufficient. Replace the backup battery. Unknown Media(A)1) Please Change • A memory card that has been partitioned or a memory card containing more clips that can be handled by the camcorder was inserted. • An SxS card was inserted when the file system is set to FAT. • An SDHC card was inserted when the file system is set to exFAT or UDF. The card cannot be used in the camcorder, and must be replaced. Media Error Media(A)1) Needs to be Restored An error occurred on the memory card, and the card must be restored. Eject and then re-insert the card, then repair the card. Media Error Cannot Record to Media(A)1) The memory card may be damaged, and can no longer be used for recording. Playback may be possible, so making a copy and replacing the memory card is recommended. Media Error Cannot Use Media(A)1) The memory card may be damaged, and can no longer be used for recording or playback. The card cannot be used in the camcorder, and must be replaced. Cannot Use Media(A)1) Unsupported File System A card using a different file system or an unformatted card was inserted. The card cannot be used in the camcorder, and must be replaced or formatted using the camcorder. Media(A)1) Error Playback Halted Cannot continue playback because an error occurred while reading from the memory card. If the problem persists, make a copy and replace the memory card. Media(A)1) Error Recording is stopped because an error occurred on the memory card. If the problem persists, replace the memory card. Display indication Cause and Solution Different Media is Inserted Cannot Use Media(A)1) Different media was inserted. Eject the inserted card, and insert a card of the same type as the previously inserted card. 1) “(B)” is displayed for cards in slot B. 148 000 11. Appendix Messages Displayed During Operation This section describes the meaning of messages that may be displayed in response to button, switch, or knob operation. [Notes] ˎˎ Covers only the messages displayed about possible causes in response to an operation. ˎˎ Messages displayed when an operation is attempted while a menu item cannot be selected (grayed out) are not described. Operation Message Meaning and possible cause REC button was pressed Media not exist Cannot record because there is no recording media in an SxS card slot. Media(Proxy) Cannot Record No Media in Slot(Proxy) Proxy data recording mode is set to On, but cannot record proxy data because the proxy SD card is not inserted. Media(Proxy) Cannot Record Media(Proxy) Error Cannot record proxy data because cannot write to the proxy SD card due to a media error. Media(Proxy) Cannot Record Media(Proxy): Write Protected Cannot record proxy data because the proxy SD card is write-protected. Media(Proxy) Cannot Record NG: Preparing Cannot record proxy data because the proxy data recording circuitry initialization is not completed. Assignable switch assigned with Proxy Rec Start/ Media(Proxy) Stop was operated Cannot Record No Media in Slot(Proxy) Cannot record proxy data because the proxy SD card is not inserted. Media(Proxy) Cannot Record Media(Proxy) Error Cannot record proxy data because cannot write to the proxy SD card due to a media error. Media(Proxy) Cannot Record Media(Proxy): Write Protected Cannot record proxy data because the proxy SD card is write-protected. Media(Proxy) Cannot Record NG: Preparing Cannot record proxy data because the proxy data recording circuitry initialization is not completed. PREV button was pressed First Clip Top! Cannot execute because the playback position is at the first frame of the first clip. F REV button was pressed First Clip Top! Cannot execute because the playback position is at the first frame of the first clip. PREV + F REV buttons were pressed First Clip Top! Cannot execute because the playback position is at the first frame of the first clip. PLAY button was pressed Last Clip End! Cannot execute because the playback position is at the last frame of the last clip. NEXT button was pressed Last Clip End! Cannot execute because the playback position is at the last frame of the last clip. F FWD button was pressed Last Clip End! Cannot execute because the playback position is at the last frame of the last clip. NEXT + F FWD buttons were pressed Last Clip End! Cannot execute because the playback position is at the last frame of the last clip. Media slot was changed Cannot Switch Slots Cannot change slots during playback. Recording media was removed Media removed Media was removing while reading from recording media or while writing to recording media (ACCESS indicator is lit). GAIN switch was operated Gain: xxdB (where “xx” is the gain value) Gain setting was changed. 000 149 11. Appendix: Messages Displayed During Operation Operation Message Meaning and possible cause DCC switch was operated DCC: On DCC was set to On. DCC: Off DCC was set to Off. Fixed By Hyper Gamma ! Cannot set DCC to On because Gamma Category is set to HG or User. White: Preset xxxxK (where “xxxx” is the color temperature value) White balance was changed to the preset value. White: A xxxxK (where “xxxx” is the color temperature value) White balance was changed to the memory A value. White: B xxxxK (where “xxxx” is the color temperature value) White balance was changed to the memory B value. White: ATW xxxxK (where “xxxx” is the color temperature value) White balance mode was changed to ATW. Shutter: 1/xxxx (where “xxxx” is the shutter value) Shutter speed was changed (standard, Speed mode settings). Shutter: xxxx (where “xxxx” is the shutter value) Shutter speed was changed (standard, Angle mode settings). ECS: xxxxHz (where “xxxx” is the frequency value) Shutter speed was changed (ECS mode). ECS: xxxxHz (where “xxxx” is the frequency value) Shutter speed was changed (ECS mode). Iris Override: +x.xx (where “x.xx” is a numeric value) Iris override level was changed. Color Bars Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because a color bar signal is being output. Test Saw Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because a test signal is being output. Not Available Recording Cannot execute because recording is in progress. Not Available Playing back Cannot execute because playback is in progress. Not Available Displaying Thumbnails Cannot execute because the thumbnail screen is displayed. Color Bars Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because a color bar signal is being output. Not Available Playing back Cannot execute because playback is in progress. Not Available Displaying Thumbnails Cannot execute because the thumbnail screen is displayed. White Balance Preset Cannot execute because the white balance is set to the preset value. ATW Hold ATW Hold function was enabled. ATW Hold Off ATW Hold function was disabled. White balance switch was operated SHUTTER switch was operated Menu knob was turned Auto black switch was operated Auto white switch was operated Assignable switch assigned with ATW Hold function was operated 000 150 11. Appendix: Messages Displayed During Operation Operation Message Meaning and possible cause Assignable switch assigned with Clip Continuous Rec was operated Cannot Proceed Recording Cannot execute because recording is in progress. Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because a CA-FB70/TX70 Camera Adaptor is connected to the CCU. Cannot Proceed Recording Cannot execute because recording is in progress. Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because of the following conditions. • Playback is in progress • Thumbnail screen is displayed • CA-FB70/TX70 Camera Adaptor is connected to the CCU. Cannot Proceed Network Client Mode Setting is "On" Cannot execute because network client mode is enabled. Cannot Proceed Network Function is Disabled Cannot execute because network connection setting is set to Off. Cannot Proceed Network Client Mode Setting is "On" Network Function is Disabled Network client mode is set to On, but cannot execute because network connection is unavailable. Cannot Start Streaming Streaming Disabled Temporarily Cannot execute because of the following conditions. • Proxy data playback is in progress • 1280×720 clip playback is in progress with recording format set to 1920×1080 • 1920×1080 clip playback is in progress with recording format set to 1280×720 Cannot Start Streaming Please stop Recording or Playback Cannot execute because recording/playback was started while wireless function circuitry was initializing (including thumbnail display). Stop recording/playback (including thumbnail display) to enable execution. Cannot Proceed Streaming Setting is "On" Cannot configure because streaming is in progress. Cannot Connect to CCM Network Function is Disabled Cannot connect to Connection Control Manager because network connection is unavailable. Cannot Record Proxy Cannot record proxy data, when proxy data recording is started, because Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the setup menu is set to Disable. Proxy Recording will be Stopped Proxy data recording will stop because Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the setup menu is set to Disable. Cannot Connect to CCM Cannot Record Proxy • Cannot connect to Connection Control Manager because network connection is unavailable. • Cannot record proxy data, when proxy data recording is started, because Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the setup menu is set to Disable. Cannot Connect to CCM Proxy Recording will be Stopped • Cannot connect to Connection Control Manager because network connection is unavailable. • Proxy data recording will stop because Maintenance >Network Client Mode >Preset 1, Preset 2, or Preset 3 >NCM with Proxy in the setup menu is set to Disable. Cannot Connect to CCM Invalid User Name or Password Connection Control Manager authentication error occurred. Cannot Connect to CCM Invalid Address or Port Number Cannot connect to Connection Control Manager because the Connection Control Manager address or port number settings is incorrect. Assignable switch assigned with Picture Cache Rec was operated Assignable switch assigned with Streaming was operated Assignable switch assigned with Streaming was operated while network client mode is enabled 000 151 11. Appendix: Messages Displayed During Operation Operation Message Meaning and possible cause Assignable switch assigned with Auto Upload(Proxy) was operated Cannot Proceed Network Function is Disabled Cannot execute because proxy data recording circuitry and wireless function circuitry initialization are not completed. ONLINE button was pressed and held Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because wireless function circuitry is switching mode or power supply is switching off. Assignable switch assigned with Zebra was operated or ZEBRA switch on viewfinder was changed Zebra: On Zebra was set to On. Zebra: Off Zebra was set to Off. ZEBRA switch on viewfinder was operated Zebra: On Zebra was set to On. Zebra: Off Zebra was set to Off. Assignable switch assigned with Master was operated Marker: On Marker was set to On. Marker: Off Marker was set to Off. Assignable switch assigned with Video Signal Monitor was operated Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because of the following conditions. • Operation >Input/Output >SDI Out1 Select and SDI Out2 Select in the setup menu are both set to Off • Operation >Input/Output >Output Format in the setup menu is set to 720×480P or 720×576P OUTPUT switch was moved to the BARS position Not Available (color bar display) S&Q Motion: On Cannot execute because S&Q motion recording mode is enabled. Assignable switch assigned with digital extender Cannot Proceed was operated Cannot execute because of the following conditions. • Playback is in progress • Thumbnail screen is displayed • External input state • Color bars or test signal output is in progress ND filter was changed ND filter was changed. 2: 1/4ND xxxxK (where “2: 1/4ND” is the ND filter type and “xxxx” is the color temperature value) ND:3 CC: x xxxxK (where “ND:3” is the selected ND filter type and “CC: x xxxx” is the selected CC filter and color temperature value after electrical color temperature conversion) ND filter was changed with ND Filter C.Temp set to Off and Electrical CC assigned to an assignable switch. Assignable switch assigned with Color Temp SW Color Temp SW 3200K 3200K was operated Cannot Proceed ND Filter C.Temp: On Color Temp SW 3200K was enabled. Assignable switch assigned with Color Temp SW Color Temp SW 4300K 4300K was operated Cannot Proceed ND Filter C.Temp: On Color Temp SW 4300K was enabled. Assignable switch assigned with Color Temp SW Color Temp SW 5600K 5600K was operated Cannot Proceed ND Filter C.Temp: On Color Temp SW 5600K was enabled. Assignable switch assigned with Color Temp SW Color Temp SW 6300K 6300K was operated Cannot Proceed ND Filter C.Temp: On Color Temp SW 6300K was enabled. Cannot change because ND Filter C.Temp is set to On. Cannot change because ND Filter C.Temp is set to On. Cannot change because ND Filter C.Temp is set to On. Cannot change because ND Filter C.Temp is set to On. 000 152 11. Appendix: Messages Displayed During Operation Operation Message Meaning and possible cause Assignable switch assigned with Electrical CC was operated ND:3 CC: x xxxxK (where “ND:3” is the selected ND filter type and “CC: x xxxx” is the selected CC filter and color temperature value after electrical color temperature conversion) Electrical CC filter was changed. Cannot Proceed Cannot change because ND Filter C.Temp is set to On. CC 5600K 5600K setting was selected. Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because of the following conditions. • ND Filter C.Temp is set to On • Electrical CC is assigned to an assignable switch, but 5600K is not assigned to Electrical CC. Assignable switch assigned with CC5600K was operated Shot mark 1 was added. Assignable switch assigned with Shot Mark1 was Shot Mark1 operated (arbitrary character string when defining planning metadata) Cannot Record Essence Mark Reached Essence Mark Limit Cannot add because the maximum number of essence marks has been reached. Cannot Proceed Cannot add because of the following conditions. • Cannot write because the media on which to record clips is write-protected • Picture Cache Rec function is set to On • Interval Rec recording is in progress • Media is write-protected • Target clip is recorded on an SD card Shot mark 2 was added. Assignable switch assigned with Shot Mark2 was Shot Mark2 operated (arbitrary character string when defining planning metadata) Assignable switch assigned with Clip Flag OK was operated Cannot Record Essence Mark Reached Essence Mark Limit Cannot add because the maximum number of essence marks has been reached. Cannot Proceed Cannot add because of the following conditions. • Cannot write because the media on which to record clips is write-protected • Picture Cache Rec function is set to On • Interval Rec recording is in progress • Media is write-protected • Target clip is recorded on an SD card OK Clip Flag Clip flag (OK mark) was added. Delete Clip Flag Clip flag (OK mark) was deleted (by pressing the switch twice). Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because of the following conditions. • Media is write-protected • Target clip is recorded on an SD card 000 153 11. Appendix: Messages Displayed During Operation Operation Message Meaning and possible cause Assignable switch assigned with Clip Flag NG was operated NG Clip Flag Clip flag (NG mark) was added. Delete Clip Flag Clip flag (NG mark) was deleted (by pressing the switch twice). Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because of the following conditions. • Media is write-protected • Target clip is recorded on an SD card KEEP Clip Flag Clip flag (KEEP mark) was added. Delete Clip Flag Clip flag (KEEP mark) was deleted (by pressing the switch twice). Cannot Proceed Cannot execute because of the following conditions. • Media is write-protected • Target clip is recorded on an SD card Assignable switch assigned with Flash Band Reduce was operated Flash Band Reduce: On Flash Band Reduce was set to On. Flash Band Reduce: Off Flash Band Reduce was set to Off. SLOT SELECT button was operated Switched Slot Recording media to use was changed. An assignable button assigned with Slow & Quick Motion was operated in a recording format that does not support Slow & Quick Motion. Cannot Proceed S&Q Unsupported Rec Format Slow & Quick Motion cannot be used due to unsupported format. Assignable switch assigned with Clip Flag Keep was operated 000 154 11. Appendix Items Saved in User Data Table legend Yes: Saved Yes*: Saved (not cleared using Clear All Preset) No: Not saved –: Not saved (temporary setting) Default: Not saved in Reference file, but saved as default menu preset when File >Reference in the setup menu is executed. Item Input/Output User Menu Item Edit User Menu Sub-item – File type Reference Lens Output Format Yes No No No Source Select Yes No No No SDI Out1 Output Yes No No No SDI Out2 Output Yes No No No HDMI Output Yes No No No SDI Out2/HDMI Super Yes No No No Video Out Super Yes No No No Down Converter Yes No No No Reference Lens Wide ID Yes No No No Yes No No No Wide Mode(Ext.) Yes No No No LCD Sub-item Rec Function File type All Scene Reference Lens Frequency Yes* No No No File System Yes* No No No Rec Format Yes No No No Aspect Ratio (SD) Yes No No No Audio Length (IMX) Yes No No No Base Setting Shooting Mode Yes No No No HDR Setting HD Rec/Out – – – – Color Space – – – – Media(A) – – – – Media(B) – – – – SD Card(Utility) – – – – SD Card(Proxy) – – – – Format Media Scene Scene Operation Menu Format File type All All Super Impose Item Sub-item Proxy Recording Mode Super(VF Display) Yes No No No Super(Menu) Yes No No No Super(Marker) Yes No No No LCD Color Yes No No No LCD Marker&Zebra Yes No No No Slow & Quick Motion Yes No No No Frame Rate Yes No No No Clip Continuous Rec Yes No No No Picture Cache Rec Yes No No No Cache Rec Time Yes No No No Interval Rec No No No No Number of Frames Yes No No No Interval Time Yes No No No Pre-Lighting Yes No No No Simul Rec Yes No No No Setting Yes* No No No Size Yes* No No No Frame Rate – – – – Bit Rate – – – – Audio Channel Yes* No No No 000 155 11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data Item Sub-item File type Item All Scene Reference Lens Assignable Switch <0> Yes No No No <1> Yes No No No <2> Yes No No <3> Yes No <4> Yes <5> Lens RET VF Setting Marker Gain Switch Sub-item File type All Scene Reference Lens Iris Override Yes No No No Mode Yes No No No No Level Yes No No No No No Speed Yes No No No No No No Clip High light Yes No No No Yes No No No Detect Window Yes No No No Yes No No No Detect Window Indication No No No No Online Yes No No No Iris APL Ratio Yes No No No Zoom Speed Yes No No No Iris Var Width Yes No No No Color Yes No No No Iris Var Height Yes No No No Color Mode Yes No No No Iris Var H Position Yes No No No Peaking Type Yes No No No Iris Var V Position Yes No No No Peaking Frequency Yes No No No Zebra Select Yes No No No Peaking Color Yes No No No Zebra1 Level Yes No No No VF Detail Level Yes No No No Zebra1 Aperture Level Yes No No No Setting Yes No No No Zebra2 Level Yes No No No Color Yes No No No Video Level Warning Yes No No No Center Marker Yes No No No Shutter Setting Yes No No No Safety Zone Yes No No No ND Filter Position Yes No No No Safety Area Yes No No No Gain Setting Yes No No No Aspect Marker Yes No No No Rec/Play Status Yes No No No Aspect Select Yes No No No Color Temp. Yes No No No Aspect Mask Yes No No No Frame Rate/Interval Yes No No No Aspect Safety Zone Yes No No No Battery Remain Yes No No No Aspect Safety Area Yes No No No Timecode Yes No No No 100% Marker Yes No No No Audio Level Meter Yes No No No User Box Yes No No No Media Status Yes No No No User Box Width Yes No No No SD Card(Utility) Yes No No No User Box Height Yes No No No Focus Position Yes No No No User Box H Position Yes No No No Iris Position Yes No No No User Box V Position Yes No No No Zoom Position Yes No No No Gain<L> Yes No No No Extender Yes No No No Gain<M> Yes No No No ALAC Yes No No No Gain<H> Yes No No No AE Mode Yes No No No Gain <Turbo> Yes No No No Focus Mode Yes No No No Shockless Gain Yes No No No White Balance Mode Yes No No No Auto Iris Zebra Display On/Off 000 156 11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data Item Display On/Off “!” LED White Setting Offset White Shutter Sub-item File type Item All Scene Reference Lens Slow Shutter Sub-item File type All Scene Reference Lens Setting Yes Yes No No Number of Frames Yes Yes No No CC5600K Yes No No No Rec Format Yes No No No Gamma Yes No No No Time Zone Time Zone Yes No No No Timecode Lock Yes No No No Clip Clip Naming Yes No No No Network Condition Yes No No No Title Prefix Yes No No No Proxy Status Yes No No No Number Set No No No No NW Client Mode Status Yes No No No Media(A) – – – – Streaming Status Yes No No No Media(B) – – – – GPS Yes No No No GPS GPS Yes No No No Video Signal Monitor Yes No No No Load from Media(A) – – – – Clip Name Yes No No No Planning Metadata Load from Media(B) – – – – Focus Assist Indicator Yes No No No Properties – – – – Focus Area Marker Yes No No No Clear Memory – – – – Lens Info Yes No No No Clip Name Disp Yes No No No WRR RF Level Yes No No No Sort by Yes No No No Clip Number Yes No No No Select Folder – – – – – Update Media USB Gain <!> Yes No No No View Clip List – – – Shutter <!> Yes No No No Rename Folder – – – – White Preset <!> Yes No No No Error Check Yes No No No ATW Run <!> Yes No No No Format USB – – – – Extender <!> Yes No No No Copy to USB – – – – Filter <!> Yes No No No Iris Override <!> Yes No No No White Switch <B> Yes No No No Shockless White Yes No No No ATW Speed Yes No No No ATW Mode Yes No No No AWB Fixed Area Yes No No No Filter White Memory Yes No No No Offset White <A> Yes No No No Warm Cool <A> Yes No No No Warm Cool Balance<A> Yes No No No Offset White <B> Yes No No No Warm Cool <B> Yes No No No Warm Cool Balance<B> Yes No No No Mode Yes Yes No No Flash Band Reduce Media Remain – – – – Setting No No No No 000 157 11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data Paint Menu Item Gamma File type All Scene Reference Lens Setting Yes Yes Default No Step Gamma Yes Yes Yes No Item Sub-item All Scene Reference Lens Master Gamma Yes Yes Yes No Switch Status Gamma Yes Yes Default No R Gamma Yes Yes Yes No Black Gamma Yes Yes Yes No G Gamma Yes Yes Yes No Matrix Yes Yes Yes No B Gamma Yes Yes Yes No Knee Yes Yes Yes No Gamma Category Yes Yes Yes No White Clip No Yes No No Gamma Select Yes Yes Yes No Detail Yes Yes Default No Setting Yes Yes Yes No Aperture Yes Yes Default No Range Yes Yes Yes No Flare Yes Yes Default No Master Black Gamma Yes Yes Yes No Test Saw Yes No No No Setting Yes Yes Yes No HDR Paint Setting HLG Look Yes Yes Yes No Point Yes Yes Yes No HDR Black Offset Yes Yes Yes No Slope Yes Yes Yes No HDR Knee Yes Yes Yes No Knee Saturation Yes Yes Yes No HDR Knee Point Yes Yes Yes No Knee Saturation Level Yes Yes Yes No HDR Knee Slope Yes Yes Yes No HDR Black Compression Yes Yes Yes No Color Temp <A> Yes Yes Yes No Color Temp Balance <A> Yes Yes Yes No R Gain <A> Yes Yes Yes B Gain <A> Yes Yes Yes Color Temp <B> Yes Yes Color Temp Balance <B> Yes R Gain <B> White Black Flare Gamma(HDR) File type Sub-item Black Gamma Knee White Clip Setting No Yes No No Level Yes Yes Yes No Setting Yes Yes Default No Level Yes Yes Yes No No H/V Ratio Yes Yes Yes No No Crispening Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Level Depend Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Level Depend Level Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Frequency Yes Yes Yes No B Gain <B> Yes Yes Yes No Knee Aperture Yes Yes Yes No Master Black Yes Yes Yes No Knee Aperture Level Yes Yes Yes No R Black Yes Yes Yes No Limit Yes Yes Yes No B Black Yes Yes Yes No White Limit Yes Yes Yes No Setting Yes Yes Default No Black Limit Yes Yes Yes No Master Flare Yes Yes Yes No V Black Limit Yes Yes Yes No R Flare Yes Yes Yes No V Detail Creation Yes Yes Yes No G Flare Yes Yes Yes No B Flare Yes Yes Yes No Gamma Select No No No No Detail(HD) 000 158 11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data Item Detail (SD) Aperture Skin Detail Sub-item File type Item All Scene Reference Lens Setting Yes Yes Default No Level Yes Yes Yes No H/V Ratio Yes Yes Yes Crispening Yes Yes Level Depend Yes Level Depend Level Frequency Sub-item File type All Scene Reference Lens Setting Yes Yes Yes No Adaptive Matrix Yes Yes Yes No No Preset Matrix Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Preset Select Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No User Matrix Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Level Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Phase Yes Yes Yes No Knee Aperture Yes Yes Yes No User Matrix R-G Yes Yes Yes No Knee Aperture Level Yes Yes Yes No User Matrix R-B Yes Yes Yes No Limit Yes Yes Yes No User Matrix G-R Yes Yes Yes No White Limit Yes Yes Yes No User Matrix G-B Yes Yes Yes No Black Limit Yes Yes Yes No User Matrix B-R Yes Yes Yes No V Black Limit Yes Yes Yes No User Matrix B-G Yes Yes Yes No V Detail Creation Yes Yes Yes No Setting Yes Yes Yes No Cross Color Suppress Yes Yes Yes No Area Indication No No No No Setting Yes Yes Default No Color Detection – – – – Level Yes Yes Yes No Reset – – – – Setting Yes Yes Yes No Axis No No No No Matrix Multi Matrix Area Detection – – – – Hue Yes Yes Yes No Area Indication No No No No Saturation Yes Yes Yes No Level Yes Yes Yes No Setting Yes No Default No Saturation Yes Yes Yes No Master V Modulation Yes Yes Default No Hue Yes Yes Yes No R V Modulation Yes Yes Default No Width Yes Yes Yes No G V Modulation Yes Yes Default No B V Modulation Yes Yes Default No Setting Yes Yes Yes No Level Yes Yes Yes No Range Yes Yes Yes No Saturation Mode Yes Yes Yes No Knee Saturation Yes Yes Yes No Black Gamma Yes Yes Yes No Low Key Saturation Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No V Modulation Low Key Saturation Saturation Mode Noise Suppression Setting Level 000 159 11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data Thumbnail Menu Item Maintenance Menu Sub-item File type Item All Scene Reference Lens File type All Scene Reference Lens Channel Select Yes No Default No Display Clip Properties – – – – – White H Saw No No No No Set Index Picture – – – – – White H Para No No No No Thumbnail View Essence Mark Thumbnail – – – – White V Saw No No No No Clip Thumbnail – – – – White V Para No No No No Add Shot Mark1 – – – – White Saw/Para Yes No Default No Set Shot Mark Set Clip Flag Lock/Unlock Clip Copy Clip Delete Clip Transfer Clip Transfer Clip(Proxy) Filter Clips Customize View White Shading Sub-item Delete Shot Mark1 – – – – Channel Select Yes No Default No Add Shot Mark2 – – – – Black H Saw No No No No Delete Shot Mark2 – – – – Black H Para No No No No Add OK – – – – Black V Saw No No No No Add NG – – – – Black V Para No No No No Add KEEP – – – – Black Saw/Para Yes No Default No Delete Clip Flag – – – – Master Black Yes Yes Yes No Select Clip – – – – Lock All Clips – – – – Unlock All Clips – – – Select Clip – – – All Clips – – Select Clip – All Clips Black Shading Master Gain (TMP) – – – – Near End: Info Battery Yes No No No – End: Info Battery Yes No No No – Near End: Sony Battery Yes No No No – – End: Sony Battery Yes No No No – – – Near End: Other Battery Yes No No No – – – – End: Other Battery Yes No No No Select Clip – – – – Detected Battery – – – – All Clips – – – – DC Voltage Alarm DC Low Voltage1 Yes No No No Select Clip – – – – DC Low Voltage2 Yes No No No All Clips – – – – OK – – – – NG – – – – KEEP – – – – None – – – – Thumbnail Caption Yes Yes No No Battery 000 160 11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data Item Audio Sub-item File type Item Sub-item All Scene Reference Lens Front MIC Select Yes No No No Rear XLR Auto Yes No No No Front MIC CH1 Ref Yes No No No WRR Delay Comp Front MIC CH2 Ref Yes No No No Rear MIC CH1 Ref Yes No No No Rear MIC CH2 Ref Yes No No No Line Input Ref Yes No No No Min Alarm Volume Yes No No Speaker Attenuate Yes No Headphone Out Yes Reference Level Reference Out File type All Scene Reference Lens WRR Valid CH Sel Yes No No No WRR CH Select No No No No Yes No No No TX – – – – TX Audio Peak – – – – TX Input Level – – – – TX ATT Level – – – – No TX LCF Frequency – – – – No No TX System Delay Yes No No No No No No TX RF Power – – – – Yes No No No TX Power Save – – – – Yes No No No TX-Cam Power Sync Yes No No No CH1&2 AGC Mode Yes No No No TC Out Yes No No No CH3&4 AGC Mode Yes No No No DF/NDF Yes No No No AGC Spec Yes No No No LTC UBIT Yes No No No Limiter Mode Yes No No No Counter Display Yes No No No Output Limiter Yes No No No Essence Mark Find Mode Yes No No No CH1 Wind Filter Yes No No No Camera Config HD SDI Remote I/F Yes No No No CH2 Wind Filter Yes No No No Color Bars Select Yes No No No CH3 Wind Filter Yes No No No User Menu Only Yes No No No CH4 Wind Filter Yes No No No User Menu with Lock No No No No 1kHz Tone on Color Bars Yes No No No RM Common Memory Yes No No No MIC CH1 Level Yes No No No RM Rec Start Yes No No No MIC CH2 Level Yes No No No SET Key on Thumbnail Yes No No No Rear1/WRR Level Yes No No No ALAC Yes No No No Rear2/WRR Level Yes No No No Color Temp <P> Yes No No No Audio CH3 Level Yes No No No C.Temp BAL <P> Yes No No No Audio CH4 Level Yes No No No R Gain <P> Yes No No No B Gain <P> Yes No No No AWB Enable <P> No No No No ND Filter C.Temp Yes No No No ND FLT C.Temp<1> Yes No No No ND FLT C.Temp<2-4> Yes No No No Electrical CC<A> Yes No No No Electrical CC<B> Yes No No No Electrical CC<C> Yes No No No Electrical CC<D> Yes No No No WRR Setting Timecode Preset White White Filter 000 161 11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data Item Sub-item File type Item Reference Lens Setting Yes* No No No Wi-Fi Mode Yes* No No No NFC – – – – No WPS – – – – No No Channel Yes* No No No No No No SSID & Password – – – – No No No SSID – – – – Yes No No No Wi-Fi Station Remote Yes* No No No Genlock Yes No No No – – – – – – – No No No No Auto Black Shading – – – – Wi-Fi Station Scan Networks Detail SSID Settings Password – Reference No No No No Reset Black Shading – – – – DHCP Yes* No No No Master Gain (TMP) – – – – IP Address Yes* No No No APR – – – – Subnet Mask Yes* No No No Reset – – – – Gateway Yes* No No No Setup for Mobile App Setup – – – – DNS Auto Yes* No No No No No No User Name No No No No Primary DNS Server Yes* Access Authentication Password No No No No No No No – – – – Secondary DNS Server Yes* Generate Password Show Settings – – – – Device Name (Wi-Fi) – – – – IP Address (Wi-Fi) – – – – Subnet Mask (Wi-Fi) – – – – MAC Address (Wi-Fi) – – – – Regenerate Password – – – – Modem Yes* No No No Modem Remote – – – – Genlock Auto Shading APR Reference Lens DCC Function Select Yes No No No DCC D Range Yes No No No DCC Point Yes No No No DCC Gain Yes No No DCC Delay Time Yes No DCC Peak Filter Yes Mode Yes Frequency File type Scene Flicker Reduce Scene Sub-item All DCC Adjust All Network Public Key Creation – – – – Public Key Clear – – – – Create Key Date – – – – Wired LAN Yes* No No No Wired LAN Remote Yes* No No No 000 162 11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data Item Network Network Client Mode File Transfer Sub-item File type Item Sub-item File type All Scene Reference Lens DHCP Yes* No No No Setting No No No No IP Address Yes* No No No Preset Select Yes* No No No Subnet Mask Yes* No No No Preset1 Size Yes* No No No Gateway Yes* No No No Bit Rate Yes* No No No DNS Auto Yes* No No No Type Yes* No No No Primary DNS Server Yes* No No No Destination Address Yes* No No No Secondary DNS Server Yes* No No No Destination Port Yes* No No No Setting Yes* No No No Preset3 Preset Select Yes* No No No Audio Channel Yes* No No No Preset 1 Display Name Yes* No No No Date Mode Yes No No No CCM Address Yes* No No No 12H/24H Yes No No No CCM Port Yes* No No No Date – – – – User Name No No No No Time – – – – Password No No No No Language Select Yes No No No NCM with Proxy Yes* No No No Hours Meter Camera Control Yes* No No No Camera Setting No No No No Wired LAN Detail Settings All Streaming Preset2 Clock Set Scene Reference Lens Same as Preset1 Same as Preset1 Hours (System) – – – – Hours (Reset) – – – – – Reset – – – Preset 2 Same as Preset 1 Network Reset Reset – – – – Preset 3 Same as Preset 1 Fan Control Setting Yes No No No File Transfer – – – – VF Display Setting Chara/Marker Brightness Yes No No No Remote File Transfer Yes* No No No Option Type 1 – – – – Auto Upload (Proxy) Yes* No No No Type 2 – – – – Default Upload Server Yes* No No No Type 3 – – – – Clear Completed Jobs – – – – Install Option – – – – Clear All Jobs – – – – Number – – – – View Job List – – – – Version Up – – – – Net-Func Version Number – – – – Net-Func Ver.Up – – – – Version 000 163 11. Appendix: Items Saved in User Data File Menu Item Lens File Item User File All File Scene File Reference File Sub-item File type Sub-item File type All Scene Reference Lens Display Mode No No No No Recall Internal Memory – – – – All Scene Reference Lens Store Internal Memory – – – – Load SD Card – – – – Load SD Card – – – – Save SD Card – – – – Save SD Card – – – – File ID No No No No File ID No No No Yes Recall User Preset – – – – File Source – – – – Store User Preset – – – – Clear Lens Offset – – – – Clear User Preset – – – – Lens Auto Recall Yes No No No Load Customize Data Yes No No No Lens Serial Number – – – – Load White Data Yes No No No Lens Name – – – – Load SD Card – – – – Lens Manufacturer – – – – Save SD Card – – – – Master V Modulation No No No Yes File ID Yes No No No Lens Center H No No No Yes All Preset – – – – Lens Center V No No No Yes Store All Preset – – – – R Flare No No No Yes Clear All Preset – – – – G Flare No No No Yes 3Sec Clear Preset No No No No B Flare No No No Yes Recall Internal Memory – – – – White Offset R No No No Yes Store Internal Memory – – – – White Offset B No No No Yes Load SD Card – – – – Shading Ch Select Yes No No No Save SD Card – – – – Shading H SAW No No No Yes File ID No Yes No No Shading H PARA No No No Yes Scene White Data Yes No No No Shading V SAW No No No Yes Store Reference – – – – Shading V PARA No No No Yes Clear Reference – – – – Current Settings – – – – Load Reference(SD Card) – – – – Load SD Card – – – – Save Reference(SD Card) – – – – Reset – – – – File ID No No Yes No User Gamma 000 164 11. Appendix Special Recording Support by Recording Format Special recording 1) Format HD XAVC-I HD Normal recording exFAT XAVC-L 50 Interval Rec Slow & Quick Motion Clip Continuous Rec 2-slot Simul Rec Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes XAVC-L 35 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes XAVC-L 25 Yes Yes Yes – Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes MPEG HD422 exFAT UDF Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes – MPEG HD420 HQ exFAT Yes Yes – – – Yes UDF Yes Yes – – – – FAT Yes Yes – – – – Yes Yes – – – – exFAT Yes Yes – – – – UDF Yes Yes – – – – exFAT Yes – – – – – UDF Yes – – – – – MPEG HD420 SP SD Picture Cache Rec MPEG IMX 50 DVCAM 1) For details about supported image size, frame rate, and functions, see “Advanced Operations” (page 51). 000 165 11. Appendix Picture Cache Rec Mode Settings Operation >Format in the setup menu Frequency Rec Format 59.94 50 (6 3/4) 29.97 25 23.98 Cache Rec Time 0–2 sec 2–4 sec XAVC-I 1920×1080P Yes Yes XAVC-I 1920×1080i Yes Yes XAVC-I 1280×720P Yes Yes XAVC-L 50/35/25 Yes MPEG HD422 4–6 sec 6–8 sec 8–10 sec 10–12 sec 12–14 sec 13–15 sec – – – – – – Yes Yes – – – – Yes Yes – – – – Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes MPEG HD420 HQ/SP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes MPEG IMX50 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes DVCAM – – – – – – – – XAVC-I 1920×1080P Yes Yes Yes Yes – – – – XAVC-L 50/35 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes MPEG HD422 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes MPEG HD420 HQ Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 000 166 11. Appendix Media Recording and Playback Time [Note] The recording and playback times are for a continuous recording as a single clip. The actual times may be shorter, depending on the number of clips recorded. Format XAVC Intra XAVC-I HD No. of pixels/Frame rate Maximum bit rate Recording/playback time SBP-240F SBS-128G1C 1920×1080 / 59.94P, 50P 222 Mbps Approx. 115 minutes Approx. 57 minutes 1920×1080 / 29.97P, 25P, 59.94i, 50i 111 Mbps Approx. 220 minutes Approx. 105 minutes 1920×1080 / 23.98P 89 Mbps Approx. 270 minutes Approx. 135 minutes 1280×720 / 59.94P, 50P 112 Mbps Approx. 215 minutes Approx. 105 minutes XAVC-L 50 – 50 Mbps Approx. 470 minutes Approx. 230 minutes XAVC-L 35 – 35 Mbps Approx. 635 minutes Approx. 315 minutes XAVC-L 25 – 25 Mbps Approx. 850 minutes Approx. 420 minutes MPEG HD422 – 50 Mbps Approx. 445 minutes Approx. 220 minutes MPEG HD420 HQ – 35 Mbps Approx. 685 minutes Approx. 340 minutes MPEG IMX – – 50 Mbps Approx. 430 minutes Approx. 215 minutes DVCAM – – 25 Mbps Approx. 820 minutes Approx. 405 minutes XAVC Long MPEG-2 Long GOP 000 167 11. Appendix Usage Precautions The fan and battery are consumable parts that will need periodic replacement. When operating at room temperature, a normal replacement cycle will be about 5 years. However, this replacement cycle represents only a general guideline and does not imply that the life expectancy of these parts is guaranteed. For details on parts replacement, contact your dealer. ˎˎIf sending the camcorder by truck, ship, air, or other transportation service, pack it in the shipping carton of the camcorder. Care of the camcorder ˎˎLocations subject to violent vibration ˎˎNear strong magnetic fields ˎˎClose to radio or TV transmitters producing strong electromagnetic fields. ˎˎIn direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods Viewfinder To prevent electromagnetic interference from portable communications devices About the LCD panels The life expectancy of the AC adaptor and the electrolytic capacitor is about 5 years under normal operating temperatures and normal usage (8 hours per day; 25 days per month). If usage exceeds the above normal usage frequency, the life expectancy may be reduced correspondingly. Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the lenses or optical filters using a blower. Do not attempt to clean the interior of the camera using a blower. Any dust particles in the air that enter components may cause a malfunction. If the body of the camcorder is dirty, clean it with a soft, dry cloth. In extreme cases, use a cloth moistened in a little neutral detergent, then wipe dry. Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or thinners, as these may cause discoloration or other damage to the finish of the camcorder. Use and storage In the event of operating problems Note on laser beams Do not place this product close to medical devices Laser beams may damage the CMOS image sensor. If you shoot a scene that includes a laser beam, be careful not to expose the CMOS image sensor to the laser beam or any reflected light and scattered light from the laser beam. Do not subject the camcorder to severe shocks ˎˎThe internal mechanism may be damaged or the body warped. ˎˎIf an accessory mounted on the accessory shoe is subjected to severe shock, the accessory shoe may be damaged. In such a case, stop using it and contact your dealer or a Sony service representative. Do not cover the camcorder while operating Putting a cloth, for example, over the camcorder can cause excessive internal heat build-up. After use Always turn off the POWER switch. Before storing the camcorder for a long period Remove the battery pack. Shipping ˎˎRemove the media before transporting the camcorder. If you should experience problems with the camcorder, contact a Sony service representative. This product (including accessories) has magnet(s) which may interfere with pacemakers, programmable shunt valves for hydrocephalus treatment, or other medical devices. Do not place this product close to persons who use such medical devices. Consult your doctor before using this product if you use any such medical device. Use and storage locations Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or storing the camcorder in the following places. ˎˎIn excessive heat or cold (operating temperature range: 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)) Remember that in summer in warm climates the temperature inside a car with the windows closed can easily exceed 50 °C (122 °F). ˎˎIn damp or dusty locations ˎˎLocations where the camcorder may be exposed to rain The use of portable telephones and other communications devices near this camcorder can result in malfunction and interference with audio and video signals. It is recommended that the portable communications devices near this camcorder be powered off. Condensation If the unit is suddenly taken from a cold to a warm location, or if ambient temperature suddenly rises, moisture may form on the outer surface of the unit and/or inside of the unit. This is known as condensation. If condensation occurs, turn off the unit and wait until the condensation clears before operating the unit. Operating the unit while condensation is present may damage the unit. Fitting the zoom lens It is important to fit the lens correctly, as otherwise damage may result. Be sure to refer to the section “Mounting and Adjusting the Lens” (page 27). Do not leave the camcorder with the eyepiece lens pointing directly at the sun. The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun’s rays and melt the interior of the viewfinder. The LCD panel fitted to this unit is manufactured with high precision technology, giving a functioning pixel ratio of at least 99.99%. Thus a very small proportion of pixels may be “stuck”, either always off (black), always on (red, green, or blue), or flashing. In addition, over a long period of use, because of the physical characteristics of the liquid crystal display, such “stuck” pixels may appear spontaneously. These problems are not a malfunction. Note that any such problems have no effect on recorded data. Phenomena specific to CMOS image sensors The following phenomena that may appear in images are specific to CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) image sensors. They do not indicate malfunctions. White flecks Although the CMOS image sensors are produced with high-precision technologies, fine white flecks may be generated on the screen in rare cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc. This is related to the principle of image sensors and is not a malfunction. The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the following cases: ˎˎWhen operating at a high environmental temperature ˎˎWhen you have raised the master gain (sensitivity) ˎˎWhen operating in Slow-Shutter mode The problem may be alleviated by executing automatic black balance adjustment. 000 168 11. Appendix: Usage Precautions Aliasing When fine patterns, stripes, or lines are shot, they may appear jagged or flicker. Flicker If recording is made under lighting produced by discharge tubes, such as fluorescent, sodium, or mercury-vapor lamps, the screen may flicker, colors may vary, or horizontal stripes may appear distorted. In such cases, set the flicker-reduction function to auto mode (page 116). If the frame rate selected for recording is close to the power-supply frequency, flicker may not be reduced sufficiently even if you activate the Flicker-Reduction function. In such cases, use the electronic shutter. Focal plane Owing to the characteristics of the pickup elements (CMOS image sensors) for reading video signals, subjects that quickly move across the screen may appear slightly skewed. Flashband The luminance at the top and bottom of the screen may change when shooting a flashlight beam or a light source that quickly flashes. You can use the supplied application software to correct clips that contain frames with flash bands. Fragmentation If pictures cannot be recorded/reproduced properly, try formatting the recording media. While repeating picture recording/playback with a certain recording media for an extended period, files in the media may be fragmented, disabling proper recording/storage. In such a case, make a backup of clips in the media then perform formatting of the media using Operation >Format Media (page 98) in the setup menu. Notes on security ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM A FAILURE TO IMPLEMENT PROPER SECURITY MEASURES ON TRANSMISSION DEVICES, UNAVOIDABLE DATA LEAKS RESULTING FROM TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS, OR SECURITY PROBLEMS OF ANY KIND. ˎˎDepending on the operating environment, unauthorized third parties on the network may be able to access the unit. When connecting the unit to the network, be sure to confirm that the network is protected securely. ˎˎCommunication content may be unknowingly intercepted by unauthorized third parties in the vicinity of the signals. When using wireless LAN communication, implement security measures properly to protect the communication content. ˎˎFrom a safety standpoint, when using the unit connected with the network, it is strongly recommended to access the Control window via a Web browser and change the access limitation settings from the factory preset values (page 77). Changing the password regularly is also recommended. ˎˎDo not browse any other website in the Web browser while making settings or after making settings. Since the login status remains in the Web browser, close the Web browser when you complete the settings to prevent unauthorized third parties from using the unit or harmful programs from running. About GPS The GPS (Global Positioning System) is a system that calculates geographical location from highly accurate US space satellites. This system allows you to pinpoint your exact location on the earth. The GPS satellites are located in 6 orbits, 20,000 km above the earth. The GPS system consists of 24 or more GPS satellites. A GPS receiver receives radio signals from the satellites, and calculates the current location of the receiver based on the orbital information (almanac data) and travel time of the signals, etc. Determining a location is called “triangulating.” A GPS receiver can determine the location’s latitude and longitude by receiving signals from 3 or more satellites. ˎˎAs the positions of GPS satellites vary constantly, it may take longer to determine the location or the receiver may not be able to determine the location at all, depending on the location and time you use the camcorder. ˎˎ“GPS” is a system for determining geographic location by triangulating radio signals from GPS satellites. Avoid using the camcorder in places where radio signals are blocked or reflected, such as a shadowy place surrounded by buildings or trees, etc. Use the camcorder in open sky environments. ˎˎYou may not be able to record location information at locations or in situations where radio signals from the GPS satellites do not reach the camcorder as follows. –– In tunnels, indoors or under the shade of buildings. –– Between tall buildings or at narrow streets surrounded by buildings. –– In underground locations, locations surrounded by dense trees, under an elevated bridge, or in locations where magnetic fields are generated, such as near high voltage cables. –– Near devices that generate radio signals of the same frequency band as the camcorder: near 1.5 GHz band mobile telephones, etc. ˎˎIf you upload and share the images which are recorded when the setting “GPS” is ”On,” the record location may be exposed on the Internet even if you do not intend to do so. If you do not want to record location information, select “Off” for “GPS” (page 104). On triangulating errors ˎˎIf you move to another location right after setting “GPS” to “On” in the menu, it may take a longer time for the camcorder to start triangulating, compared to when you stay in the same place. ˎˎError caused by the position of GPS satellites The camcorder automatically triangulates your current location when the camcorder receives radio signals from 3 or more GPS satellites. The triangulating error allowed by the GPS satellites is about 10 m (33 feet). Depending on the environment of the location, the triangulating error can be greater. In this case, your actual location may not match the location on the map based on the GPS information. Meanwhile, the GPS satellites are controlled by the United States Department of Defense, and the degree of accuracy may be changed intentionally. ˎˎError during the triangulating process The camcorder acquires location information periodically during triangulating. On the restriction of use of GPS Use GPS in accordance with the regulations of the situation, the countries/regions of use. On the geographic coordinate system The “WGS-84” geographic coordinate system is used. 11. Appendix Specifications General 150 (6) Mass Approx. 3.6 kg (7 lb 15 oz) (body only) Dimensions (Unit: mm (inch), excluding protrusions, body only)1) 269 (10 5/8) 000 169 332 (13 1/8) 1) The values for dimensions are approximate. Power requirements 12 V (11 V to 17.0 V) DC Power consumption Approx. 22 W (body only, when recording in XAVC, with LCD monitor on) Approx. 24 W (CBK-VF02 viewfinder, lens, microphone, when recording in XAVC, with LCD monitor on) [Notes] ˎˎ Do not connect video lights with power consumption of 50 W or greater. ˎˎ When using a battery (BP-GL95B), do not allow the total power consumption of connected peripherals to exceed 55 W. ˎˎ When using the AC-DN10A, do not allow the total power consumption of connected peripherals to exceed 50 W. ˎˎ Connect only devices with current consumption of 1.8 A or lower to the DC OUT connector. Operating temperature 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F) Storage temperature –20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to +140 °F) File system exFAT, UDF, FAT Continuous operating time Approx. 195 minutes (using BP-GL95B) Recording format (video) XAVC Intra XAVC-I: CBG, 223 Mbps (max), MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 XAVC Long XAVC-L 50: VBR, 50 Mbps (max), MPEG‑4 AVC/H.264 XAVC-L 35: VBR, 35 Mbps (max), MPEG‑4 AVC/H.264 XAVC-L 25: VBR, 25 Mbps (max), MPEG‑4 AVC/H.264 MPEG-2 Long GOP MPEG HD422: CBR, 50 Mbps, MPEG-2 422P@HL MPEG HD420 HQ: VBR, 35 Mbps (max), MPEG‑2 MP@HL MPEG HD420 SP: CBR, 25 Mbps, MPEG‑2 MP@H-14 MPEG IMX CBR, 50 Mbps DVCAM CBR, 25 Mbps Proxy AVC/H.264 Main Profile 4:2:0 Long GOP 1280×720: 9 Mbps, 6 Mbps 640×360/3 Mbps, 480×270/1 Mbps, 500 kbps (VBR) Recording format (audio) XAVC Intra LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel XAVC Long LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel MPEG-2 Long GOP MPEG HD422: LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel MPEG HD420 HQ: LPCM 16-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel MPEG IMX LPCM 16/24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel DVCAM LPCM 16-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel Proxy AAC-LC, 128 kbps, 2-channel Recording/playback time See “Media Recording and Playback Time” (page 166). Recording frame rate XAVC Intra XAVC-I 1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 23.98P, 25P 1280×720/59.94P, 50P XAVC Long XAVC-L 50 1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 23.98P, 25P 1280×720/59.94P, 50P XAVC-L 35 1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 23.98P, 25P XAVC-L 25 1920×1080/59.94i, 50i MPEG-2 Long GOP MPEG HD422 1920×1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 23.98P, 25P 1280×720/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 23.98P, 25P MPEG HD420 HQ 1920×1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 23.98P, 25P 1440×1080/59.94i, 50i 1280×720/59.94P, 50P MPEG HD420 SP 1440×1080/59.94i, 50i MPEG IMX 720×486/59.94i 720×576/50i DVCAM 720×480/59.94i 720×576/50i Proxy Main line 1920×1080: 29.97P, 25P, 23.98P Main line 1280×720: 59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 23.98P Input/Output Section Inputs GENLOCK IN: BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced TC IN: BNC type, 0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 kilohms AUDIO IN CH1/CH2: XLR type, 3-pin, female LINE / AES/EBU / MIC / MIC+48V switchable LINE: +4, 0, –3 dBu AES/EBU: AES3 compliant MIC: –70 dBu to –30 dBu MIC IN: XLR type, 5-pin, female, –70 dBu to –30 dBu WRR: D-sub 15-pin Analog CH1: –40 dBu Digital CH1/CH2: –40 dBFS SDI IN: SMPTE ST292-1/259 standard compliant 4-channel audio 000 170 11. Appendix: Specifications Outputs VIDEO OUT: BNC type, SD analog composite/HD-Y switchable SDI OUT 1/2: BNC type, 0.8 Vp-p, unbalanced (3G HD/1.5G HD/SD switchable) SMPTE ST424/425 Level-A/B, ST2921/259 standard compliant 4-channel audio AUDIO OUT: XLR type, 5-pin, male, +4/0/–3 dBu (balanced) TC OUT: BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 50 ohms EARPHONE (stereo, mini jack): –11 dBu (reference level output, maximum monitor volume, 16‑ohm load) Type A, 19-pin HDMI: Other DC IN: DC OUT: XLR type, 4-pin, male, 11 V to 17 V DC Round type 4-pin, 11 V to 17 V DC, 1.8 A maximum rated current 12-pin, lens power source (11 V to 17 V LENS: DC, 1.0 A maximum rated current) REMOTE: 8-pin LIGHT: 2-pin USB: 4-pin (type A) (2), 4-pin (type B) VF: Square type 26-pin (for CBK-VF02), round type 20-pin (for HDVF series) Network connector: RJ45 type, 100BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3u), 10BASE-T (IEEE 802.3) Camera Section Audio Section Imaging element 2/3-inch type, “Exmor” Full HD CMOS image sensor 1920 (H) × 1080 (V) Type 3-chip RGB Optical system F1.4 prism system ND filters 1: Clear 2: 1/4 ND 3: 1/16 ND 4: 1/64 ND Sensitivity F12 (system frequency: 59.94i) (Typical) (2000 lx, 89.9% reflectance, 3200K) Minimum illumination 0.013 lx (F1.4, +42 dB, 16-frame accumulation) Image S/N ratio 62 dB (Noise Suppression On) (Typical) Horizontal resolution 1000 TVL (TV lines) or higher Black level 3 ±1% (Black set to [±0] in the setup menu) Shutter speed 59.94i/P, 50i/P: 1/60 to 1/2000 sec. 29.97P: 1/40 to 1/2000 sec. 25P: 1/33 to 1/2000 sec. 23.94P: 1/32 to 1/2000 sec. Slow shutter 2 to 8, 16 frames Dynamic range 600% Smear –135 dB Sampling frequency 48 kHz Quantization 16/24-bit Headroom 20 dB (factory default) (20, 18, 16, 12 dB), EBUL Frequency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz (±3 dB or less) Dynamic range 90 dB (typical) Distortion 0.08% or lower (–40 dBu input level) Built-in speaker Monaural, 300 mW output Display Section LCD monitor Screen size 8.8 cm (3.5 inch) diagonal Aspect ratio 16:9 Number of pixels 960 (H) × 540 (V) SD card slots Proxy (1), Utility (1) Lens Section (PXW-X400KC) Lens mount Sony 2/3-inch bayonet mount Focal length 8.2 mm to 164 mm Zoom Manual Zoom factor 20 Maximum aperture ratio 1:1.9 Iris Auto/Manual switchable F1.9 to F16 and C (Close) Focus range Auto/Manual switchable Range 900 mm to ∞ (macro OFF) 10 mm to ∞ (macro ON, wide angle) Filter diameter M82 mm, 0.75 mm pitch Macro ON/OFF selectable Lens Section (PXW-X400KF) Media Section SxS card slots Form factor: Express Card/34 Number of slots: 2 Connector: PCMCIA Express Card compliant Write rate: 50 Mbps or higher Read rate: 50 Mbps or higher Lens mount Sony 2/3-inch bayonet mount Focal length 8 mm to 128 mm (35 mm equivalent: 31.5 mm to 503 mm) Zoom Power/Manual switchable Zoom factor 16 Maximum aperture ratio 1:1.9 000 171 11. Appendix: Specifications Iris Auto/Manual switchable F1.9 to F16 and C (Close) Focus range Auto/Manual switchable Range 800 mm to ∞ (macro OFF) 50 mm to ∞ (macro ON, wide angle) 732 mm to ∞ (macro ON, telephoto) Filter diameter M82 mm, 0.75 mm pitch Macro ON/OFF selectable Supplied Accessories Shoulder belt (1) Cold shoe kit (1) Lens mount cap USB wireless LAN module (IFU-WLM3) Protective cap (1) Guard (1) Before Using This Unit (1) Operating Instructions (CD-ROM) (1) Lens (supplied with PXW-X400KC) (1) Autofocus lens (supplied with PXW-X400KF) (1) Flange focal length (flange back) adjustment chart (1) Stereo microphone (supplied with PXW-X400KC/ PXW-X400KF) (1) Viewfinder (supplied with PXW-X400KC/ PXW‑X400KF) (1) Stereo microphone windscreen (supplied with PXW-X400KC/PXW-X400KF) (1) Related Equipment XQD ExpressCard adaptor QDA-EX1 (for XQD memory cards) Upgrade license Recording media CBKZ-SLHL1 (HDR LICENSE) SxS memory cards SxS PRO X series SxS PRO+ series SxS PRO series SxS-1 series Power supply and related equipment AC adaptor AC-DN10A Battery pack BP-GL95B Battery charger BC-L70A Lens, viewfinder and related equipment Lens 2/3-inch bayonet mount lens only Viewfinder HDVF-20A/L750/EL20/EL30 Viewfinder rotation bracket BKW-401 Equipment for remote control Remote control unit RM-B170 RCP-1000/1500/1530 RCP-1001/1501 [Note] Command network unit (CNU) is not supported. HD camera adaptor CA-FB70/TX70 [Note] Audio equipment Microphone ECM-678/674/673/680S Microphone holder CAC-12 Digital wireless receiver DWR-S02DN/DWR-S03D UHF synthesized tuner unit URX-S03D Other peripheral devices Tripod attachment VCT-14/U14 Video light UC-D200A (Nippon Video System NIPROS) Ultralight (Anton Bauer) Pad CBK-SP01 soft-type shoulder pad Wireless LAN adaptor CBK-WA02 Network adaptor kit CBK-NA1 USB adaptor CBK-DL1 If SDI OUT2 is used when the CA-FB70 is attached, use an L-shaped adaptor. Products for maintenance, ease of use/handling Media adaptor Attachment bracket A-2092-367- MEAD-SD02 (for SD cards) Design and specifications are subject to change without notice. Notes ˎˎAlways make a test recording, and verify that it was recorded successfully. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE. ˎˎAlways verify that the unit is operating properly before use. SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT, EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON WHATSOEVER. ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CLAIMS OF ANY KIND MADE BY USERS OF THIS UNIT OR MADE BY THIRD PARTIES. ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS, REPAIR, OR REPRODUCTION OF ANY DATA RECORDED ON THE INTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEM, RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS. ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE TERMINATION OR DISCONTINUATION OF ANY SERVICES RELATED TO THIS UNIT THAT MAY RESULT DUE TO CIRCUMSTANCES OF ANY KIND. 000 172 11. Appendix: Specifications Software Downloads When the unit is used with a PC connection, download any device drivers, plug-ins, and application software you require from the following websites. Chart of Peripheral Devices and Accessories ECM-680S/678/674/673 Microphone MPEG-4 AVC Patent Portfolio License HD monitor/SD monitor CAC-12 Microphone holder Sony Professional products website: CBK-VF02 Viewfinder Japan https://www.sony.jp/professional/ All other countries https://pro.sony/ (click [Change Country, Region or Language] at the bottom of the page and select the region and language) URX-S03D UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit DWR-S02DN/DWR-S03D Digital Wireless Receiver HDVF-20A/L750/EL20/EL30 Viewfinder SxS memory cards SBS-32G1C, SBS-64G1C, SBS-128G1C, SBP-64E, SBP-128E, SBP-256E, SBP-120F, SBP-240F MEAD-SD02 Media Adaptor Sony Creative Software, software download page: http://www.sonycreativesoftware.com/download/ software_for_sony_equipment QDA-EX1 XQD ExpressCard Adaptor PXW-X400 RM-B170 RCP-1000/1500/1530 RCP-1001/1501 Remote Control Unit CA-FB70 HD Camera Adaptor CA-TX70 HD Camera Adaptor VCT-14 Tripod attachment BP-GL95B Battery Pack AC-DN10A AC Adaptor BC-L70A Battery Charger THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM 000 173 11. Appendix: Specifications END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT: BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE CONTAINED IN THE CAMCORDER, PLEASE READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (“EULA”) CAREFULLY. BY USING THE SOFTWARE YOU ARE ACCEPTING THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA, YOU MAY NOT USE THE SOFTWARE. This EULA is a legal agreement between you and Sony Corporation (“SONY”). This EULA governs your rights and obligations regarding the software of SONY and/or its third party licensors (including SONY’s affiliates) and their respective affiliates (collectively, the “THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS”) contained in the camcorder, together with any updates/ upgrades provided by SONY, any printed, on-line or other electronic documentation for such software, and any data files created by operation of such software (collectively, the “SOFTWARE”). Notwithstanding the foregoing, any software in the SOFTWARE having a separate end user license agreement (including, but not limited to, GNU General Public license and Lesser/Library General Public License) shall be covered by such applicable separate end user license agreement in lieu of the terms of this EULA to the extent required by such separate end user license agreement (“EXCLUDED SOFTWARE”). SOFTWARE LICENSE The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. The SOFTWARE is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and international treaties. COPYRIGHT All right and title in and to the SOFTWARE (including, but not limited to, any images, photographs, animation, video, audio, music, text and “applets” incorporated into the SOFTWARE) is owned by SONY or one or more of the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS. GRANT OF LICENSE SONY grants you a limited license to use the SOFTWARE solely in connection with the camcorder and only for your individual use. SONY and the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS expressly reserve all rights, title and interest (including, but not limited to, all intellectual property rights) in and to the SOFTWARE that this EULA does not specifically grant to you. REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS You may not copy, publish, adapt, redistribute, attempt to derive source code, modify, reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble any of the SOFTWARE, whether in whole or in part, or create any derivative works from or of the SOFTWARE unless such derivative works are intentionally facilitated by the SOFTWARE. You may not modify or tamper with any digital rights management functionality of the SOFTWARE. You may not bypass, modify, defeat or circumvent any of the functions or protections of the SOFTWARE or any mechanisms operatively linked to the SOFTWARE. You may not separate any individual component of the SOFTWARE for use on more than one camcorder unless expressly authorized to do so by SONY. You may not remove, alter, cover or deface any trademarks or notices on the SOFTWARE. You may not share, distribute, rent, lease, sublicense, assign, transfer or sell the SOFTWARE. The software, network services or other products other than SOFTWARE upon which the SOFTWARE’S performance depends might be interrupted or discontinued at the discretion of the suppliers (software suppliers, service suppliers, or SONY). SONY and such suppliers do not warrant that the SOFTWARE, network services, contents or other products will continue to be available, or will operate without interruption or modification. EXCLUDED SOFTWARE AND OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS Notwithstanding the foregoing limited license grant, you acknowledge that the SOFTWARE may include EXCLUDED SOFTWARE. Certain EXCLUDED SOFTWARE may be covered by open source software licenses (“Open Source Components”), which means any software licenses approved as open source licenses by the Open Source Initiative or any substantially similar licenses, including but not limited to any license that, as a condition of distribution of the software licensed under such license, requires that the distributor make the software available in source code format. If and to the extent disclosure is required, please visit www.sony. com/linux or other SONY-designated web site for a list of applicable OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS included in the SOFTWARE from time to time, and the applicable terms and conditions governing its use. Such terms and conditions may be changed by the applicable third party at any time without liability to you. To the extent required by the licenses covering EXCLUDED SOFTWARE, the terms of such licenses will apply in lieu of the terms of this EULA. To the extent the terms of the licenses applicable to EXCLUDED SOFTWARE prohibit any of the restrictions in this EULA with respect to such EXCLUDED SOFTWARE, such restrictions will not apply to such EXCLUDED SOFTWARE. To the extent the terms of the licenses applicable to Open Source Components require SONY to make an offer to provide source code in connection with the SOFTWARE, such offer is hereby made. USE OF SOFTWARE WITH COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS The SOFTWARE may be capable of being used by you to view, store, process and/or use content created by you and/ or third parties. Such content may be protected by copyright, other intellectual property laws, and/or agreements. You agree to use the SOFTWARE only in compliance with all such laws and agreements that apply to such content. You acknowledge and agree that SONY may take appropriate measures to protect the copyright of content stored, processed or used by the SOFTWARE. Such measures include, but are not limited to, counting the frequency of your backup and restoration through certain SOFTWARE features, refusal to accept your request to enable restoration of data, and termination of this EULA in the event of your illegitimate use of the SOFTWARE. CONTENT SERVICE PLEASE ALSO NOTE THAT THE SOFTWARE MAY BE DESIGNED TO BE USED WITH CONTENT AVAILABLE THROUGH ONE OR MORE CONTENT SERVICES (“CONTENT SERVICE”). USE OF THE SERVICE AND THAT CONTENT IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS OF SERVICE OF THAT CONTENT SERVICE. IF YOU DECLINE TO ACCEPT THOSE TERMS, YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE LIMITED. You acknowledge and agree that certain content and services available through the SOFTWARE may be provided by third parties over which SONY has no control. USE OF THE CONTENT SERVICE REQUIRES AN INTERNET CONNECTION. THE CONTENT SERVICE MAY BE DISCONTINUED AT ANY TIME. INTERNET CONNECTIVITY AND THIRD PARTY SERVICES You acknowledge and agree that access to certain SOFTWARE features may require an Internet connection for which you are solely responsible. Further, you are solely responsible for payment of any third party fees associated with your Internet connection, including but not limited to Internet service provider or airtime charges. Operation of the SOFTWARE may be limited or restricted depending on the capabilities, bandwidth or technical limitations of your Internet connection and service. The provision, quality and security of such Internet connectivity are the sole responsibility of the third party providing such service. EXPORT AND OTHER REGULATIONS You agree to comply with all applicable export and re-export restrictions and regulations of the area or country in which you reside, and not to transfer, or authorize the transfer, of the SOFTWARE to a prohibited country or otherwise in violation of any such restrictions or regulations. HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES The SOFTWARE is not fault-tolerant and is not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as on-line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the SOFTWARE could lead to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage (“HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES”). SONY, each of the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS, and each of their respective affiliates specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty, duty or condition of fitness for HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES. EXCLUSION OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE You acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your sole risk and that you are responsible for use of the SOFTWARE. The SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS,” without warranty, duty or condition of any kind. SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS (for purposes of this Section, SONY and each of the THIRDPARTY SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to as “SONY”) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, DUTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NONINFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SONY DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY CONDITIONS OR REPRESENTATIONS (A) THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN ANY OF THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THEY WILL BE UPDATED, (B) THAT THE OPERATION OF ANY OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECT OR ERROR-FREE OR THAT ANY DEFECTS WILL BE CORRECTED, (C) THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL NOT DAMAGE ANY OTHER SOFTWARE, HARDWARE OR DATA, (D) THAT ANY SOFTWARE, NETWORK SERVICES (INCLUDING THE INTERNET) OR PRODUCTS (OTHER THAN THE SOFTWARE) UPON WHICH THE SOFTWARE’S PERFORMANCE DEPENDS WILL CONTINUE TO BE AVAILABLE, UNINTERRUPTED OR UNMODIFIED, AND (E) REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY SONY OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF SONY SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, DUTY OR CONDITION OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THESE EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 000 174 11. Appendix: Specifications LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS (for purposes of this Section, SONY and each of the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to as “SONY”) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY RELATED TO THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF REVENUE, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR ANY ASSOCIATED HARDWARE, DOWN TIME AND USER’S TIME, EVEN IF ANY OF THEM HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN ANY CASE, EACH AND ALL OF THEIR AGGREGATE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION OF THIS EULA SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. CONSENT TO USE OF NON-PERSONAL INFORMATION, LOCATION DATA, DATA SECURITY You acknowledge and agree that SONY and its affiliates, partners and agents may read, collect, transfer, process and store certain information collected from the SOFTWARE, including but not limited to information about (i) the SOFTWARE and (ii) the software applications, contents and peripheral devices that interact with your camcorder and the SOFTWARE (“Information”). Information includes, but is not limited to: (1) unique identifiers relating to your camcorder and its components; (2) performance of the camcorder, the SOFTWARE and their components; (3) configurations of your camcorder, the SOFTWARE and the software applications, contents and peripheral devices that interact with the camcorder and the SOFTWARE; (4) use and frequency of use of the functions of (x) the SOFTWARE, and (y) the software applications, contents and peripheral devices that interact with the SOFTWARE; and (5) location data, as indicated below. SONY and its affiliates, partners and agents may use and disclose Information subject to applicable laws in order to improve its products and services or to provide products or services to you. Such uses include, but are not limited to: (a) administering the functionalities of the SOFTWARE; (b) to improve, service, update or upgrade the SOFTWARE; (c) improving, developing and enhancing the current and future products and services of SONY and other parties; (d) to provide you with information about the products and services offered by SONY and other parties; (e) complying with applicable laws or regulations; and (f) to the extent offered, providing you with location-based services of SONY and other parties, as indicated below. In addition, SONY retains the right to use Information to protect itself and third parties from illegal, criminal or harmful conduct. Certain services available through the SOFTWARE may rely upon location information, including, but not limited to, the geographic location of the camcorder. You acknowledge that for the purpose of providing such services, SONY, the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS or their partners may collect, archive, process and use such location data, and that such services are governed by the privacy policies of SONY or such third party. By using any such services, you agree that you have reviewed the privacy policies applicable to such services and consent to such activities. SONY, its affiliates, partners and agents will not intentionally use Information to personally identify the owner or user of the SOFTWARE without your knowledge or consent. Any use of Information will be in accordance with the privacy policies of SONY or such third party. Please contact applicable contact address of each area or country for SONY’s current privacy policy. Please contact applicable third parties for privacy policies relating to personally identifiable and other information you provide when you use or access third party software or services. Information may be processed, stored or transferred to SONY, its affiliates or agents which are located in countries outside of your country of residence. Data protection and information privacy laws in certain countries may not offer the same level of protection as your country of residence and you may have fewer legal rights in relation to Information processed and stored in, or transferred to, such countries. SONY will use reasonable efforts to take appropriate technical and organizational steps to prevent unauthorized access to or disclosure of Information, but does not warrant it will eliminate all risk of misuse of such Information. AUTOMATIC UPDATE FEATURE From time to time, SONY or the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS may automatically update or otherwise modify the SOFTWARE, including, but not limited to, for purposes of enhancement of security functions, error correction and improvement of functions, at such time as you interact with SONY’s or third parties’ servers, or otherwise. Such updates or modifications may delete or change the nature of features or other aspects of the SOFTWARE, including, but not limited to, functions you may rely upon. You acknowledge and agree that such activities may occur at SONY’s sole discretion and that SONY may condition continued use of the SOFTWARE upon your complete installation or acceptance of such update or modifications. Any updates/modifications shall be deemed to be, and shall constitute part of, the SOFTWARE for purposes of this EULA. By acceptance of this EULA, you consent to such update/ modification. ENTIRE AGREEMENT, WAIVER, SEVERABILITY This EULA and SONY’s privacy policy, each as amended and modified from time to time, together constitute the entire agreement between you and SONY with respect to the SOFTWARE. The failure of SONY to exercise or enforce any right or provision of this EULA shall not constitute a waiver of such right or provision. If any part of this EULA is held invalid, illegal, or unenforceable, that provision shall be enforced to the maximum extent permissible so as to maintain the intent of this EULA, and the other parts will remain in full force and effect. GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this EULA. This EULA shall be governed by the laws of Japan, without regards to conflict of laws provisions. Any dispute arising out of this EULA shall be subject to the exclusive venue of the Tokyo District Court in Japan, and the parties hereby consent to the venue and jurisdiction of such courts. EQUITABLE REMEDIES Notwithstanding anything contained in this EULA to the contrary, you acknowledge and agree that any violation of or non-compliance with this EULA by you will cause irreparable harm to SONY, for which monetary damages would be inadequate, and you consent to SONY obtaining any injunctive or equitable relief that SONY deems necessary or appropriate in such circumstances. SONY may also take any legal and technical remedies to prevent violation of and/or to enforce this EULA, including, but not limited to, immediate termination of your use of the SOFTWARE, if SONY believes in its sole discretion that you are violating or intend to violate this EULA. These remedies are in addition to any other remedies SONY may have at law, in equity or under contract. TERMINATION Without prejudice to any of its other rights, SONY may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with any of its terms. In case of such termination, you must: (i) cease all use, and destroy any copies, of the SOFTWARE; (ii) comply with the requirements in the section below entitled “Your Account Responsibilities”. AMENDMENT SONY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO AMEND ANY OF THE TERMS OF THIS EULA AT ITS SOLE DISCRETION BY POSTING NOTICE ON A SONY DESIGNATED WEB SITE, BY EMAIL NOTIFICATION TO AN EMAIL ADDRESS PROVIDED BY YOU, BY PROVIDING NOTICE AS PART OF THE PROCESS IN WHICH YOU OBTAIN UPGRADES/ UPDATES OR BY ANY OTHER LEGALLY RECOGNIZABLE FORM OF NOTICE. If you do not agree to the amendment, you should promptly contact SONY for instructions. Your continued use of the SOFTWARE after the effective date of any such notice shall be deemed your agreement to be bound by such amendment. THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARIES Each THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIER is an express intended thirdparty beneficiary of, and shall have the right to enforce, each provision of this EULA with respect to the SOFTWARE of such party. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, you may contact SONY by writing to SONY at applicable contact address of each area or country. Copyright © 2012 Sony Corporation. 000 175 11. Appendix: Specifications Open Software Licenses Trademarks On the basis of license contracts between Sony and the software copyright holders, this product uses open software. To meet the requirements of the software copyright holders, Sony is obligated to inform you of the content of these licenses. For the content of these licenses, see “License1. pdf” in the “License” folder of the supplied CDROM. ˎˎXDCAM is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation. are registered trademarks of ˎˎXAVC and Sony Corporation. ˎˎXQD is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation. ˎˎAndroid and Google Chrome are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google, Inc. ˎˎMicrosoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. ˎˎApple, Macintosh, Safari, and iPhone and their logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the US and other countries. ˎˎThe terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United States and other countries. ˎˎWi-Fi, the Wi-Fi logo, and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are trademarks or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance. ˎˎThe N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in the United States and in other countries. ˎˎQR Code is a trademark of Denso Wave Inc. ˎˎAll system names and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective owners. Trademarked items are not indicated by ® or ™ symbols in this document. ">

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- Solid-state memory recording
- Multiple format settings
- Network connectivity
- External device connection
- Assignable switches
- Timecode functionality
- Audio level adjustments
- Various recording modes
Frequently asked questions
Use the MIC LEVEL knob and the audio level adjustment switches for channels 1-4. You can also choose between automatic and manual adjustment.
Use the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch, the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, and the RESET/RETURN button to set the timecode and user bits.
You can use SxS memory cards for recording and SD cards for saving configuration data and proxy data.
Connect via wired LAN through the network connector or use wireless LAN with a USB wireless LAN module.